JP2020110411A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To increase a player's interest in a holding notice performance while attracting a player's attention to accessory operation during progress of a game.SOLUTION: A performance control device can cancel a holding notice performance standby state after timing t1 exceeding reservation shift timing, and starts a performance game by detecting a holding notice performance execution opportunity at timing t2. The performance control device performs operation guidance display of a push button from timing t3 for predetermined time when deriving an entire image of the push button in a sub-display device as a result of a performance game, and displays correspondence guidance (for example, correspondence display) without waiting for lapse of predetermined time when detecting operation of the push button at timing t4. The performance control device changes a display mode (reservation mode) of hold display in accordance with correspondence guidance at timing t5.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 111

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

There is a gaming machine that gives a notice effect in relation to the result corresponding to the starting memory before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the starting memory. As one form of such notice effect, there is a hold notice effect that changes the display mode of the hold memory display in association with the result corresponding to the starting memory. In addition, there is a gaming machine that attracts the player's attention to the action of the accessory in the course of playing the game to enhance the interest.

JP, 2012-45311, A JP, 2006-2966836, A

However, the pending notice effect is performed when the winning prize is given to the starting winning opening or when the change is started, and the holding action is performed as a predetermined effect in the variable display game. Have difficulty. In addition, attracting the player's attention to the action of the accessory during the progress of the game may distract the player's attention to the pending notice effect.

In one aspect, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine which can attract the player's attention to the action of the accessory during the progress of the game, while increasing the player's interest in the pending notice effect. ..

In order to achieve the above object, the following gaming machine is provided. The gaming machine is the first
A starting memory is stored as a right to execute the game, and the display mode of the holding display corresponding to the starting memory is changed in association with the result of the first game corresponding to the starting memory, and the pending notice effect can be executed. The first display unit, the second display unit, the third display unit, the fourth display unit, the movable unit, the operation unit, and the control unit are included. The first display section can display the first game. The second display unit can display a hold display. The third display section can display the second game executed in parallel with the first game. The fourth display unit can display a predetermined display. The movable portion can operate in a predetermined operation mode. The operation unit can accept an operation. The control unit causes the first display unit to display a guidance display for guiding the operation of the operation unit when the third display unit displays a specific result mode in the second game, and is movable when the operation unit receives the operation. And changing the first state from the second state to display a predetermined display on the fourth display unit, and displaying the correspondence between the display mode of the predetermined display on the fourth display unit and the display mode of the hold display on the second display unit. It is possible to execute the pending notice effect of displaying the corresponding relationship notification display to be notified on the first display unit and changing the display mode of the hold display on the second display unit.

According to one aspect, in the gaming machine, it is possible to raise the player's interest in the pending notice effect while attracting the player's attention to the action of the accessory in the course of the game.

It is a perspective view showing an example of the game machine of a 1st embodiment. It is a front view showing an example of a game board of the first embodiment. It is a block diagram showing an example of a control system of a game machine of a 1st embodiment. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of a production control device of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the batch display apparatus of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) which shows the flow chart of the main processing of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure (the 2) which shows the flow chart of the main processing of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the timer interruption process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the payout command transmission process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the winning number counter area of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of winning a prize switch / state monitoring processing of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the starting opening switch monitoring process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the hard random number acquisition process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure starting opening 1 switch process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of special figure starting opening 2 switch processing of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of special figure reservation information judgment processing of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure showing the flow chart of special figure 1 game processing of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure 2 game process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special process 1 normal process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure 2 normal process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) showing a flow chart of special figure 1 fluctuation start processing of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure (the 2) showing the flow chart of special figure 1 fluctuation start processing of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) which shows the flowchart of special figure 2 fluctuation start processing of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure (the 2) showing the flow chart of special figure 2 fluctuation start processing of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) showing a flow chart of change start information setting processing of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure (the 2) showing the flow chart of change start information setting processing of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the high-probability fluctuation frequency update process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) which shows the flow chart of processing during change of special figure 1 of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure (the 2) showing the flow chart of special figure 1 change processing in a 1st embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) showing a flow chart of special figure 2 change processing of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure (the 2) showing the flow chart of special figure 2 change processing of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special process 1 display process shift setting process 1 of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure 2 display process transfer setting process 1 of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special process 1 to-be-displayed process transfer setting process 2 of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special process 2 display process transfer setting process 2 of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) which shows the flow chart of processing in the special figure 1 display of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure (the 2) which shows the flowchart of the process in the special figure 1 display of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure (the 3) which shows the flow chart of processing during a special figure 1 display of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) which shows the flowchart of the special figure 2 display processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure (the 2) which shows the flow chart of the processing in the special figure 2 display of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure (the 3) which shows the flow chart of the special figure 2 display processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) which shows the flow chart of external information edit processing of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure (the 2) showing the flow chart of external information edit processing of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure showing a flow chart of main processing in a production control device of a 1st embodiment. It is the figure which shows the flowchart of the reception command check processing in the production control control equipment of 1st execution form. It is a figure showing a flow chart of received command analysis processing in a production control device of a 1st embodiment. It is a front view showing an example of a game board of the game machine of the second embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the sub display apparatus of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen of the display apparatus of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) which shows an example of the production mode in the game machine of a 2nd embodiment. It is a figure (2) which shows an example of the production mode in the game machine of a 2nd embodiment. It is a figure (3) which shows an example of the production mode in the game machine of a 2nd embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the display aspect of the flame|frame of 2nd Embodiment, a count result, and an expectation. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the execution timing of the count production in the second embodiment, the fire debris production, and the big hit notification production. It is a figure showing the flow chart of production mode decision processing at the time of execution of count production of a 2nd embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the attitude|position state of the sub display apparatus of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) which shows an example of the display screen in the display of a 3rd embodiment. It is a figure (the 2) which shows an example of the display screen in the display of a 3rd embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol variation by symbol switching in the sub display apparatus of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol variation by horizontal scroll in the sub display apparatus of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the display production determination process in the production control apparatus of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of arrangement|positioning of the push button LED and the touch sensor in the push button of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the relationship between the push button operation of 3rd Embodiment, and the attitude|position change state of a sub display apparatus. It is a figure showing an example of a posture change state and a change display of a sub display device of modification 1 of a 3rd embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the attitude|position change state of a sub display apparatus of the modification 2 of 3rd Embodiment, and a variable display. It is a figure which shows an example of the variable display in the sub display apparatus of the modification 3 of 3rd Embodiment. FIG. 17 is a diagram (No. 1) showing an example of variable display on the sub display device according to the modified example 4 of the third embodiment. FIG. 17 is a diagram (No. 2) showing an example of variable display on the sub display device according to the modified example 4 of the third embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of a game state transition diagram and a probability change state of a 4th embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) which shows an example of the display screen in the display of a 4th embodiment. It is a figure (the 2) which shows an example of the display screen in the display of a 4th embodiment. It is a figure (the 3) showing an example of a display screen in a display of a 4th embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the large symbol display mode classified by conditions at the time of the small hit of 4th Embodiment. It is the figure which shows the flowchart of the small hitting design decision processing in the production control control equipment of 4th execution form. It is a figure showing an example of reservation storage and a small hitting pattern of a 4th embodiment. It is a front view showing an example of a game board of the fifth embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the sub display apparatus of 5th Embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of production starting memory display and its display mode of a 5th embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of a structure and a display mode of a production lamp of a 5th embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of the operation mode of the board production device of a 5th embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the pattern of the effect game which the sub display apparatus of 5th Embodiment plays. It is a figure which shows an example of the reach derivation display in the sub-display apparatus of 5th Embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) which shows an example of the reach production display in the sub display of a 5th embodiment. It is a figure (the 2) which shows an example of the reach production display in the sub display of a 5th embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the rocking|fluctuation display in the sub display apparatus of 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of 3 symbol temporary stop derivation display in the sub display apparatus of 5th Embodiment. It is the figure which shows the flowchart of production start memory count increase processing in the production control control equipment of 5th execution form. It is the figure which shows the flowchart of the production game execution opportunity decision processing in the production control control equipment of 5th execution form. It is the figure which shows the flowchart of the production game pattern setting processing in the production control control equipment of 5th execution form. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the effect game skip process in the effect control apparatus of 5th Embodiment. It is the timing chart which shows the flow of processing when the production control device of 5th execution form plays the production game with pattern 1. It is the timing chart which shows the flow of the processing when the production control device of 5th execution form plays the production game with pattern 2. It is the timing chart which shows the flow of the processing when the production control device of 5th execution form plays the production game with pattern 3. It is the timing chart which shows the flow of the processing when the production control device of 5th execution form plays the production game with pattern 4. It is a timing chart which shows the flow of a process when the production|presentation control apparatus of 5th Embodiment plays a production game by the pattern 5. It is a figure which shows an example of the music selection display in the sub display apparatus of the modification 1 of 5th Embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows the flow of a process in case the production control device of the modification 1 of 5th Embodiment plays a production game by the pattern 1. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the effect game execution timing determination process in the effect control device of the modification 2 of 5th Embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows the flow of a process when the production control device of the modification 3 of 5th Embodiment plays an effect game multiple times in one special figure fluctuation display game. It is a timing chart which shows the flow of a process when an effect control device of the modification 4 of 5th Embodiment plays an effect game over a plurality of special figure variable display games. It is a timing chart which shows the flow of a process in the case where the production|presentation control apparatus of the modified example 5 of 5th Embodiment plays an effect game over several special figure variable display games. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen in the display apparatus of 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the production game in the sub display apparatus of 6th Embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) which shows an example of operation guidance of a push button using a display, a subdisplay, and a production lamp of a 6th embodiment. It is a figure (the 2) which shows an example of operation guidance of a push button using a display, a subdisplay, and a production lamp of a 6th embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) which shows an example of the reservation notice effect accompanied by the change of the display mode of a reservation display or a reservation exhaustion display of a 6th embodiment. It is a figure (the 2) which shows an example of the reservation notice production accompanied by the change of the display mode of a reservation display or a reservation exhaustion display of a 6th embodiment. It is a figure (the 3) which shows an example of the reservation notice effect accompanied by change of the display mode of a reservation display or a reservation exhaustion display of a 6th embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the display mode and expectation degree in the pending notice production of 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the pending notice effect accompanied by the change of the display mode of the hold display or the hold exhaustion display of the modification of 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the timing chart of the suspension notice production of 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the expectation notification of the modification of 6th Embodiment. It is a figure showing a flow chart of reservation change mode decision processing in a production control device of a 6th embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the effect game setting process in the effect control apparatus of 6th Embodiment. It is a figure showing a flow chart of operation guidance setting processing in a production control device of a 6th embodiment. It is the figure which shows the flowchart of the correspondence guidance setting processing in the production control control equipment of 6th execution form. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen in the display apparatus of the modification 1 of 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the timing chart of the pending notice production of the modification 2 of 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the production|presentation aspect in the prior notice of the pending notice production of the modification 2 of 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the pending notice effect accompanied by the change of the display mode of the hold display or the hold exhaustion display of the modification 3 of 6th Embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) which shows an example of the reservation notice production accompanied by the change of the display mode of the reservation display or the reservation exhaustion display of the modification 4 of a 6th embodiment. It is a figure (the 2) which shows an example of the reservation notice production accompanied by the change of the display mode of the reservation display or the reservation exhaustion display of the modification 4 of a 6th embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the pending notice production accompanied by the change of the display mode of the pending display or pending consumption display of the modification 5 of 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the relationship of the production|generation lamp of the modified example 6 of 6th Embodiment, a correspondence display, and a hold display. It is a figure which shows an example of the relationship of the production|generation lamp of the modified example 7 of 6th Embodiment, a correspondence display, and a hold display.

Hereinafter, embodiments will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.
[First Embodiment]
First, a first embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing an example of the gaming machine of the first embodiment.

The gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment includes a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is an outer frame (support frame).
It is attached to 11 so that it can be opened and closed. The game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is stored in a storage portion (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12. In addition, a glass frame (transparent plate holding frame) 15 having a cover glass (transparent member) 14 that covers the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame (main body frame) 12.

Further, on the left and right of the glass frame 15, a lamp, an LED, or the like is built in, and decorations and effects, and notification when an abnormality occurs (for example, when a payout abnormality occurs, an abnormality notification color of the lamp, the LED, or the like (for example, The frame decoration device 18 that emits light for lighting (blinking) in red) and sound (
For example, a speaker (upper speaker) 19a that emits a sound effect is provided. further,
A speaker (lower speaker) 19b is also provided below the front frame 12. When an abnormality occurs, the contents of the abnormality are notified by voice from the speakers 19a and 19b. In addition,
You may make it provide the lamp for alert|reporting a payout abnormality in the predetermined part of the glass frame 15. FIG.

Further, in the lower part of the front frame 12, an upper plate (storage plate) 21 for supplying a game ball to a hitting ball launching device (not shown), and a game ball paid out from a payout unit provided on the back side of the gaming machine 10. An upper plate ball outlet 22 that flows out, a lower plate (receiving plate) 23 that stores the game balls that have been paid out in a state where the upper plate 21 is full, and an operation unit 24 of the ball striking device are provided. Furthermore, plate 2
At the upper edge of 1, an option setting section 25 is provided for the player to set various options. A plurality of selection button switches 25 are provided around the upper surface of the option setting section 25.
a is provided, and a decision button switch 25b is provided at the center of the upper surface of the option setting section 25. The option setting unit 25 functions as a production setting unit in which the player sets a production mode. In this case, the selection button switch 25a functions as a production button switch for selecting a production mode, and the determination button switch 25b functions as a determination button switch for determining the production mode. Further, a key hole 26 for inserting a key for opening or locking the front frame 12 or the glass frame 15 is provided on the lower right side of the front frame 12.

When the selection button switch 25a functions as a production button switch, the gaming machine 1
With 0, based on the operation of the player received from the selection button switch 25a and the determination button switch 25b, it is possible to perform an effect in which the operation of the player is intervened. For example,
The effect in which the player's operation is intervened is the effect in the variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) on the display device (variable display device) 41 (see FIG. 2), and the gaming machine 10 displays on the display device 41. The displayed character can be operated, and the identification information in the decorative special figure variable display game displayed on the display device 41 can be stopped.

Further, on the right side of the option setting section 25, a ball lending button 27, which is operated when the player receives a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, is operated to eject a prepaid card from a card unit of the ball lending machine. A discharge button 28, a balance display section (not shown) for displaying the balance of the prepaid card, and the like are provided. In the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, the player turns the operation portion 24 to cause the ball-striking launcher to supply the game balls supplied from the upper plate 21 to the game area 32 on the front surface of the game board 30. (See Fig. 2). By operating the selection button switch 25a and the enter button switch 25b, the player can set, for example, the volume emitted from the speakers 19a and 19b and the brightness of the game board 30. ..

Next, the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view showing an example of the game board of the first embodiment.
On the surface of the game board 30, a substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 is formed. The game area 32 is a resin side case 3 provided at each of four corners of the game board 30.
3 and the guide rail 31. In the game area 32, a center case (game production structure) 40 having a display device (variable display device) 41 in the substantially center is arranged. The display device 41 is attached to a recess provided in the center case 40 at a position deeper than the front surface of the center case 40. That is, the center case 40 surrounds the display area of the display device 41, projects forward from the display surface of the display device 41, and is formed so that the game ball does not easily jump into the surrounding game area 32.

The display device 41 is configured by a device having a display screen such as an LCD (liquid crystal display) and a CRT (Cathode Ray Tube). In the area where the image on the display screen can be displayed (display area), a plurality of pieces of identification information (special symbols), information relating to the game such as a character that directs the special figure variable display game, and a background image that enhances the effect are displayed. .. On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variably displayed (variably displayed), and a decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure variable display game is played. Further, on the display screen, an image for an effect based on the progress of the game (for example, a big hit display image,
Fanfare display image, ending display image, etc.) are displayed.

Further, on the upper part of the center case 40, there is provided a board effect device 44 which produces an effect by playing. The board effect device 44 is changed from the state shown in FIG.
It is operable toward the center of 1.

On the right side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, a normal symbol starting gate (universal figure starting gate) 34 for providing the starting condition of the universal figure changing display game is provided. The game ball that has won the universal figure starting gate 34 (the game ball that passes through the universal figure starting gate 34) is detected by the gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3).

Further, on the lower left side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, two general winning openings 3
5 are arranged, and one general winning opening 35 is arranged on the lower right side of the center case 40 and on the right side of the special variation winning device 38 described later. The game balls that have won the general winning openings 35 are detected by the winning opening switch 35a (see FIG. 3).

Further, below the center case 40 in the game area 32, a start winning opening 36 forming a first starting winning opening (starting winning area) for giving a starting condition of the first special drawing changing display game (special drawing 1 changing display game). (Starting port 1) is provided. The game ball that has won the starting winning opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3).

Further, at a position lower than the universal figure starting gate 34 and on the right side of the center case 40,
A normal variable winning device 37 (first starting winning opening, starting winning area) for giving a start condition of the first special drawing changing display game (special drawing 1 changing display game) is provided. The normal variation winning device 37 (starting opening 1) is provided with a movable member 37b that can be opened by turning the upper end side in a direction tilting to the right and converted into a state in which a game ball can easily flow in. This movable member Numeral 37b always holds a closed state (a disadvantageous state for the player) in which the game ball is almost vertical and a game ball cannot flow in.
Then, when the result of the universal figure variation display game is in a predetermined stop display mode, the universal electrical solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) as a drive device rotates so that the upper end side falls to the right and normally varies. The game balls can be changed into an open state (a state advantageous to the player) in which the game balls can easily flow into the winning device 37. The game ball that has won the normal variation winning device 37 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 37a (see FIG. 3). It should be noted that the normal variable winning device 37 may be allowed to win even in the closed state, and may be harder to win in the closed state than in the open state. The normal variation winning device 37 corresponds to a normal electric accessory (general electric power).

On the right side of the normal variation winning device 37, a downflow path 91 through which game balls can flow down is formed, and the game balls that have not won the normal variation winning device 37 flow down through the downflow path 91. A start winning port 92 is provided in the lower part of the flow path 91, and a guide portion 93 is provided below the flow path 91.
Is provided. The upper surface 94 of the guiding portion 93 is an inclined surface that descends to the left, and the upper surface 94 receives a game ball that flows downward without winning the start winning port 92, and the special variable winning device 38 described later is present on the left. It is designed to guide you.

The starting winning opening 92 is a second starting winning opening (starting winning area) that gives a starting condition for the second special figure variation display game (special drawing 2 varying display game). The winning game ball is detected by the start port 2 switch 92a (see FIG. 3).

In addition, below the starting winning opening 36 in the game area 32, a special variation winning device (which can be converted into a state in which a game ball is not accepted and a state in which it is easily accepted depending on the result of the special figure variation display game (
The lower prize holes and the big prize holes 1) 95 are provided. The special variation winning device 95 includes the opening/closing member 9
5c, and the opening/closing member 9 depending on the result of the special figure variation display game as an auxiliary game.
The open/close member 95c converts the closed state in which 5c closes the special winning opening (a closed state that is disadvantageous to the player) to an open state (a state advantageous to the player) in which the game ball flowing down the game area 32 can be received. That is, the special variation winning device 95 is the special winning opening 1 solenoid 9 as a driving device.
It is equipped with a special winning opening (lower special winning opening, special winning opening 1) that is opened and closed by an opening/closing member 95c driven by 5b (see FIG. 3), and a small hitting game state (second one) based on the result of the special display 1 variable display game During the special game state), the special winning opening is converted from the closed state to the open state to facilitate the inflow of the game balls into the special winning opening and give the player a predetermined game value (prize). It is supposed to do. A special winning opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 3) is provided inside the special winning opening (winning area) as a detecting means for detecting a game ball that has entered the special winning opening. ..

Further, in the lower right of the center case 40 in the game area 32, a special variable winning device (upper prize hole, big prize) that can be converted into a state in which a game ball is not accepted and a state in which it is easily accepted depending on the result of the special figure variation display game. Mouth 2) 38 is provided. The special variation winning device 38 has an opening/closing member (opening/closing door) 38c, and the opening/closing member 38c closes the special winning opening depending on the result of the special figure variation display game as an auxiliary game (a disadvantage to the player. The open/close member 38c retreats from the normal closed state) to an open state (a state advantageous to the player) in which the game ball flowing down the game area 32 can be received. That is, the special variation winning device 38 is provided with a special winning opening (upper special winning opening, big winning opening 2) that is opened and closed by the opening/closing member 38c driven by the special winning opening 2 solenoid 38b (see FIG. 3) as a drive device. , Special figure 1 variable display game and special figure 2 variable display game results in a big hit game state (first special game state), and special figure 2 variable display game results in a small hit game state (second special game state) In the middle, by converting the big winning opening from the closed state to the open state, it is possible to facilitate the inflow of the game ball into the big winning hole, and to give the player a predetermined game value (prize ball). ing. In addition, inside the big prize hole (prize area)
A special winning opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 3) is provided as a detecting means for detecting the game ball that has entered the special winning opening.

In addition, when there are a plurality of special winning openings as in the present embodiment, one or two large winning openings switches 38a are provided as a whole (see FIG. 3). In the case of the first embodiment, only one special winning opening switch 38a is arranged in the special variation winning device 95 which constitutes the first special variation winning device (lower special winning opening, special winning opening 1). On the other hand, the special variation winning device 38 that forms the second special variation winning device (upper special winning opening, big winning opening 2) is the special winning opening switch 38.
A plurality of (for example, two) a's are arranged. The special variation winning device 95 is, for example, a winning device (so-called mini attacker) having a smaller big winning opening than the special variation winning device 38.

A warp opening (warp entrance) 39a is provided on the left side portion of the center case 40. The game ball flowing into the warp flow path from the warp opening 39a rolls on the stage in the center case 40, and a part of the game ball is guided to the warp exit 39b. The warp exit 39b is located immediately above the starting winning opening 36, and the game ball guided to the warping exit 39b is the starting winning opening 36.
It becomes easier to win.

In the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, of the game area 32 in which the game balls flow down, the area on the left side of the center case 40 is the left side game area, and the area on the right side of the center case 40 is the right side game area. It is said that. Then, the player adjusts the firing force and shoots a game ball to the left-side game area (so-called left hitting), so that the start winning port 36, the special variation winning device 95, the general winning port 35 (the right of the special variation winning device 38). You can aim for winning in the general winning opening 35 in the section), and by launching a game ball to the right-side game area (so-called right-handed), the universal figure starting gate 34, the normal variation winning device 37, the special variation winning It is possible to aim for winning in the device 38 or the like.

Further, on the outside of the game area 32 (here, the lower right part of the game board 30), the first special figure changing display game, the second special figure changing display game and the general figure starting gate 34, which are special figure changing display games, are displayed. Collective display device 50 for displaying a general-purpose variable display game triggered by winning and various information
Is provided.

The collective display device 50 includes a round display section 51 including LEDs, a special figure 1 hold display section 52, a special figure 1 symbol display section 53, a special figure 2 symbol display section 54, and a general symbol display section. 55, a universal figure reservation display section 56, and a status display section 57 (see FIG. 5). Details of the collective display device 50 will be described later.

Next, a control system of the gaming machine will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an example of the control system of the gaming machine of the first embodiment.
The gaming machine 10 includes a game control device 100, and the game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that controls a game in a centralized manner, and a game microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a game microcomputer) 111. CPU (Central Processing Unit) section 110 having an input port, an input section 120 having an input port, an output section 130 having an output port and a driver, and a CPU
The data bus 140 and the like connect the unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit 130.

The CPU unit 110 includes a game microcomputer 111 called an amusement chip (IC (Integrated Circuit)) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and serves as a reference for an operation clock of the game microcomputer 111, a timer interrupt, and a random number generation circuit. Oscillator circuit that generates a clock (
Crystal oscillator) 113 and the like. The game control device 100 and electronic components such as solenoids and motors driven by the game control device 100 are DC (Di) generated by the power supply device 400.
Rect Current) DC voltage of a predetermined level such as 32V, DC12V, DC5V is supplied to enable operation.

The power supply device 400 uses an AC (which generates a DC voltage of 32V DC from an AC power supply of 24V).
Alternating Current)-DC converter or DC32V voltage to DC12V, DC5V
Power supply unit 4 having a DC-DC converter or the like for generating a lower level DC voltage such as
10, a backup power supply unit 420 that supplies a power supply voltage to a RAM (Random Access Memory) inside the gaming microcomputer 111 at the time of power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and the occurrence and recovery of power failure in the game control device 100. A control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs a control signal such as a power failure monitoring signal or a reset signal to be notified is provided.

In the first embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are on separate boards or integrated with the game control device 100, that is, It may be configured to be provided on the main substrate. Game board 30
Since the game control device 100 is subject to replacement when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are provided on a board different from the power supply apparatus 400 or the main board as in the first embodiment. By providing the above, the cost can be reduced by excluding it from the object of replacement.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be composed of one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is the game microcomputer 111 (of the game control device 100).
In particular, the data supplied to the internal RAM) is stored in the RAM even during a power failure or after the power is cut off. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32 V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, detects the occurrence of a power failure when the voltage drops to, for example, 17 V or less, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the reset signal after a predetermined time. Is output. Further, even when the power is turned on or the power is restored, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that point.

Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112. This R
When the AM initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, processing for forcibly initializing the information stored in the RAM 111C in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200. Is performed. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is the game microcomputer 1
11 is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed. The reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.

The gaming microcomputer 111 is a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A.
, Read-only ROM (Read Only Memory) 111B and RA that can be read and written at any time
Equipped with M111C.

The ROM 111B non-volatilely stores invariant information (programs, fixed data, judgment values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control, and the RAM 111C stores a work area of the CPU 111A or a storage area of various signals and random number values at the time of game control. Used as. ROM111B or R
As the AM 111C, an electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as an EEPROM (Electrically Erasable Programmable ROM) may be used.

Further, the ROM 111B stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the effect contents, the presence or absence of the reach state, and the like. The fluctuation pattern table includes the fluctuation pattern random number 1, the fluctuation pattern random number 2, and the fluctuation pattern random number 3 stored as starting memory, which are stored in the CPU 111A.
Is a table for determining a fluctuation pattern with reference to FIG. Further, the variation pattern table includes a deviation variation pattern table selected when the result is a loss, a big hit variation pattern table selected when the result is a big hit, and the like. Further, these pattern tables are tables for determining the second half variation pattern which is the variation pattern after reaching the reach state (second half variation group table, second half variation pattern selection table, etc.).
, A table (first half variation group table, first half variation pattern selection table, etc.) for determining the first half variation pattern which is the variation pattern before reaching the reach state.

Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. In the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state becomes a gaming state (special gaming state) that is advantageous to the player when the special result mode is set, some of the plurality of display results have not yet been derived and displayed. A display state in which the display result that is derived and displayed satisfies the condition of the special result mode. In other words, the reach state is out of the display condition that is the special result mode even when the variable display control of the display device progresses to reach the stage before the display result is derived and displayed. It refers to a display mode that does not exist. Then, for example, the state in which the variable display is performed by the plurality of variable display areas while maintaining the state in which the special result forms are uniform (so-called full rotation reach) is also included in the reach state. Further, the reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device progresses to reach the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. The display state in the case where at least a part of the display results of the plurality of variable display areas satisfying the condition satisfies the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, the decorative special figure variable display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variable display game changes a plurality of pieces of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle and right variable display areas of the display device. After displaying, if the result mode is displayed by stopping the variable display in the order of left, right, and middle, in the left and right variable display areas, a condition that satisfies the special result mode (for example, The state where the variable display is stopped by the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition to this, at the time when the variable display of all variable display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition that the special result mode is satisfied in any two variable display areas of left, middle, and right (for example, the same The state that has become the identification information (except for the special result mode) may be a reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variably displayed from this reach state.

Then, this reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), as reach effects with different possibility of deriving the special result mode (expected value is different), Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), special 3
Reach (SP3 reach) and Premier reach are set. The expected value increases in the order of “no reach”<“normal reach”<“special 1 reach”<“special 2 reach”<“special 3 reach”<“premier reach”. In addition, this reach state is included in at least the variable display mode when the special result mode is derived in the special figure variable display game (when it is a big hit). That is, it may be included in the variable display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variable display game (when the special result mode is lost). Therefore, the state in which the reach state has occurred is a state in which there is a high possibility of a big hit compared to the case where the reach state does not occur.

The CPU 111A executes the game control program in the ROM 111B to generate a control signal (command) for the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300, or generate and output a drive signal for a solenoid or a display device to output the game machine 10. Perform overall control. Although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 is a jackpot random number for determining the hit of the special figure variation display game, a big hit symbol random number for determining the symbol of the big hit, and a variation pattern in the special figure variation display game (various types). A random number generation circuit for generating a random number of a variation pattern for determining the reach or the execution time of the variation display game in the variation display without reach, a hit random number for determining the hit of the universal figure variation display game, etc. And a clock generator that generates a clock that gives a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined period (for example, 4 msec (ms)) to the CPU 111A and an update timing of the random number generation circuit based on the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113. I have it.

Further, the CPU 111A executes the ROM 111B in the processing related to the special figure variation display game.
One of the plurality of fluctuation pattern tables stored in is acquired. Specifically, the CPU 111A causes the special figure variation display game to have a game result (hit (big hit or small hit) or miss) and the probability state (normal probability state or high probability) of the special figure variation display game as the current game state. State), the operation state (time saving operation state) of the normal variation winning device 37 as the current game state, the number of starting memories, etc., and any one of the variation pattern tables is selected from the plurality of variation pattern tables. To get. Where CP
U111A serves as a variation distribution information acquisition unit that acquires any one of the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B when executing the special figure variation display game.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, and the like, and according to a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100, a payout motor of a payout unit provided in the gaming machine 10. Is driven to perform control for paying out prize balls. Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball rental request signal from the card unit of the ball lending machine attached to the gaming machine 10,
Control for paying out balls.

In the input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111, the starting opening 1 switch 36 in the starting winning opening 36
a, a starting opening 1 switch 37a in the normal variation winning device 37, a starting opening 2 switch 92a in the starting winning opening 92, a gate switch 34a in the universal figure starting gate 34, a winning opening switch 35a,
It is connected to the special winning opening switch 38a of the special variation winning device 38 or the special variation winning device 95, and a negative logic signal such as a high level of 11V and a low level of 7V supplied from these switches is input, and 0V-5V Interface chip (proximity I/
F) 121 is provided. The detection signal of the board radio wave sensor 62 for detecting the emission of the radio wave to the gaming machine 10 is also input to the proximity I/F 121. Further, the proximity I/F 121 has an input range of 7V to 11V, so that the lead wires of the sensor or the proximity switch are illegally short-circuited, the sensor or switch is removed from the connector, or the lead wire is cut. An abnormal state such as a floating state can be detected, and an abnormality detection signal is output.

It should be noted that the winning hole switch 35a will be described. In FIG.
Although it is shown by a block, actually, a plurality (N pieces) of the winning opening switches 35a (three in the present embodiment) are provided on the game board 30, and the respective signals come close to each other through different signal lines. I
/F121 has been input. Further, in FIG. 3, the special winning opening switch 38a is shown by one block, but in reality, a plurality (X pieces) of the special winning opening switch 38a (in the present embodiment, 3
Are provided on the game board 30. Then, the plurality of special winning opening switches 38a,
They are connected by different signal lines, or, for example, a switch and the game control device 10
It is connected to the game control device 100 by a method called wired OR on a relay board (not shown) existing between 0 (main board). The board radio wave sensor 62 and the magnetic sensor 61 to be described later may be connected by a plurality of different signal lines, or may be similarly connected to the game control device 100 by a wired OR system.

The output of the proximity I/F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and read by the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. In addition, proximity I/F
Among the outputs of 121, the detection signals of the starting opening 1 switches 36a and 37a, the starting opening 2 switch 92a, the gate switch 34a, the winning opening switch 35a, and the special winning opening switch 38a are input to the second input port 123. It should be noted that the signal output (output from the proximity I/F 121) of the starting port 1 switches 36a and 37a which are the starting port switches of the special figure 1 is shown by one signal line in FIG. There are two.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the detection signal of the board radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when the abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the third input port 124. Further, in the third input port 124, a detection signal of a magnetic sensor 61 for fraud detection provided on the front frame 12 of the gaming machine 10 or the like, a frame radio wave fraud signal from the payout control device 200 (front frame 1
A signal output based on the detection of radio waves by the frame radio wave sensor provided in 2) and a payout busy signal (a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept a command) are also input. Is becoming Note that a vibration sensor switch for detecting vibration may be provided in the game machine and a detection signal of this vibration sensor switch may be input to the third input port 124.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the output to the second input port 123 is also supplied from the game control device 100 to the test shot test device (not shown) via the relay board 70. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the detection signals of the starting port 1 switches 36a and 37a and the starting port 2 switch 92a are configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123. There is.

As described above, the proximity I/F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I/F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12 V from the power supply device 400 in addition to the voltage of 5 V required for normal IC operation. Is becoming

The data held by the second input port 123 is asserted (to a valid level) by enabling the game microcomputer 111 to decode an address assigned to the second input port 123 to enable an enable signal CE (Chip Enable) (not shown). It can be read out by changing. The same applies to the third input port 124 and the first input port 122 described later.

Further, the input unit 120 detects a detection signal from a glass frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10 or a main frame opening detection provided on the front frame (main frame) 12 of the gaming machine 10. A detection signal of the switch 64, a payout abnormality status signal (a status signal indicating a payout abnormality), a shoot ball out switch signal (a signal indicating a shortage of game balls before payout), an overflow switch signal (a predetermined amount of game balls on the lower plate 23). The data bus 140 is acquired by taking in the signal stored when the storage (full) is detected and the touch switch signal (a signal based on the input of the touch switch provided in the operation unit 24). A first input port 122 is provided for supplying to the gaming microcomputer 111 via.

Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 and the like, and the Schmitt buffer 125 inputs these. It has a function of removing noise from a signal. The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and the initialization switch signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is handled as a signal equivalent to the signal from the above-mentioned various switches. This is because the number of terminals provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 for receiving signals from the outside is limited.

On the other hand, the reset signal RESET from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is
It is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and is also supplied to each port of the output unit 130. In addition, the reset signal RESET is directly output to the relay board 70 without passing through the output unit 130, thereby turning off the test shot test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test shot test apparatus. Is configured to. Also,
The reset signal RESET may be configured to be output to the test-shooting test apparatus via the relay board 70. The reset signal RESET is not supplied to the first to third ports 122, 123, 124 of the input section 120. The data set to each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input needs to be reset in order to prevent a malfunction of the system, but the data of the input unit 120 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from each port is discarded by resetting the gaming microcomputer 111.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 132 arranged on a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. It should be noted that one-way communication is made so that no signal can be input from the effect control device 300 side to the game control device 100.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140, and transmits data for notifying special test symbol information of the variable display game to a test firing test device of an accredited organization (not shown) and a signal indicating a probability state of a big hit through the relay board 70. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. This buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on the game control device (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (mass-production product) installed in a game shop. It should be noted that the detection signal of the switch that does not need to be processed, such as the starting port switch, output from the proximity I/F 121 is supplied to the test-inspection test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

On the other hand, a detection signal such as the magnetic sensor 61 or the board radio wave sensor 62 that cannot be supplied to the test-shooting test device as it is is once taken in by the game microcomputer 111 and processed into another signal or information, for example, a game machine. An error signal indicating the uncontrollable state is supplied from the data bus 140 to the test-inspection test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70.
The relay board 70 is provided with a port for receiving the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplying the signal to the test firing test apparatus, a connector for relaying and transmitting the signal line of the detection signal of the switch that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. ing. At the port on the relay board 70, the game microcomputer 11
The chip enable signal CE (not shown) output from the signal No. 1 is also supplied, and the signal of the port selected and controlled by the chip enable signal CE is supplied to the test firing test apparatus.

The output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 and opens/closes the opening/closing member 95c of the special variation winning device 95 (first winning opening 1). The special winning opening 1 solenoid 95b and the special variation winning apparatus 38 (large winning opening 2). The second output port 134 for outputting the opening/closing data of the special winning opening 2 solenoid 38b for opening/closing the opening/closing member 38c and the universal electric solenoid 37c for opening/closing the movable member 37b of the normal variation winning device 37 is provided. Further, the output unit 130 has a third output port 135 for outputting ON/OFF data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content displayed on the collective display device 50, and the collective display device 50. LE
Fourth for outputting ON/OFF data of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of D is connected
An output port 136 is provided.

Further, the output unit 130 outputs information about the gaming machine 10 such as jackpot information to the external information terminal board 71.
A fifth output port 137 is provided for outputting to. The external information terminal board 71 is provided with a photo relay and can be connected to an external device (information collection terminal, game hall internal management device (hall computer), etc.) installed in a game shop, for example, and information about the game machine 10 is provided. Can be supplied to an external device via a photo relay. Note that a part of the information supplied to the external device is output from the fourth output port 136. Further, from the fifth output port 137, a firing permission signal is also output to the payout control device 200 via the Schmidt buffer 132.

Further, the output unit 130 receives the open/close data signals of the special winning opening 1 solenoid 95b, the special winning opening 2 solenoid 38b, and the universal solenoid 37c output from the second output port 134, and generates and outputs a solenoid drive signal. Output from the first driver (drive circuit) 138a and the third output port 135, the second driver 138b that outputs the ON/OFF drive signal of the segment line on the current supply side of the collective display device 50, and the fourth output port 136. Third driver 1 for outputting an ON/OFF drive signal for a digit line on the current drawing side of the collective display device 50
A fourth driver 138d that outputs an external information signal supplied from the 38c, the fifth output port 137, and the fourth output port 136 to an external device such as a management device to the external information terminal board 71 is provided.

The first driver 138a is supplied with 32V DC as a power supply voltage from the power supply device 400 in order to drive a solenoid that operates at 32V. Further, DC 12V is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment lines of the collective display device 50. The third driver 138c for driving the digit line is for pulling out the digit line corresponding to the display data with a current, so that the power supply voltage may be 12V or 5V.

A dynamic drive method is performed by causing a current to flow into the anode terminal of the LED through the segment line by the second driver 138b that outputs 12V and drawing out a current from the cathode terminal through the segment line by the third driver 138c that outputs the ground potential. The power supply voltage flows to the LEDs that are sequentially selected by, and the LEDs are turned on. The fourth driver 138d, which outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71, is supplied with DC 12V in order to give the external information signal a level of 12V. The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, etc. may be provided not on the output section 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the main board, but on the relay board 70 side.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code of each gaming machine and a program to the external inspection device 490. Photo coupler 139
Are configured to be able to communicate with each other so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can send and receive data to and from the inspection device 490 by serial communication. In addition, sending and receiving such data,
Since the game is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in a general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the first to third input ports 122, 123 and 124 are not provided.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an example of the configuration of the effect control device of the first embodiment.
The effect control device 300, like the gaming microcomputer 111, is an amusement chip (IC).
Main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 and a VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor that performs image processing for displaying an image on the display device 41 in accordance with commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311. , A sound source LSI 31 for controlling the output of sound in order to reproduce various melodies and sound effects from the speakers 19a, 19b
4 is equipped.

The main control microcomputer 311 has a P that stores programs executed by the CPU and various data.
PROM 321, which consists of ROM (Programmable Read Only Memory), RAM 322 which provides a work area, FeRAM (which can retain the stored contents even when power is not supplied at the time of power failure)
A Ferroelectric RAM (323) and an RTC (Real Time Clock) 338 which is a time measuring means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day, day of the week, etc.) are connected. A RAM 311a that provides a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311. A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes the command (production command) from the game microcomputer 111, determines the contents of the effect, and instructs the VDP 312 on the content of the output video, and instructs the sound source LSI 314 to give a reproduction sound, and a decorative lamp. Lighting, motor and solenoid drive control,
Performs processing such as management of production time.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a for providing a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging and reducing an image. Further, the VDP 312 has an image ROM 325 in which character images and video data are stored, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM 326 used for expanding and processing image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325.
Are connected.

Although not particularly limited, data is transmitted/received between the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 in a parallel manner. By transmitting and receiving data in a parallel manner, it is possible to transmit commands and data in a shorter time than in the case of serial transmission.

From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronizing signal VSYN for synchronizing the image of the display device 41 and the lighting of the decorative lamp provided on the glass frame 15 or the game board 30.
C, a synchronization signal STS that gives a data transmission timing is input. In addition, VDP312
To the main control microcomputer 311 from the wait signal for notifying the interrupt signals INT0-n and the command and data from the main control microcomputer 311 to notify the processing status such as the completion of drawing in the VRAM. The signal WAIT and the like are also input.

The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by the LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling) method. Video data and a horizontal synchronizing signal HSY are sent from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313.
The NC and the vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input, and the video generated by the VDP 312 is displayed on the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313.

A voice ROM 327 storing voice data is connected to the sound source LSI 314.
The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address/data bus 340. Further, the interrupt signal I is transmitted from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311.
NT is input. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier that drives the upper speaker 19a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19b provided on the front frame 12, and is generated by the sound source LSI 314. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I/F) 331 that receives a command transmitted from the game control device 100. Via this command I/F331, the decoration special figure reservation number command, the decoration special figure command, the variation command, the stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control apparatus 100 to the effect control apparatus 300 are changed to the effect control command signal (effect command). ) As. Gaming microcomputer 111 of gaming control device 100
Operates at 5V DC, and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at 3.3V DC, so the command I/F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function.

In addition, in the effect control device 300, a board decoration LE that drives and controls a board decoration device 46 having an LED (light emitting diode) provided in the game board 30 (including the center case 40).
D control circuit 332, frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, frame decoration device 18 etc.) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided in the glass frame 15, game board 30 (center case 40 A board effect movable body control circuit 334 is provided for driving and controlling a board effect device 44 (for example, a movable accessory that enhances effect effects in cooperation with effect display on the display device 41). These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control the lamps, motors, solenoids, etc. are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via the address/data bus 340. It should be noted that the glass frame 15 may be provided with a frame effect device including a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor for operating an effect device), and a frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling the frame effect device. Good.

Furthermore, in the production control device 300, the selection button switch 25a and the determination button switch 25b of the option setting unit 25 provided on the glass frame 15, and the production accessory switch for detecting the initial position of the motor in the board production device 44 and the like. The function of detecting the on/off state of 47 (effect motor switch) and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311, and the effect control device 300.
A switch input circuit 336 having a function of detecting the state of the volume control switch 335 provided in the main control microcomputer 311 and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 is provided.

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 has the effect control device 300 configured as described above.
A DC voltage of 32V for driving a motor or a solenoid, a display device 41 including a liquid crystal panel, a DC 12V for driving a motor or an LED, in order to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the electronic components controlled by the same or the like. DC5 that is the power supply voltage for the command I/F 331
In addition to V, it is configured to generate a DC 15V voltage for driving a motor, an LED, and a speaker. Furthermore, when an LSI that operates at a low voltage such as 3.3V or 1.2V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, DC3.3V based on DC5V is used.
The effect control device 300 is provided with a DC-DC converter for generating or DC1.2V. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device in the reset state. In addition, the VDP 312 (VDPRESET signal), the sound source LSI 314 are output from the main control microcomputer 311.
And an amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) and control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET signal) for driving and controlling a lamp, a motor, etc., and reset them. Further, the production control device 300 is connected to a cooling FAN 45 that cools each part of the gaming machine 10, and the cooling FAN 45 is driven when the production control device 300 is powered on. In addition, the circuit board forming the effect control device 300 corresponds to a sub control board (also referred to as a sub board).

Next, game control performed in these control circuits will be described.
In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, the universal figure starting gate 3
Based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided in No. 4, the random number for hit determination of the universal figure is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B, A process for determining whether or not there is a hit is performed. Then, after the identification symbol (identification information) is variably displayed for a predetermined time on the universal symbol display unit 55 of the collective display device 50, a process of displaying the universal symbol variation display game that is stopped and displayed is performed. When the result of the universal figure variation display game is a hit, the universal symbol 37c is displayed while displaying a special result mode corresponding to each of the first hit stop symbol to the third hit stop symbol in the universal symbol display portion 55. Is operated to perform the control of opening the movable member 37b of the normal variation winning device 37 for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds or 1.7 seconds) as described above. That is, the game control device 100 serves as conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). In addition, when the result of the universal figure fluctuation display game is out of alignment, control is performed to display the result mode of the outage on the universal pattern display unit 55.

Further, based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting opening 1 switch 36a provided in the starting winning opening 36 and the starting opening 1 switch 37a provided in the normal variation winning device 37, the starting winning (
(Starting memory) is stored, and based on this starting memory, a random number value for jackpot determination of the first special figure variation display game is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B. A process for determining whether or not there is a hit is performed. In addition, the starting memory is stored based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting port 2 switch 92a provided in the starting winning port 92, and based on this starting memory, the big hit determination disorder of the second special figure variation display game. ROM111 by extracting the numerical value
The judgment value stored in B is compared with the judgment value stored in B, and a process for judging whether the second special figure variation display game is hit or not is performed.

Then, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 outputs to the effect control device 300 a control signal (effect control command, effect command) including the determination result of the first special figure variable display game or the second special figure variable display game described above. To do. Then, the special symbol 1 symbol display unit 53 and the special symbol 2 symbol display unit 54 of the collective display device 50 display the special symbol variation display game in which the identification symbol (identification information) is variably displayed for a predetermined time and then stopped. To perform. That is, the game control device 100, the start winning area of the game ball flowing down the game area 32 (start winning hole 36, normal variation winning device 37,
It constitutes a game control means for controlling the progress of the variable display game based on the winning of the starting winning opening 92).

Further, in the effect control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the display device 41 performs a process of displaying the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game. Further, in the effect control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the effect state setting, the sound output from the speakers 19a and 19b, the process of controlling the light emission of various LEDs, and the like are performed. That is, the effect control device 300 constitutes an effect control means for controlling the effect related to the game (variable display game, etc.).

Then, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit or a small hit, a special result aspect or a small hit result aspect on the special figure 1 symbol display section 53 or the special figure 2 symbol display section 54. While displaying, a process for generating a special game state or a small hit game state (that is, a process for executing a special game or a small hit game) is performed. In the process of generating a special game state due to the result of the first special figure variation display game or the second special figure variation display game being a big hit, the CPU 111A, for example, uses the special winning opening 2 solenoid 38b to obtain the special variation winning device. The opening/closing member 38c of 38 is opened, and control is performed to allow the game balls to flow into the special winning opening 2. In this special game state, the CPU 111A either wins a predetermined number (for example, 9) of game balls into the special winning opening 2 or a predetermined openable time elapses from the opening of the special winning opening 2, for example. One round is to open the special winning opening 2 until the condition is achieved, and control (cycle game) is performed to continue (repeat) this for a predetermined number of rounds. Further, in the process of generating the small hitting game state due to the result of the first special figure variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) being a small hit, the CPU 111A uses, for example, the special winning opening 1 solenoid 95b. The opening/closing member 95c of the special variation winning device 95 is opened, and control is performed to allow the game balls to flow into the special winning opening 1. Further, in the processing for generating the small hitting game state due to the result of the second special figure variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) being a small hit, the CPU 111A uses, for example, the special winning opening 2 solenoid 38b. The opening/closing member 38c of the special variation winning device 38 is opened, and control is performed to allow the game ball to flow into the special winning opening 2. The opening/closing operation pattern (opening/closing operation mode) of the special winning opening performed in the small hitting game state is, for example, an operation of maintaining the opening/closing member in the opened state for 200 msec.
This is done four times at 0 ms intervals. In this way, the game control device 100 constitutes a special winning opening opening/closing control unit that controls the opening and closing of the special winning opening when the stop result appearance becomes the special result appearance. If the result of the special figure variation display game is out of order, the CPU 111A
The special figure 1 design display section 53 and the special figure 2 design display section 54 of the collective display device 50 are controlled to display the result form of the deviation.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a game state after the special game state ends, based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. This high probability state is
The probability that the hit result will be higher in the special figure variation display game is higher than in the normal probability state.
In addition, even if the high probability state is reached based on the result mode of either the first special figure variation display game or the second special figure variation display game, the first special figure variation display game and second special figure Both floating display games are in a high probability state.

Further, based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game, the game control device 100 is capable of generating a time saving state (specific game state, general figure high probability state) as a game state after the end of the special game state. In this short-time state, the probability that the hit result of the universal figure fluctuation display game (general figure probability) is a high probability (general figure high probability state) higher than 0 which is the normal probability (general figure low probability state). Is possible. As a result, the opening time of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 per unit time is controlled to be longer than that in the case where the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is in the normal figure low probability state. Here, in the normal variation winning device 37 in the present embodiment, the universal figure probability is set to "0" so as not to open the movable member 37b in the normal game state.

Further, in the time saving state, the execution time of the figure changing display game (the figure changing time) is, for example, 500 ms, and the figure stopping time for displaying the result of the figure changing display game is, for example, 600 ms. When the universal figure variation display game is a hit result and the regular variation winning device 37 is opened, the opening time of the first hit stop symbol (normal communication opening time) and the number of times of opening (for example,
500msec x 1 time), 2nd stop design release time (normal power release time) and number of releases (for example 1700msec x 2), 3rd stop design release time (normal power release time) and release Number of times (
For example, 1700 msec×3 times) can be set.

In addition, the execution time of the universal figure variation display game, the universal figure stop time, the number of regular electricity open, and the universal electricity open time are appropriately set so that the general figure variation display game and the regular variation prize winning device 37 are controlled to be in the time saving operation state. Alternatively, for example, in the time saving state, it is possible to control the execution time (general figure fluctuation time) of the general figure fluctuation display game described above to be the second fluctuation display time shorter than the first fluctuation display time. (For example, 10000 ms is 1000 ms). In addition, in the time saving state, it is possible to control the universal figure stop time for displaying the result of the universal figure change display game to be the second stop time shorter than the first stop time (for example, 1604 msec. 70
4 ms). In addition, in the time saving state, when the normal figure variation display game is a winning result and the normal variation winning device 37 is opened, the opening time (normal electric open time) is set to the normal state (low probability state of general figure). It is possible to control so that the second opening time is longer than one opening time (for example, 100 ms is 1352 ms). Further, in the time saving state, the number of times of opening of the normal variable winning device 37 (the number of times of opening of the normal electric power) is larger than the first number of times of opening (for example, 2 times) with respect to one hit result of the general figure changing display game. It is possible to set the number of times (for example, four times) of the second opening. In addition, in the time saving state, the probability that the hit result of the figure variation display game (the figure figure probability) is the normal probability in the normal operation state (the figure figure low probability state, for example, 1/
It is possible to have a high probability (universal figure high probability state, for example, 250/251) higher than 251).

In the time saving state, the general variation prize winning device 37 is opened by changing any one or more of the universal figure variation time, the universal figure stop time, the number of universal communication open, the universal communication open time, and the universal figure probability. Try to extend the conversion time longer than usual. It is also possible to set a plurality of types of time saving states that are different from each other. Further, in the case of a win, either the first opening mode or the second opening mode may be selected. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first opening mode and the second opening mode may be different. Further, the high-probability state and the short-time state can occur independently of each other, both of them can occur at the same time, or only one of them can occur. In addition, the time saving state is the universal support state (in general support or electrical support)
Can also be called.

Further, in the case of the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, the game control device 100 causes the second special figure variation display game (special figure 2 variation after the end of the time saving state generated by the predetermined big hit (after the end of electric support)). Special game 2 special mode (to increase the probability that the result of the display game) will be a small hit, for example, for a specified period (
It is possible to generate a specific result high probability state in which the probability that the second special map variable display game has a specific result is increased. This special figure 2 special mode is a kind of high probability state.

Next, an outline of the game characteristics (standard strategy) of the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment will be described. The game characteristics of this gaming machine 10 are left-handed in a normal game state (a state that is not any of the special figure 2 special mode, the special game state, and the time saving state described above) and a big hit in the special figure 1 variable display game. Aiming, right hitting in special game state (big hit state) and time saving state (during electric power support), aiming at small hit of special figure 2 variable display game by right hitting in special figure 2 special mode, special game state and time saving state When the special mode 2 special mode ends and the normal game state is entered, the game is returned to the left. In addition, since the special mode 2 special mode described above is provided, the player may be able to play with a higher expectation than in the normal gaming state even after the time saving state ends, and the enjoyment of the game is improved. To do.

Next, the configuration of the collective display device will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating an example of the collective display device according to the first embodiment. The collective display device 50 includes a 7-segment LED_d1 and a 7-segment LED_d2, and 16 LEs from LED_d3 to LED_d18.
With D. The collective display device 50 includes a 7-segment LED_d1 and a 7-segment LED_d.
2 and various states are displayed by the lighting mode of LED_d3 to LED_d18.

The collective display device 50 allocates various status display functions to the 7-segment LED_d1 and the 7-segment LED_d2, and the LED_d3 to the LED_d18, so that the round display section 51, the special figure 1 hold display section 52, and the special figure 1 symbol display section 53. The special figure 2 design display section 54, the general figure design display section 55, the general figure reservation display section 56, the state display section 57, and the special figure 2 reservation display section 58 are provided. The round display unit 51 includes four LEDs, LED_d3 to LED_d6.
The number of rounds in the special figure game is displayed according to the lighting mode of. The special figure 1 hold display section 52 displays the number of holding pieces in the special figure 1 game by the lighting mode of two LEDs, LED_d11 and LED_d12. Special figure 1 design display section 53, 8 L of 7 segment LED_d1
The symbols in the special figure 1 game are displayed according to the lighting mode of the ED (7 segment LEDs and 1 dot LED). The special figure 2 symbol display section 54 displays the symbols in the special figure 2 game by the lighting mode of the 8 LEDs of the 7-segment LED_d 2 (7 segment LEDs and 1 dot LED). The universal symbol display unit 55 displays the symbols in the universal symbol game by the lighting mode of the three LEDs LED_d8, LED_d10, and LED_d18. The figure-holding display unit 56 displays the number of holdings in the figure-playing game by the lighting state of two LEDs, LED_d15 and LED_d16. The status display unit 57 displays LED_d7, LE
The game state in the special figure game is displayed by the lighting state of the three LEDs D_d9 and LED_d17. The special figure 2 holding display unit 58 displays the number of holding pieces in the special figure 2 game by the lighting mode of two LEDs, LED_d13 and LED_d14.

Hereinafter, control of a gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. The control processing by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly includes main processing shown in FIGS. 6 and 7 and timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 8 which is performed in a predetermined time cycle (for example, 4 msec).

[Main processing]
First, the main process will be described. FIG. 6 is a diagram (No. 1) showing a flowchart of the main process of the first embodiment, and FIG. 7 is a diagram (No. 2) showing a flowchart of the main process of the first embodiment. The main process is a process executed by the CPU 111A.

The main process is started when the power is turned on. In this main processing, FIG.
As shown in FIG. 7 and FIG. 7, first, a process for prohibiting an interrupt (step S1) is performed, and then, when an interrupt occurs, a stack pointer that sets a stack pointer that is the top address of an area for saving the value of a register or the like is set. A setting process (step S2) is performed. Next, register bank 0 is designated (step S3), and R is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register).
The upper address of the AM start address is set (step S4). In the case of the first embodiment, the range of addresses of the RAM 111C is 0000h to 01FFh, and the higher order is 00h.
Take 01h. In step S4, 00h on the head side of the address range of the RAM 111C is set.

Next, a signal to stop firing is output and the firing permission signal is set to the prohibited state (step S5).
.. The firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a signal to stop firing, and the firing of the game ball is prohibited.

After that, the state of the input port 1 (first input port 122) is read (step S6),
A process for setting the power-on delay timer is performed (step S7). In this process, by setting a predetermined initial value, the sub-control means (for example, payout control device 200 or effect control device 300) that performs various controls according to instructions from the game control device 100 that is the main control means. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting for the program to start normally is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the command is sent to the slave control device before the game control device 100 starts up and the slave control devices (for example, the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300) stand up before the slave control device. Can avoid dropping commands. That is, the game control device 100 delays the activation of the main control means (game control device 100) and waits for the activation of the slave control devices (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.) when the power is turned on. It forms a standby means for setting the standby time.

In addition, when the power-on delay timer counts, the validity of the data held in the RAM area is determined (
The checksum calculation) is performed using a storage area that is not the target of the checksum calculation (a RAM area or a register that is not the target of validity determination). As a result, when calculating check data such as a checksum of the RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area for calculation, and thus it is possible to prevent the control at power-on from becoming complicated.

An initialization switch signal is input to the first input port 122, and the operation of the RAM initialization switch 112 can be performed by reading the state of the first input port 122 before the start of the standby time. Can be reliably detected. That is, if the state of the RAM initialization switch 112 is read after the lapse of the waiting time, the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated after waiting for the lapse of the waiting time, or the RAM initialization switch is operated from the power-on until the lapse of the waiting time. 11
It is necessary to continue to operate 2. However, by reading the status before the start of the waiting time, it becomes possible to detect it by performing the operation immediately after turning on the power without performing such a troublesome operation, and the initialization operation performed at the time of turning on the power. Can be prevented from being accepted.

Next, processing for setting a power-on delay timer (for example, about 3 seconds) (step S7)
After that, the process of measuring the standby time and monitoring the occurrence of power failure during the standby time (steps S8 to S12) is performed. First, the number of times (for example, twice) to check the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and the data bus is set (step S8) to determine whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. A determination is made (step S9).

When the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S9; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is kept on for the number of checks set in step S8 (step S10).
.. Then, if the ON state of the power failure monitoring signal does not continue for the number of checks (step S1
0; N) is returned to the determination (step S9) as to whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on. Further, when the power failure monitoring signal remains on for the number of checks (step S10; Y),
That is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the game machine 10 waits until the power is cut off. In this way, by determining that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of the power failure due to noise or the like, and appropriately cope with a malfunction at power-on. be able to.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring occurrence of power failure in a predetermined standby time. As a result, it becomes possible to deal with a power failure that has occurred during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100, which is the main control means, is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a problem at the time of turning on the power. Note that access to the RAM 111C is not permitted until the end of the waiting time, and the stored contents at the time of the previous power shutdown are retained.
It is not necessary to perform backup processing etc. when a power failure occurs here. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM 111C, and the control load can be reduced.

On the other hand, when the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S9; N), that is, when a power failure has not occurred, the power-on delay timer is updated by "-1" (step S11), and the timer value is "0". Is determined (step S12). When the value of the timer is not 0 (step S12; N), that is, when the waiting time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of times of checking the power failure monitoring signal (step S8). If the timer value is "0" (step S12; Y), that is, if the standby time has expired, the RAM 111C
A read/write RWM (Read Write Memory) such as an EEPROM is permitted (step S13), and OFF data is output to all output ports (step S14).

Next, a serial port (a port pre-installed in the gaming microcomputer 111,
In the first embodiment, (used for communication with effect control device 300 and payout control device 200) is set (step S15), and the value of power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data 1 ( For example, it is determined whether it is 5 Ah) (step S16).

If the value of the power failure inspection area 1 is normal (step S16; Y), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is the normal power failure inspection area check data 2 (for example, A5h). (Step S17), if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (Step S17; Y
), a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum of a predetermined area in the RWM is performed (step S18), and it is determined whether or not the calculated checksum and the checksum at the time of power off match (step S19).

Here, in the checksum calculation processing performed in step S18 and step S43 described later, the sum of the data of the work control work area and the state display work area may be calculated as the checksum, or the game control may be performed. The checksum may be calculated separately from the data in the work area for work and the data in the status display work area, or the checksum may be calculated only from the data in the game control work area. The game control work area is RW
It is a work area used for game control in the storage area in M. The status display work area is a work area used for status display in the storage area in the RWM.

Next, when the checksums match (step S19; Y), it is determined whether or not the RAM initialization switch 112 is turned on from the state of the first input port 122 previously read (
If the RAM initialization switch 112 is off in step S20) (step S20; N)
In step S25, the process proceeds to step S25 (FIG. 7) to perform the process when the power failure is normally restored.

Moreover, when it is determined that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (step S16; N or step S17; N), or the checksum is not normal (step S1).
9; N), the process proceeds to step S21, and initialization processing at the time of data abnormality (first initialization processing) is performed in steps S21 to S24. That is, the game control device 10
0 indicates that the data stored in the RWM (data in all areas including the access prohibited area) is determined based on the fact that the data in the RWM (for example, the RAM 111C) is determined to be abnormal.
Forms a first initialization means for initializing.

When the process proceeds to step S21, the RAM access prohibited area is set to access permitted (step S21), and all RAM areas including the busy signal status area and the touch switch signal state monitoring area are cleared to zero (step S22). ), the RAM access prohibited area is set to access prohibited (step S23). Next, in the area to be initialized, RAM
The initial value at the time of initialization is saved (step S24), and the process proceeds to step S29. The area to be initialized here is an area having a value other than the value (zero) written in step S22 of the game control work area and the status display work area as an initial value, and in the present embodiment, This is an area related to the setting of the customer waiting demo and the setting of the effect mode.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the RAM initialization switch 112 is on (step S20; Y), the process proceeds to step S27 (FIG. 7) and the initialization process at the initialization operation is performed in steps S27 and S28 (first 2 initialization processing). That is, the RAM initialization switch 112 forms an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 stores the data stored in the RWM (for example, the RAM 111C) based on the operation of the initialization operation unit ( It constitutes a second initialization means for initializing the data of the area not including the access prohibited area).

When the process proceeds to step S27 (FIG. 7), the RWM (for example, RAM111)
Data of the game control work area in the storage area (area not including the access prohibited area) of C) is cleared to zero (step S27), and the initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be initialized (step S27). S28) and the process proceeds to step S29. The area to be initialized here is an area related to the setting of the customer waiting demo and the setting of the effect mode in the present embodiment.

Thus, the game control device 100 of the first embodiment, the initialization process at the time of data abnormality (
Since it has a function (first initialization means, second initialization means) that distinguishes between the first initialization processing) and the initialization processing at the initialization operation (second initialization processing), the situation According to this, it is possible to realize optimal and efficient initialization processing.

Next, when the process proceeds to step S25 (FIG. 7), the initial value at the time of power failure recovery is saved in the area to be initialized (step S25), and the special figure status (special figure status area described later) is set. Command for recovery from power failure corresponding to the state indicated by the data)
It transmits to the production control device 300) (step S26), and proceeds to step S31.

Here, the areas to be initialized in step S25 are a power failure inspection area, a checksum area, and an area related to error fraud monitoring. In step S25, the busy signal status area that stores the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can receive the command, is also cleared, and the state of the payout busy signal is not fixed. It is in an indefinite state indicating that. Similarly, the touch switch signal state monitoring area that stores the state of the touch switch signal is also cleared to an undefined state indicating that the state of the touch switch signal is not fixed.

Further, in the case of the first embodiment, in step S26, a plurality of commands such as a model designation command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a special figure 2 hold number command, a probability information command, and a screen designation command are transmitted. Also, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, performance frequency information and high probability frequency information are transmitted. The command for designating the screen means that the control states of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are both normally processed (changing, big hit (first special game state), small hit (first) The command is a command to display a customer waiting demo screen when the game is in any of (2 special game states)), and is a command to display a recovery screen otherwise.

On the other hand, when the process proceeds from step S24 or S28 to step S29, the RAM initialization command is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S29).
, And proceeds to step S31. In the case of the first embodiment, in step S29, a model designation command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a special figure 2 hold number command, a probability information command, and a RAM initialization command (a customer waiting demo screen is displayed and A plurality of commands such as a command for making notification of RAM initialization by light and sound for a time (for example, 30 seconds) are transmitted.
Also, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, performance frequency information and high probability frequency information are transmitted.

In step S31, a CT for generating a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC (Counter/Timer Circuit)) in the gaming microcomputer 111 (clock generator)
Performs processing to activate the C circuit. The CTC circuit is provided in the clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 by a frequency dividing circuit and the CPU 1 based on the frequency-divided signal.
A CTC circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 msec) and a signal CTC that gives a trigger for updating a random number to be supplied to the random number generation circuit is provided for 11A.

After the CTC activation process in step S31, a process for activating and setting the random number generation circuit is performed (step S32). Specifically, the CPU 111 sets a code (specified value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit.
It is done by A. In addition, the hard random number (
Here, the bit transposed pattern of the big hit random number) is also set. The bit transposition pattern is a pattern that determines the exchange method when exchanging the bit arrangement of the extracted random number (arrangement before bit transposition) in a predetermined order and storing it as a different bit arrangement (arrangement after bit transposition). is there. By exchanging the bits of the random number according to this bit transposed pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be improved. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. Further, the user may be allowed to arbitrarily set it.

After that, a predetermined register (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at power-on
Value of the corresponding initial value random number (in the case of the first embodiment, big hit symbol initial value random number, small hit symbol initial value random number, hit initial value random number, hit symbol initial value random number) initial value (start The value is saved in a predetermined area of the RWM (step S33), and then interruption is permitted (step S34).

Here, "big hit symbol initial value random number" is a random number that becomes the initial value of the random number (big hit symbol random number) that determines the big hit stop symbol of the special figure, "small hit symbol initial value random number" is the small hit stop of the special symbol It is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the symbol (small hit symbol random number). Further, the "winning initial value random number" is a random number that is the initial value of the random number (winning random number) that determines the hit of the universal figure fluctuation game, and the "hit symbol initial value random number" determines the winning symbol of the universal figure fluctuation game. It is the random number that becomes the initial value of the random number (winning pattern random number). The small-hit symbol random number does not exist in the model without the small-hit, and the hit symbol initial value random number may not exist depending on the model.

Further, in the random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in the first embodiment, the initial value of the soft random number register is changed every time the power is turned on. By setting the start value), it is possible to break the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software and make it difficult for the player to obtain an illegal random number.

Subsequently, an initial value random number updating process (step S35) for updating the values of various initial value random numbers to break the regularity of the random numbers is performed. The initial value random number updating process is a process of updating (incrementing) each initial value random number by, for example, “+1”. In this way, the randomness of random numbers can be enhanced by continuing to update the initial value random numbers as long as time permits in the main process.

Although not particularly limited, in the first embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number use the random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit. Is configured to generate. However, the big hit random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock having a speed equal to or higher than the operation clock of the CPU. CTC output (CTC of timer interrupt processing (CT
It is a "low-speed counter" that is updated based on a CTC (CTC2)) different from C0).
In addition, in the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number, the so-called "initial value changing method" that changes the start value using each initial value random number (generated by software) every time the random number makes a round Is adopted. The random numbers are “+1” or “−1”.
, Or a random update in which all values within the range appear separately without duplication until one cycle is completed. That is, the big hit random number is a random number updated only by hardware, and the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number are random numbers updated by hardware and software.

After the initial value random number updating process in step S35, the number of times the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read through the port and the data bus and checked (for example, twice).
Is set (step S36), and it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S37). When the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S37; N), the process returns to the initial value random number updating process (step S35). That is, when the power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number update processing and the power failure monitoring signal check (loop processing) are repeated. By permitting the interrupt (step S34) before the initial value random number updating process (step S35), when the timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number updating process, the interrupt process is preferentially executed, and the timer interrupt is executed. It is possible to avoid pressure on the interrupt process by waiting for the initial value random number update process.

In addition to the main process, the initial value random number updating process in step S35 described above includes a method of performing the initial value random number updating process in the timer interrupt process as well. In order to avoid the initial value random number updating process from being executed, when the initial value random number updating process is performed in the main process, it is necessary to disable the interrupt and then update and release the interrupt. When the initial value random number updating process in the timer interrupt process is not performed as in the embodiment and only in the main process, there is no problem even if the interrupt is released before the initial value random number updating process, This has the advantage that the main process is simplified.

When the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S37; Y), it is determined whether or not the power failure monitoring signal remains on for the number of checks set in step S36 (step S38).
). Then, if the ON state of the power failure monitoring signal does not continue for the number of checks (step S
38; N), the process returns to the determination as to whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S37). When the power failure monitoring signal remains on for the number of checks (step S38;
Y), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, a process of temporarily prohibiting an interrupt (step S39) and a process of outputting off data to all output ports (step S40) are performed.

After that, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 (step S41
), the power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 (step S42).
Further, a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum when the RWM is powered off (step S43) and a process for saving the calculated checksum in the checksum area (step S44).
), the process of prohibiting access to the RAM (step S45) is performed, and then the power supply to the gaming machine is waited for. In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum at the time of power shutdown, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before power shutdown was correctly backed up. It can be determined at the time of re-input.

From the above, the main control means (game control device 100) that controls the game in general, and the sub-control means (payout control device 200, which performs various controls according to the instructions from the main control device).
In the gaming machine including the effect control device 300 and the like), the main control means delays the activation of the main control means when the power is turned on, and sets a predetermined standby time for waiting for the activation of the slave control device. Means (game control device 100), and a power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) that monitors the occurrence of a power failure during the predetermined standby time.

In addition, a power supply device 400 that supplies power to various devices is provided, and the power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when detecting the occurrence of a power failure, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) The power failure is determined to have occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period.

Further, the main control means (game control device 100), RAM111C capable of storing data,
An initialization operation unit (RAM initialization switch 112) that can be operated from the outside, and an initialization unit (game control device 100) that initializes the data stored in the RAM 111C based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. And, the operation state of the initialization operation unit is read before the start of the waiting time.

In addition, the main control means (game control device 100) allows access to the RAM 111C after the waiting time has elapsed.
[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, the timer interrupt process of the game control device 100 will be described. FIG. 8 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the first embodiment. The timer interrupt process is an interrupt process that occurs in the main process described above from the time when the interrupt is permitted to the time when the interrupt is prohibited (steps S34 to S39). The timer interrupt process is a process executed by the CPU 111A.

The timer interrupt processing is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111A. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled and the timer interrupt process is started.

When the timer interrupt processing is started, first, the register bank 1 is designated (step S1).
21). Switching to the register bank 1 is equivalent to performing the register saving process of moving the value held in a predetermined register (for example, the register used in the main process) to the RWM. Next, the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step S122). In step S122, the same processing as step S4 in the main processing is performed, but the register bank is different. Next, input processing from various sensors and switches and signal acquisition, that is, input processing for reading the state of each input port (step S123) is performed. Then, based on the output data set by various processes, output processing for performing drive control of actuators such as solenoids (special winning opening 1 solenoid 95b, special winning opening 2 solenoid 38b, universal solenoid 37c) (step S124). ). When the signal to stop firing is output in step S5 in the main process, the output permission signal is output by performing this output process, and the firing permission signal can be set to the permitted state. This launch permission signal is output to the launch control device via the payout control device. At that time, no signal processing or the like is performed. Further, the launch permission signal is a first signal indicating a launch permission state viewed from the game control device 100, and a second signal indicating a launch permission state viewed from the payout control device 200 (a launch permission signal).
Is also generated in the payout controller 200 and output to the firing controller. That is, two launch permission signals are output to the launch control device, and when both of them are allowed to launch, the game ball is configured to be ready for launch.

Next, a payout command transmission process (step S125) of outputting the command set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 200, a random number update process 1 (step S126),
Random number update processing 2 (step S127) is performed. Here, the random number update process 1 is a process for updating the initial value (start value) of the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number that is the target of the initial value random number update process. .. Further, the random number update process 2 is a process of updating the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the variation display game of special figure 1 and special figure 2.

After that, the start port 1 switches 36a and 37a, the start port 2 switch 92a, the general-purpose gate switch 34a, the winning opening switch 35a, and the special winning opening switch 38a are monitored to see if there is a normal signal input, or if there is an error. The winning opening switch/state monitoring process (step S128) for monitoring (whether the front frame or the glass frame is opened) is performed. Further, a start opening switch monitoring process for monitoring the winning of the start opening 1 switches 36a and 37a and the start opening 2 switch 92a (step S129), a special drawing 1 game processing (step S130a) for performing processing related to the special FIG. 1 variable display game, The special figure 2 game process (step S130b) for performing the special figure 2 variable display game and the general figure game process (step S130c) for performing the general figure variable display game are performed.

In the starting opening switch monitoring process, if there is a winning of the game ball in the starting winning opening 36 or the normal variation winning device 37 forming the first starting winning opening, or the starting winning opening 92 forming the second starting winning opening, various random numbers are obtained. (Big hit random number, etc.) is extracted, and a game result pre-judgment is pre-judged in advance before the start of the special figure variation display game to judge the game result based on the winning.

Next, a segment LED provided on the gaming machine 10 and displaying various information related to the special figure variation display game and the game (for example, LE of the special figure 1 symbol display section 53 of the collective display device 50, etc.
Segment LED edit processing for driving D) so as to display desired contents (step S13)
1), magnet irregularity monitoring processing for checking the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 61 to determine whether there is any abnormality (step S132), and checking the detection signal from the board radio wave sensor 62 to determine whether there is any abnormality The board radio wave irregularity monitoring processing (step S133) is performed. Then, an external information editing process of setting a signal to be output to various external devices in the output buffer (step S134), a state display editing output process for displaying a state (step S1).
35) is performed, and the timer interrupt processing is ended.

Here, in the first embodiment, the process of restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process of permitting the interrupt) and the process of restoring the designation of the register bank (that is, the process of designating the register bank 0) are interrupts. It is automatically performed when returning (when the timer interrupt processing ends). Depending on the CPU to be used, there is also a gaming machine in which it is necessary to instruct execution of a process of restoring the interrupt prohibited state or a process of restoring the designation of the register bank.

[Payout command transmission process]
Next, details of the payout command transmission process (step S125) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 9 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the payout command transmission processing according to the first embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of the structure of the winning number counter area of the first embodiment.

First, an example of the number-of-wins counter area will be described. The number-of-wins counter area 1 includes, for example, three prize ball counters, ten prize ball counters, and fourteen prize ball counters, as shown in FIG. The prize number counter can store up to 65535 prizes. Next, as shown in FIG. 10, for example, the prize number counter area 2 is composed of three prize ball counters, ten prize ball counters, and fourteen prize ball counters, and each prize number counter can store up to 255 prizes. It has become. In the check of the count number of these prize number counter areas, the above-mentioned counters are sequentially checked from the top (from the three prize ball counter) by updating the address of the prize number counter area in step S202 described later.

Next, in FIG. 9, the left column is a process for updating (increasing) the number of times the main prize ball signal is output, and the right column is a process for transmitting a payout command.
In the payout command transmission process, first, as described with reference to FIG. 10, the counters of the plurality of winning number counter areas 2 provided for each number of prize balls (for example, 3 prize balls, 10 prize balls, 14 prize balls). Of these, it is determined whether or not there is a count number other than "0" in the counter to be checked (step S201). Then, if there is no count number (step S201; N), the address of the winning number counter area 2 to be checked is updated (step S202), and the checking of the counting numbers of all the counters of the winning number counter area 2 is completed. It is determined whether or not (step S203).

If it is determined in step S201 that there is a count number (step S201; Y),
The count number of the target prize number counter area 2 is subtracted (updated by "-1") (step S204), and the payout amount corresponding to the address of the prize number counter area 2 (for example, the above-mentioned 3, 10, Any one of 14) is acquired (step S205). Next, the value in the remaining number of prize balls area and the number of payouts are added (step S206), the addition result is saved in the remaining number of prize balls area (step S207), and 10 is subtracted from the addition result (step S208). It is determined whether the subtraction result is "0" or more (step S209). In step S209, the subtraction result is "0.
When it is determined that the above is (step S209; Y), the number of times of outputting the main prize ball signal is “+1”
It is updated (step S210) and the subtraction result is saved in the remaining number of prize balls (step S211).
).

In the main prize ball signal editing process in the external information editing process, which will be described later, a process of outputting the main prize ball signal is performed based on the main prize ball signal output count updated in step S210. Here, as the prize ball signal (main prize ball signal), the main board (game control device 1
00) outputs 1 pulse for every 10 payout schedules, and the payout substrate (payout control device 200
) Outputs one pulse for every 10 payouts.

Next, in the determination of step S203, all checks are completed (step S203;
Y), or when it is determined in step S209 that the subtraction result is not "0" or more (step S209; N), if the value of the payout command transmission timer is not "0", the payout command transmission timer The value of is updated by "-1" (step S212). If this payout command transmission process is the first timer interrupt process, the initial value set in the last step S221 of this payout command transmission process is not set, so the value of the payout command transmission timer is "0". Therefore, no subtraction is performed.

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the payout command transmission timer is "0" (step S213).
), if it is determined that the value of the payout command transmission timer is "0" (step S213; Y), it is determined whether the payout busy signal is busy (step S214). Whether or not the payout busy signal is busy is determined by referring to the payout busy signal flag, not by referring to the state of the port. Here, the payout busy signal is turned on (busy) as conditions for "payout operation", "ball lending operation", "shooting ball out error", "overflow error", "frame radio wave illegal occurrence""Medium","Abnormal payout ball detection switch (switch that monitors the paid-out ball)", "Insufficient payout error", "Excessive payout error", "Award to be paid in the memory of the payout control board" When there is a count of the number of balls (the number of unpaid prize balls=remaining number of acquired game balls) (when not equal to 0)" and the like.

Next, when the payout busy signal is not busy (step S214; N), it is determined whether or not the target counter of the prize number counter area 1 has a count (step S215), and the target counter of the prize number counter area 1 is determined. If there is no count (step S215; N), the address of the winning number counter area 1 to be checked is updated (step S216), and it is determined whether the checking of all areas is completed (step S217). If the checking of all areas is not completed (step S217; N), the process returns to step S215.

In step S215, if the target counter in the prize number counter area 1 has a count (step S215; Y), the target prize number counter is updated by "-1" (step S2).
18), the payout number command corresponding to the address of the winning number counter area 1 is acquired (step S219), and the acquired command is written in the payout serial transmission buffer (step S2).
20). Then, the initial value (for example, 200 ms) is saved in the payout command transmission timer area (step S221).

In step S213, the value of the payout command transmission timer is not "0" (step S
213; N), it is determined in step S214 that the payout busy signal is busy (step S214; Y), and in step S217, checking of all areas is completed (step S217). If Y) is determined, or if the process of step S221 ends, the payout command transmitting process ends.

As can be seen from the configuration in which the processing is terminated without executing steps S215 and thereafter depending on the determination results of steps S213 and S214, the payout command does not have to be transmitted for each timer interrupt but a predetermined time has elapsed. I am sending it. Further, the transmission of the payout command is a condition that the payout control board side is in a state where the prize balls can be paid out.

[Winning prize switch/Status monitoring processing]
Next, the winning opening switch/state monitoring process (step S128) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 8) will be described. FIG. 11 is a view showing a flowchart of the winning opening switch/state monitoring process of the first embodiment. In this winning hole switch/state monitoring process, first,
The winning port monitoring table 1 (for example, the port number to which the detection signal from the count switch is input) corresponding to the two large winning port switches 38a (count switches) in the special winning port (special variation winning device 38) The data indicating the bit position and the like of the signal in the port is stored) (step S271). Next, the fraud & prize monitoring process (step S272) is executed to monitor whether there is an injustice (incorrect prize) to win the big prize mouth even if the big prize mouth is not open and to detect a normal prize. ..

After that, the winning a prize monitoring table 2 corresponding to one big award winning mouth switch 38a in the lower major award winning mouth (special variable winning a prize device 95) is prepared (step S273), and it is monitored whether there is an illegal winning a prize and normal. The fraud & prize monitoring process (step S274) of detecting a prize is executed.
Then, a prize opening monitoring table of the prize opening switch (starting opening 1 switch 37a) in Poden is prepared (step S275a) to monitor whether there is an illegal prize and detect fraud & prize monitoring processing to detect a normal prize ( Execute step S275b).

Next, there is a winning opening switch that does not require fraudulent monitoring processing, that is, a winning opening switch that can always win
Here, the winning opening monitoring table of the starting opening 1 switch 36a, the starting opening 2 switch 92a, the winning opening switch 35a of the general winning opening 35) is prepared (step S276), and the winning number counter updating process for updating the winning number (step S277). ) Is further performed, and the special figure 2 abnormality variation monitoring process (step S278) is further performed.

Next, the value of the status scan counter for sequentially designating which switch or signal among the plurality of switches and signals for which the error state of the gaming machine 10 should be monitored is to be monitored this time is "0". To "3" (step S279). After that, depending on the value of the status scan counter, any one of the switch abnormality 1 error that is output due to occurrence of disconnection of the switch connector, the shot ball out error from the payout control device 200, the overflow error from the overflow switch, and the payout abnormality error. Prepare the gaming machine status monitoring table 1 for setting the error monitoring based on the crab (step S280)
). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step S281) for determining whether or not an error has occurred is performed.

Next, depending on the value of the status scan counter, the gaming machine status monitoring table 2 is prepared for setting the monitoring of an error based on any one of the glass frame opening, the main body frame opening, the frame radio wave irregularity and the touch switch. (Step S282). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step S283) for determining whether or not an error has occurred is performed.

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the status scan counter is "0" (step S284).
If the value of the status scan counter is not "0" (step S284; N), the winning opening switch/status monitoring processing is ended. In this case, the gaming machine status monitoring table 3 to be referred to next
This is the case when there is no monitoring target of the gaming machine state. Further, when the value of the status scan counter is "0" (step S284; Y), the gaming machine status based on the switch abnormality 2 error that is output due to occurrence of a switch connector disconnection or the like according to the value of the status scan counter. Prepares the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 for setting the monitoring of (1) (step S285)
.. Then, a gaming machine state check process for determining whether an error has occurred (step S
286) is performed, payout busy signal check processing (step S287) is performed, and the winning opening switch/state monitoring processing is ended. The pay-out busy signal check process is not performed every time but is performed once every four times, and the remaining three times are passed, so that the 16 ms cycle is monitored.

[Starting switch monitoring process]
Next, the starting opening switch monitoring process in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process (step S129)
Will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the starting port switch monitoring process of the first embodiment.

In the starting opening switch monitoring process, first, the starting opening 1 (starting winning opening 36, normal variation winning device 3
7) The winning monitoring table of 7) is prepared (step A101), a hard random number acquisition process (step A102) is performed, and it is determined whether or not there is a winning in the starting opening 1 (step A103).
).

When it is determined in step A103 that there is no winning in the starting opening 1 (step A103;
In N), the process proceeds to step A109 and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A103 that there is a winning in the starting opening 1 (step A1
03; Y), it is determined whether or not the game state is a predetermined state that should be hit to the right (for example, a general electric power support state, a big hit, etc.) (step A104).

When it is determined in step A104 that the predetermined state for right-handing is not reached (step A10)
In 4; N), the process proceeds to step A107 and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A104 that the state is a right-handed predetermined state (step A104; Y), a right-handing instruction notification command is prepared (step A105), and the effect command setting process (step A106). To perform. That is, the gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment
In the case of 0, except for the normal electric support state, the starting mouth 1 is almost left only if left-handed, and when the starting mouth 1 is won in a predetermined state that should be right-handed, it is a predetermined state that should be right-handed. Since it can be presumed that the player has left-handed the player, the right-handed instruction notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 is configured to give a notification (warning) for instructing the player to make a right-handed operation.

Then, after preparing a table for setting the information on hold by the starting opening 1 (step A10)
7), special figure starting port 1 switch processing (step A108) is performed.
Next, a winning monitor table for the starting opening 2 (starting winning opening 92) is prepared (step A109).
A hard random number acquisition process (step A110) is performed to determine whether or not there is a winning in the starting opening 2 (step A111).

When it is determined in step A111 that there is no winning in the starting opening 2 (step A111;
In N), the starting port switch monitoring process is ended.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A111 that there is a winning in the starting opening 2 (step A1
11; Y), it is determined whether or not the game state is in the normal power support state (time saving state) (step A112), and if it is determined that it is not in the normal power support state (step A112; N), it is a big hit. It is determined whether there is any (step A113). If it is determined in step A113 that the big hit is not in progress (step A113; N), it is determined whether or not the special figure variation display game is in the final variation of the ordinary electric support (step A114).

When it is determined in step A114 that the final change of the ordinary electric power support is not in progress (step A114; N), a left-handing instruction notification command is prepared (step A115), and effect command setting processing (step A116) is performed. That is, if it is not in the normal electric power support state, during the big hit, or during the final electric power support final fluctuation, left-handed operation should be performed, so processing for transmitting a left-handed instruction notification command to the effect control device 300 is performed.

Then, if it is determined in step A112 that it is in the universal power support state (step A112; Y), if it is determined in step A113 that it is a big hit (step A113; Y), then in step A114 the final power support is final. When it is determined that the fluctuation is occurring (step A114; Y), and when the process of step A116 is completed, the process proceeds to step A117.

When the process proceeds to step A117, after preparing a table for setting the information on the hold by the starting port 2 (step A117), the special figure starting port 2 switch process (step A118) is performed, and the starting port switch monitoring process is ended.

When it is determined in step A111 that there is a winning in the starting opening 2, for example, before executing step A112, it is illegal to play normal (normally the variable winning device 37 is in the closed state, but it is normal. A step is provided to determine whether there is a fraud in which the winning of the variable winning device 37 is detected. If it is determined that the fraudulent normal communication is occurring, the starting mouth switch monitoring process is terminated without executing step A112 and thereafter. With the configuration, the second starting memory (starting memory of FIG. 2) may not be generated any more if there is an illegality.

[Hard random number acquisition process]
Next, a hard random number acquisition process (step A102) in the above-mentioned starting opening switch monitoring process.
, A110) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the hard random number acquisition process of the first embodiment.

In the hard random number acquisition process, first, the starting opening 1 (starting winning opening 36, normal variation winning device 37)
And, the winning no information of the starting opening to be monitored among the starting openings 2 (starting winning opening 92) is set (step A121), and the starting opening 1 switches 36a and 37a and the starting opening 2 switch 92a are set.
Of the above, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the starting port switch to be monitored (step A122).
.. Then, when there is no input to the start port switch to be monitored (step A122; N), the hard random number acquisition process ends. On the other hand, when there is an input to the starting port switch to be monitored (step A122; Y), the random number latch register status is read (step A123).
, Determines whether the target random number latch register has latch data (step A124).
).

If there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (step A124; N), that is, if no random number has been extracted, the hard random number acquisition process ends. If the target random number latch register has latch data (step A124; Y), the jackpot random number extracted is loaded into the hard random number latch register to be monitored and prepared (step A125).
). Then, of the starting ports 1 and 2, the winning information of the starting port to be monitored is set (step A126), and the hard random number acquisition process is ended.

[Special figure start opening 1 switch processing]
Next, the special figure starting port 1 switch process (step A in the starting port switch monitoring process described above).
Details of step 108) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14: is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure starting opening 1 switch process of 1st Embodiment.

The special figure starting port 1 switch process is a process that is performed when there is an input to the starting port 1 switches 36a and 37a to be monitored (start prize of the special target 1 to be monitored).
In the special figure starting port 1 switch process, first, the starting port signal 1 output, which is the number of times information about the number of winnings to the starting port 1 switch 36a, 37a to be monitored is output to the external management device of the gaming machine 10. The number of times is loaded (step A131), the loaded value is updated by "+1" (step A132), and it is determined whether or not the output number overflows (step A1).
33). If the number of outputs does not overflow (step A133; N), the updated value is saved in the starting port signal 1 output number area of the RWM (step A134).
The process moves to the process of 35. On the other hand, if the output count overflows (step A133;
Y) passes step A134 and shifts to the processing of step A135. In the first embodiment, a value from “0” to “255” can be stored in the starting port signal 1 output frequency region. Then, when the loaded value is "255", when the value is updated by "+1", the updated value becomes "0", and the number of output times is determined to overflow.

Next, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved special figure 1 to be updated (the number of starting memory of special figure 1) corresponding to the monitored opening 1 switch 36a, 37a is less than the upper limit value (for example, less than 4). (Step A135). When the number of special figure 1 reservations to be updated is not less than the upper limit (step A135)
; N) ends the special figure starting port 1 switch processing. When the number of reserved special figure 1 to be updated is less than the upper limit value (step A135; Y), the special figure 1 information setting flag used for setting variation information (for example, for prefetch variation pattern allocation) is set ( In step A136), the number of reserved special figure 1 to be updated is updated by "+1" (step A137).

Next, the address of the random number storage area (random number storage area for special figure 1) corresponding to the reserved number of special figure 1 is calculated (step A138), and the big hit random numbers prepared in step A125 are stored in the big hit random number storage area of RWM. (Step A139). Next, the jackpot symbol random number of special figure 1 is extracted, prepared (step A140), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of RWM (step A141).

Next, the small hit symbol random number of special figure 1 is extracted, prepared, and saved in the small hit symbol random number storage area of RWM (step A142), and the fluctuation pattern random number 1, fluctuation pattern random number 2, and fluctuation pattern random number 3 are set. It saves in the variation pattern random number storage area of the corresponding RWM (step A143), and performs special figure reservation information determination processing (step A144). After that, a decorative special figure 1 reserved number command corresponding to the monitored special figure 1 reserved number is prepared (step A145),
The effect command setting process (step A146) is performed, and the special figure starting port 1 switch process ends.

Here, the RAM 111C of the gaming microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of the game balls into the starting winning opening 36 and the starting winning area of the normal variation winning device 37, and a special figure variation display game. As a starting memory that is a right to execute, a starting winning prize storing means is stored which stores a predetermined number as an upper limit. In addition, the starting winning prize storing means (RAM111C) makes a first starting of various random number values extracted based on the winning of the game ball into the starting opening 1 (starting winning opening 36, normal variation winning device 37) with a predetermined number as an upper limit. Remember as a memory.

[Special figure starting port 2 switch processing]
Next, the special figure starting port 2 switch process (step A in the starting port switch monitoring process described above).
The details of (118) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special figure starting port 2 switch process of the first embodiment.

The special figure starting port 2 switch process is a process performed when there is an input of the starting port 2 switch 92a that is the monitoring target (starting winning of the monitoring target of FIG. 2).
In the special figure starting port 2 switch processing, first, the starting port signal 2 output number, which is the number of times information regarding the number of winnings to the starting port 2 switch 92a is output to the external management device of the gaming machine 10, is loaded ( In step A151), the loaded value is updated by "+1" (step A152).
), it is determined whether or not the output count overflows (step A153). When the number of outputs does not overflow (step A153; N), the updated value is saved in the starting number signal 2 output number area of the RWM (step A154), and the process proceeds to step A155. On the other hand, if the number of outputs overflows (step A153; Y), step A
After passing 154, the process proceeds to step A155. In the first embodiment, a value from “0” to “255” can be stored in the starting port signal 2 output count area. Then, when the loaded value is "255", when the value is updated by "+1", the updated value becomes "0",
It is configured to determine that the output count overflows.

Next, it is determined whether or not the number of special figure 2 holding (starting memory) to be updated corresponding to the starting port 2 switch 92a to be monitored is less than the upper limit value (for example, less than 4) (step A155).
When the number of reserved special figure 2 to be updated is not less than the upper limit value (step A155; N), the special figure starting port 2 switch process is ended. When the number of reserved special figure 2 to be updated is less than the upper limit value (step A155; Y), the special figure 2 information setting flag used for setting the variation information (for example, for distribution of the prefetch variation pattern) is set ( In step A156), the number of reserved special figure 2 to be updated is updated by "+1" (step A157).

Subsequently, the address of the random number storage area (random number storage area for special figure 2) corresponding to the number of reserved special figures 2 is calculated (step A158), and the jackpot random numbers prepared in step A125 are transferred to the jackpot random number storage area of the RWM. (Step A159). Next, the big hit symbol random number of special figure 2 is extracted, prepared (step A160), and saved in the big hit symbol random number storage area of RWM (step A161).

Next, the small hit symbol random number of the special figure 2 is extracted, prepared, and saved in the small hit symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step A162), and the fluctuation pattern random number 1, the fluctuation pattern random number 2, and the fluctuation pattern random number 3 are set. The data is saved in the variation pattern random number storage area of the corresponding RWM (step A163), and the special figure reservation information determination process (step A164) is performed. Then, prepare a decorative special figure 2 reserved number command corresponding to the monitored special figure 2 reserved number (step A165),
The effect command setting process (step A166) is performed, and the special figure starting port 2 switch process is ended.

Here, the RAM 111C of the gaming microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of the game ball into the starting winning area of the starting winning opening 92, and becomes the right to execute the special figure variation display game. It constitutes a starting winning prize storing means for storing a predetermined number as an upper limit. Further, the starting winning prize storing means (RAM 111C) stores various random number values extracted based on the winning of the game ball into the starting opening 2 (starting winning opening 92) as a second starting memory with a predetermined number as an upper limit.

[Special map reservation information determination processing]
Next, details of the special figure reservation information determination processing (step A144, step A164) in the special figure starting port 1 switch process and the special figure starting port 2 switch process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the special figure reservation information determination process according to the first embodiment.

The special figure reservation information determination process is a prefetch process that determines the result related information corresponding to the start memory before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory.

In the special figure pending information determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the probability state of the special figure variation display game is the high probability state (high probability medium) (step A172). When it is determined in step A172 that the probability is high (step A172; Y), the special figure reservation information determination process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step A172 that there is no high probability (step A172; N
), it is determined whether or not a big hit is in progress (step A173). When it is determined in step A173 that the big hit is in progress (step A173; Y), the special figure suspension information determination process is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step A173 that the big hit is not in progress (step A173; N
), a big hit determination process (step A174) is performed to determine whether or not the big hit random number value matches the big hit determination value.

Then, it is determined whether or not the determination result of the jackpot determination process is a jackpot (step A17).
5). When the determination result is a big hit (step A175; Y), the big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target starting port switch (in other words, special figure type; special figure 1 or special figure 2 type) It sets (step A176), acquires the stop symbol information corresponding to the big hit symbol random number prepared in step A140 or A160 (step A177), shifts to the process of step A184, and the subsequent processes are performed.

On the other hand, if the determination result is not a big hit (step A175; N), a small hit determination process (step A179) for determining whether or not it is a small hit depending on whether or not the big hit random number value matches the small hit determination value. Do it. Then, it is determined whether or not the result of the small hit determination process is a small hit (step A180). When the determination result is not a small hit (step A180)
;N) sets the stopped stop pattern information (step A183), shifts to the processing of step A184, and performs the subsequent processing.

On the other hand, if the determination result is a small hit (step A180; Y), the small hit symbol random number check table is set, and the small hit stop symbol information corresponding to the small hit symbol random number prepared in step A142 or A162. Is set (step A182), the process proceeds to step A184, and the subsequent processes are performed.

Then, when the process proceeds to step A184, a prefetch stop symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol information acquired or set in any of step A177, step A182, or step A183 is prepared (step A184), and an effect command setting process (step A18
Perform 5). Next, a special figure information setting process (step A186) for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern is performed, and a variation pattern setting process (step A187) for setting a variation mode of the special figure variation display game. To perform.

Then, the look-ahead variation pattern corresponding to the first-half variation number indicating the first-half variation pattern (variation pattern until the start of the reach action) and the second-half variation number indicating the second-half variation pattern (the variation pattern after the start of the reach action) in the variation mode of the special figure variation display game. A command is prepared (step A188), effect command setting processing (step A189) is performed, and the special figure reservation information determination processing ends.

The special figure information setting process in step A186 and the variation pattern setting process in step A187 are executed at the start of the special figure variation display game in the special figure normal process (special figure 1 normal process or special figure 2 normal process described later). This is the same as the processing described above. That is, when the special figure reservation information determination process is executed in step A144, the special figure type is special figure 1, so the processes of steps A186 and A187 are the special figure 1 information setting process and the special figure 1 variation described later. This is the same as the pattern setting process, and when the special figure reservation information determination process is executed in step A164, the special figure type is special figure 2, so the processes of steps A186 and A187 are the special figure 2 information described later. This is the same as the setting process and the special figure 2 variation pattern setting process.

By the above processing, the prefetch stop pattern command including the result of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory of the prefetch target, and the prefetch variation pattern command including the variation pattern information in the special figure variation display game based on the starting memory are It is prepared and transmitted to the performance control device 300. As a result, the result control information (pre-reading result) of the result related information (whether it is a big hit or not and the type of variation pattern) corresponding to the starting memory is controlled before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding starting memory. The device 300 can be informed, especially the display device 41.
It is possible to notify the player of the result-related information before the start timing of the special figure variation display game by changing the decoration special figure starting memory display displayed in FIG.

That is, the game control device 100 determines a random number stored as a start memory in the start winning storage means (RAM 111C) before executing the variable display game based on the start memory (for example, whether a special result is obtained or not). Judgment) Make a pre-judgment means. Note that the random number value stored corresponding to the starting memory is determined in advance not only at the time of the winning prize when the starting memory occurs, but also at any time before the variable display game based on the starting memory is played. Good.

[Special Figure 1 Game Processing]
Next, details of the special figure 1 game process (step S130a) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special figure 1 game process of the first embodiment.

In the special figure 1 game process, the input of the special winning opening switch 38a is monitored, the entire process relating to the special figure 1 variable display game is controlled, and the special figure 1 (identification information that is variably displayed in the special figure 1 variable display game).
Set the display of. In the special figure 1 game process, first, it is determined whether or not it is during the big hit or the small hit of the special figure 2 (the big hit game state or the small hit game state depending on the result of the special figure 2 variable display game) (step A1). .. When the big hit or the small hit of special figure 2 is not in progress (step A1
In step N2, a special winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) is performed. In this special winning opening switch monitoring processing, processing for monitoring the detection of a game ball by the special winning opening switch 38a provided in the special variation winning device 38 and the special variation winning device 95 is performed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the big hit or the small hit of special figure 2 is in progress (step A1; Y) and when the special winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) is completed, the process proceeds to step A3. If the special processing 1 game processing timer is not "0", "-1" is updated (step A3). The minimum value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is "0" (step A4). When the value of the special figure 1 game process timer is "0" (step A4; Y), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, the process branches to the process corresponding to the special figure 1 game process number. Toku-zu 1 game sequence branch table referred to in the register is set in the register (step A5)
The branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 1 game process number is acquired using the table (step A6). Then, a subroutine call is made according to the game processing number of special figure 1 (step A7).

In step A7, when the special figure 1 game processing number is “0”, the fluctuation start of the special figure 1 variable display game is monitored, and the fluctuation start setting and effect setting of the special figure 1 variable display game Figure 1 Special processing for setting the information necessary to perform the processing during fluctuations 1 Normal processing (step A8)
To perform.

In step A7, if the special figure 1 game process number is "1", the special display for setting the stop display time of special figure 1 and the information necessary for performing the processing during display of special figure 1 1 The changing process (step A9) is performed.

In step A7, if the special figure 1 game process number is "2" and the game result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit, setting of fanfare commands according to the type of big hit, and big hits for each big hit Set the fanfare time according to the winning opening pattern, fanfare/
Special figure 1 processing during display (setting of information necessary for processing during interval)
Perform step A10).

If the special figure 1 game process number is "3" at step A7, setting of the opening time of the special winning opening, updating of the number of times of opening, setting of information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the special winning opening, etc. Perform fanfare/interval processing (step A11).

In step A7, when the special figure 1 game process number is "4", the interval command is set if the big hit round is not the final round, while the ending command is set if it is the final round, and the special winning opening A special winning opening opening process (step A12) is performed to set the information necessary for performing the remaining ball process.

In step A7, if the special figure 1 game processing number is "5", the jackpot round is not the final round, but the information necessary for performing the fanfare/interval processing is set, etc. For example, the processing to set the time for the remaining balls in the special winning opening to be discharged, and the special winning opening remaining ball processing (step A13) to set the information necessary for performing the special figure 1 big hit end processing, etc. Do it.

When the special figure 1 game process number is "6" at step A7, special figure 1 big hit end processing (step A14) for setting information necessary for performing special figure 1 normal processing is performed.

In step A7, if the special figure 1 game process number is "7", set the opening time and opening pattern of the predetermined special winning opening when a small hit occurs, set the fanfare command, and perform the small hit mid-process. Small hitting fanfare middle processing (step A15) for setting information necessary for performing is performed.

In step A7, if the special figure 1 game processing number is "8", setting of information necessary for performing small hit medium movement transition processing, command setting of small hit end screen, small hit remaining ball processing, etc. A small hitting process (step A16) is performed.

When the special figure 1 game process number is "9" at step A7, a small hit remaining ball process (step A17) is performed to set information necessary for performing the special figure 1 small hit end process.

When the special figure 1 game process number is "10" at step A7, special figure 1 small hit end processing (step A18) for setting information necessary for performing special figure 1 normal processing is performed.

After that, after preparing a table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 1 symbol display section 53 (step A19), the symbol fluctuation control processing (step A20) relating to the special figure 1 symbol display section 53 is performed, and the special figure game processing To finish. On the other hand, in step A4, if the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is not "0" (step A4; N), that is, if the time is not up, the process proceeds to step A19 and the subsequent processes. To perform.

The small hit is a result mode without the operation of the condition device, and the big hit is a special result with the operation of the condition device. The condition device operates when a big hit occurs in the special figure variation display game (stop display of the big hit symbol), and when the condition device operates, for example, a big hit state occurs and special condition as a special electric accessory. It means that a specific flag for continuously operating the variable winning a prize device 38 is set (the accessory continuous operation device is operated). The condition device not operating means that the above-mentioned flag is not set as in the case where the small hit lottery is won. The "condition device" may be software means such as a flag that is turned on and off by software as described above, or hardware means such as a switch that is turned on and off electrically. Further, the "conditional device" is a term generally used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of the electric accessory, and the same applies in this specification. It is used as a term that has different meanings.

[Special Figure 2 game processing]
Next, details of the special figure 2 game process (step S130b) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special figure 2 game process of the first embodiment.

In the special figure 2 game processing, the input of the special winning opening switch 38a is monitored, the control of the entire processing relating to the special figure 2 variable display game, and the special figure 2 (identification information that is variably displayed in the special figure 2 variable display game).
Set the display of. In the special figure 2 game processing, first, it is determined whether or not it is during the big hit or the small hit of the special figure 1 (the big hit game state or the small hit game state according to the result of the special figure 1 variable display game) (step A31). .. When the big hit or the small hit of Toku-zu 1 is not in progress (Step A
31; N), a special winning opening switch monitoring process (step A32) is performed. In this special winning opening switch monitoring processing, processing for monitoring the detection of a game ball by the special winning opening switch 38a provided in the special variation winning device 38 and the special variation winning device 95 is performed.

Next, when it is determined that the big hit or the small hit of Toku-zu 1 is being performed (step A31; Y)
When the special winning opening switch monitoring process (step A32) is completed, step A33
If the special figure 2 game processing timer is not "0", it is updated to "-1" (step A3).
3). The minimum value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is "0" (step A34). When the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is "0" (step A34; Y), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is "0". It is determined whether or not there is (step A35). When the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not "0" (step A35; N), the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is updated by "-1" (step A36), and the special figure 2 in RWM is changed. In the special figure 2 game processing timer area, which is an area for storing the value of the game processing timer, the long fluctuation timer value (for example, 6
0000 ms) is saved (step A37), and the process proceeds to step A59.

On the other hand, when the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is "0" (step A35;
In Y), the special figure 2 game sequence branch table to be referred to for branching to the process corresponding to the special figure 2 game process number is set in the register (step A38), and the special figure 2 game process number is used by using the table. Acquires the branch destination address of the process corresponding to (step A39)
.. Then, a subroutine call is made in accordance with the special figure 2 game processing number (step A4).
7).

In step A47, if the special figure 2 game process number is “0”, the change start of the special figure 2 variable display game is monitored, and the change start setting and effect setting of the special figure 2 variable display game and the special effect are monitored. Figure 2 Special figure 2 to set the information necessary to perform processing during fluctuations 2 Normal processing (step A4
Perform 8).

In step A47, if the special figure 2 game processing number is "1", the special display for setting the stop display time of special figure 2 and the information necessary for performing the processing during the special figure 2 display 2 Processing during fluctuation (step A49) is performed.

In step A47, if the special figure 2 game processing number is "2", if the game result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit, setting of a fanfare command according to the type of big hit,
The special figure 2 displaying process (step A50) for setting the fanfare time according to the special winning opening opening pattern of each jackpot and the information necessary for performing the fanfare/interval processing is performed.

In step A47, if the special figure 2 game process number is "3", setting of the opening time of the special winning opening, updating of the number of times of opening, setting of information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the special winning opening, etc. Perform fanfare/interval processing (step A51).

In step A47, if the special figure game process number is "4", the interval command is set if the jackpot round is not the final round, while the ending command is set if the jackpot round is the final round, and the special winning opening remains. A special winning opening opening process (step A52) is performed, which is a process of setting information necessary for performing the ball process.

In step A47, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "5", if the jackpot round is not the final round, the information necessary for performing the fanfare/interval processing is set, while the final round is required. For example, the processing to set the time for discharging the remaining balls in the special winning opening and the processing for setting the necessary information for performing the special figure 2 big hit end processing, etc. Do it.

If the special figure 2 game process number is "6" in step A47, the special figure 2 big hit ending process (step A54) is performed to set information necessary for performing the special figure 2 normal process.

When the special figure 2 game process number is "7" at step A47, the predetermined opening time and opening pattern of the special winning opening when a small hit occurs, the fanfare command setting, the small hit process Small hitting fanfare during processing (setting of information necessary for performing)
Perform step A55).

In step A47, if the special figure 2 game process number is "8", setting of information necessary for performing small hit medium movement transition process, command setting of small hit end screen, small hit remaining ball process, etc. Performs a small hitting process (step A56).

If the special figure 2 game process number is "9" in step A47, a small hit remaining ball process (step A57) is performed to set information necessary for performing the special figure 2 small hit end process.

If the special figure 2 game process number is "10" in step A47, the special figure 2 small hit end process (step A58) for setting the information necessary for performing the special figure 2 normal process is performed.

After that, after preparing a table for controlling the variation of the special figure 2 symbol display section 54 (step A59), the symbol variation control processing (step A60) relating to the special figure 2 symbol display section 54 is performed, and the special figure game processing. To finish. On the other hand, in step A34, if the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not "0" (step A34; N), that is, if the time has not expired or the process of step A37 is completed, the process of step A59 is executed. The process shifts to the processing and the subsequent processing is performed.

[Special processing 1 usual processing]
Next, details of the special figure 1 normal process (step A8) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special process 1 normal process of the first embodiment.

In the special figure 1 normal processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 can start changing (that is, whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game can start) (step A251). In this judgment, the game state is
In the case of the period from the end of the variation of the special figure 2 (big hit or small hit) (start of the processing during the display of special figure 2) to the end of the hit operation (big hit game state or small hit game state), that is, When it corresponds to FIG. 2, it is determined that the fluctuation of the special figure 1 cannot be started, and when it is not within the period, it is determined that the fluctuation of the special figure 1 can be started.

Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation of the special figure 1 can be started (step A251; Y), it is determined whether or not the left-handing instruction notification is completed (that is, the left-handing instruction notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300,
After that, it is determined whether or not the right-handing instruction notification command is not transmitted (step A2).
52). In step A252, if the left-handing instruction notification flag is set, it is determined that the left-handing instruction notification has been made, and if the left-handing instruction notification flag is not set, it is determined that the left-handing instruction notification has not been made. It may be configured.

If the left-handing instruction notification has not been made (step A252; N), a left-handing instruction notification command is prepared (step A253), effect command setting processing (step A254) is performed, and a left-handing instruction notification flag is set (step). A255).

If the left-handing instruction has been informed (step A252; Y) and if step A255 has been completed, the process proceeds to step A256, and whether the special figure 1 reservation number (first starting memory number) is "0". It is determined whether or not (step A256). Then, when it is determined that the special figure 1 hold number is not "0" (step A256; N), a variation start probability information command corresponding to the current probability state of the special figure variation display game is prepared (step A257), and the production command The setting process (step A258) is performed, and the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step A259) is performed.
A decoration special figure reservation number command corresponding to the reservation number is prepared (step A260), effect command setting processing (step A261) is performed, and the special figure status area in the RWM is special figure 1
Information (incremental information) indicating that the game is changing (the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed) is set (step A262), and it is determined whether or not the probability state of the special figure changing display game is high probability (step A26).
3).

In the special figure status area, information indicating that the special figure 1 is changing (the special figure 1 changing display game is being executed) and information indicating that the special figure 2 is changing (the special figure 2 changing display game is being executed) These are areas that are stored independently of each other, and the state indicated by the information set in this special figure status area is the special figure status. When step A262 is executed, the special figure status becomes one of "during special figure 1 changing" and "during special figure 1 changing+special figure 2 changing".

In addition, in the special figure 1 variation start process (step A259), a process of saving the process number "1" related to the special figure 1 changing process in the special figure 1 game process number area (step A31 described later).
8, A319), a process of saving the changing flag in the special figure 1 change control flag area (step A322 described later), and a process of setting the change time as the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer (steps A307 and A497 described later). ) And so on.

Then, when the high probability is not in progress (step A263; N), it is determined whether or not the high probability final fluctuation is in progress (step A264), and when it is not in the high probability final fluctuation (step A264;
In N), the special figure 1 fluctuation check flag is set (step A265). It should be noted that the determination as to whether or not the high-probability final fluctuation is in progress is made by a high-probability final fluctuation flag described later. That is, if the high-probability final fluctuation flag is set, it is determined that the high-probability final fluctuation is in progress.

Then, when step A265 is completed, when it is determined that the high probability is in progress (step A263; Y), and when it is determined that the high probability final fluctuation is in progress (step A264;
In Y), the special figure 1 changing process transition setting process (step A266) is performed, and the special figure 1 normal process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation of the special figure 1 cannot be started (step A251; N) and if the number of pending special figure 1 is "0" in step A256 (step A256; Y), the processing number is used. "0" is set (step A267), and the process number, that is, "0" is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area which is an area for storing the special figure 1 game process number in the RWM (step A268). 1 Normally end the process.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the determination result of step A251 is in a positive state,
If the special figure 1 hold number is not “0”, the special figure 1 variation start processing (step A259) and the like are executed, and even if the special figure 2 is changing (the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed). The special figure 1 variable display game is started. That is, when the game control device 100 has the first start memory in the first start storage means (game control device 100), the variable display game based on the first start memory and the variable display game based on the second start memory are displayed. It constitutes a control means that can be executed simultaneously with the game.

[Special figure 2 daily processing]
Next, details of the special figure 2 normal process (step A48) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 game process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a flowchart of special processing 2 normal processing of the first embodiment.

In the special figure 2 normal process, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 can start changing (that is, whether or not the special figure 2 changing display game can start) (step A271). In this judgment, the game state is
In the case of the period from the end of the variation of the hit (big hit or the small hit) of the special figure 1 (start of the processing during the display of the special figure 1) to the end of the hit operation (the big hit game state or the small hit game state), that is, When FIG. 1 is correct, it is determined that the variation of the special figure 2 cannot be started, and when the period is not the above period, it is determined that the variation of the special figure 2 can be started.

If it is determined that the fluctuation of the special map 2 is possible (step A271; Y), the special map 2
It is determined whether or not the number of holdings (the number of second starting memory) is "0" (step A272). Then, when it is determined that the special figure 2 holding number is not "0" (step A272; N), a fluctuation start probability information command corresponding to the current probability state of the special figure fluctuation display game is prepared (step A27).
3), performing special command setting processing (step A274), performing special figure 2 variation start processing (step A275), and changing special figure 2 in the special figure status area in RWM (while executing the special figure 2 variation display game). Is set (information addition) (step A276),
It is determined whether or not the probability state of the special figure variation display game is high probability (step A277).

Here, the state indicated by the information set in the special figure status area (that is, the special figure status) is “Special figure 2 is changing” and “Special figure 1 is changing + Special figure 2 is changing” when step A276 is executed. It becomes one of the states.

Further, in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step A275), a process of saving the process number "1" related to the special figure 2 changing process in the special figure 2 game process number area (step A34 described later).
8, A349), a process of saving the changing flag in the special figure 2 change control flag area (step A352 described later), and a process of setting the change time as the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer (steps A337 and A497 described later). ) And so on.

It should be noted that, for example, after executing step A275, a decoration special figure reservation number command corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation number is prepared, then effect command setting processing is executed, and then the process proceeds to step A276 (that is, special figure 2 Also, regarding the above, the configuration may be such that the decoration special figure reservation number command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 in the normal processing).

If it is not in the high probability (step A277; N), it is determined whether or not the high probability final fluctuation is in progress (step A278), and if it is not in the high probability final fluctuation (step A278;
In N), the special figure 2 fluctuation check flag is set (step A279).

Then, when step A279 is completed, when it is determined that the high probability is in progress (step A277; Y), and when it is determined that the high probability final fluctuation is in progress (step A278;
In Y), the special figure 2 changing process transition setting process (step A280) is performed, and the special figure 2 normal process ends.

On the other hand, when the special figure 2 hold number is "0" (step A272; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 hold number is "0" (step A281), and the special figure 1 hold number is If it is determined to be "0" (step A281; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 is changing (during the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed) (step A282). When the special figure 1 is not changing (step A282; N), it is determined whether or not the customer waiting demo has been started (step A283).
If the customer waiting demo has not started (step A283; N), the customer waiting demo flag is set in the customer waiting demo flag area (step A284). Subsequently, a customer waiting demo command corresponding to the current probability state is prepared (step A285), and effect command setting processing (step A286) is performed. In addition, the prepared command (
Here, a customer waiting demo command) is transmitted to the performance control device 300.

Then, when step A286 ends, when it is determined that the fluctuation of the special figure 2 cannot be started (step A271; N), and the special figure 1 holding number is not "0" (step A281).
; N), when Toku-zu 1 is changing (step A282; Y), and when the customer waiting demonstration has started (step A283; Y), "0" is set as the process number ( (Step A287), the processing number, that is, "0" is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area which is an area for storing the special figure 2 game processing number in the RWM (step A288), and the special figure 2 normal processing is ended.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the determination result of step A271 is affirmative,
If the special figure 2 hold number is not “0”, the special figure 2 variation start processing (step A275) and the like are executed, and even if the special figure 1 is changing (the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed). The special figure 2 variable display game is started. In other words, when the game control device 100 has the second start memory in the second start storage means (game control device 100), the variable display game based on the second start memory and the variable display game based on the first start memory are displayed. It constitutes a control means that can be executed simultaneously with the game.

[Special map 1 fluctuation start processing]
Next, details of the special figure 1 variation start process (step A259) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 normal process will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 21 is a diagram (No. 1) showing a flowchart of the Toku-zu 1 variation start process of the first embodiment. FIG. 22 is a diagram (No. 2) showing a flowchart of the Toku-zu 1 variation start process of the first embodiment.

The special figure 1 variation start process is a process performed when the first special figure variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) is started. In the special figure 1 variation start process, first, the special figure 1 information setting flag indicating the type of the special figure variation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) is set (step A301), and the first special figure variation display game is executed. The big hit flag 1 for determining whether or not it is a big hit is subjected to big hit flag 1 setting processing (step A302) for setting deviation information and big hit information.

Next, special figure 1 stop design setting processing (step A) related to the setting of special figure 1 stop design (design information)
303), the special figure 1 information setting process (step A304) of setting the special figure 1 information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern of the special figure 1 is performed, and the variation of the first special figure variation display game is performed. A special figure 1 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referencing various kinds of information regarding pattern setting is set, is prepared (step A305). After that, a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process (step A306) for setting a fluctuation pattern that is a fluctuation mode in the first special figure fluctuation display game is performed, and fluctuation start information setting for setting fluctuation start information of the special figure fluctuation display game The process (step A307) is performed to determine whether the probability state of the special figure variation display game is high probability (step A308).

Then, when the high probability is not in progress (step A308; N), it is determined whether or not the high probability final change is in progress (step A309), and when it is not in the high probability final change (step A309;
In N), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 is changing (the special figure 2 changing display game is being executed) (step A310). If the Toku-zu 2 is changing (step A310; Y), it is determined whether or not the number of repetitions of the Toku-zu 2 game processing timer is "0" (Step A311). Special figure 2
When the number of repetitions of the game processing timer is not "0" (step A311; N), it is determined whether the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is, for example, "4" or more (step A311).
312), if the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not, for example, "4" or more (step A312; N), the remaining fluctuation time of special figure 2 is calculated (step A313).

It should be noted that the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is set in the fluctuation start information setting process of step A337, which will be described later, when the special figure 2 game processing timer is in a state of a time value that is sufficient within the range of 2 bytes (for example, 60000 msec). It is set to “0” (for example, see step A500 described later).

Further, the variation time of the special figure 2 (execution time of the special figure 2 variable display game) can be calculated from the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer (the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer area). Specifically, step A
In 313, the long fluctuation timer value (for example, 60000) saved in the above step A37.
The value of the special figure 2 game processing timer area at that time is added to the result obtained by multiplying (m seconds) by the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer, whereby the remaining variation time of special figure 2 can be calculated.

Further, when the long fluctuation timer value is, for example, 60000 msec (=60 seconds), the value of the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 4 or more, which means that the remaining fluctuation time of special figure 2 is 240 It is more than a second (= 4 x 60 seconds), which is longer than the longest fluctuation time of Special Figure 1,
In that case, since it is not necessary to execute step A315 and step A316 described later, step A312 is provided to determine that. Therefore, step A312
The numerical value "4" in is only an example of a numerical value for pre-determining whether the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 is longer than the longest fluctuation time of the special figure 1 by the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer. Absent.

Next, when step A313 ends and when the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is "0" (step A311; Y), the process moves to step A314 and the special figure 1 to be started is started. Fluctuation time (for example, the fluctuation time set in step A306)
However, the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 that is currently changing (calculation result of step A313, or special figure 2
If the number of repetitions of the game processing timer is zero, it is determined whether or not it is shorter than the time determined by the value of the special processing 2 game processing timer) (step A314).

When the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is not shorter than the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 (step A3
14; N) prepares a command for notifying that the variation time of Toku-zu 1 is longer (step A315), and performs effect command setting processing (step A316).

Next, when the high probability is in progress (step A308; Y), when the high probability final fluctuation is in progress (
If the special figure 2 is not changing (step A309; N), the special figure 2
When the number of repetitions of the game processing timer is, for example, "4" or more (step A312;
Y), if the fluctuation time of Toku-zu 1 is shorter than the remaining fluctuation time of Toku-zu 2 (step A314; Y).
), and when step A316 is completed, the process proceeds to step A317 (FIG. 22).

When the process proceeds to step A317, the high-probability variation number update process (step A317) is performed, "1" is set as the process number (step A318), and the special figure 1 game process number is an area for storing the special figure 1 game process number in the RWM. In the game process number area, the process number, that is, "1"
Is saved (step A319), and the customer waiting demo flag area, which is an area where the customer waiting demo flag is set in the RWM, is cleared (step A320). After that, the signal regarding the start of special figure 1 fluctuation (the special symbol 1 during fluctuation signal is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A321), and the changing flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area of RWM (
Step A322), save the initial value (for example, 100 ms) of the blink control timer (timer of the blinking cycle of the special figure 1 symbol display portion 53) in the special figure 1 blink control timer area of the RWM (step A323), and specify the special feature of RWM. 1 initial value (for example, "0" corresponding to a blank symbol) is saved in the symbol number area during fluctuation in FIG. 1 (step A324), and the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is ended. In step A324, the reason why "0" is saved in the symbol number area during fluctuation of special figure 1 is to start the variable display of special figure 1 from a blank symbol.

[Special map 2 fluctuation start processing]
Next, details of the special figure 2 variation start process (step A275) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 normal process will be described with reference to FIGS. 23 and 24. FIG. 23 is a diagram (No. 1) showing a flowchart of the special figure 2 variation start process of the first embodiment. FIG. 24 is a diagram (No. 2) showing a flowchart of the special figure 2 variation start process of the first embodiment.

The special figure 2 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the second special figure variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game). In the special figure 2 variation start process, first, the special figure 2 information setting flag indicating the type of the special figure variation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2) is set (step A331), and the second special figure variation display game is executed. The big hit flag 2 for determining whether or not it is a big hit is subjected to big hit flag 2 setting processing (step A332) for setting deviation information and big hit information.

Next, special figure 2 stop design setting processing concerning the setting of special figure 2 stop design (design information) (step A)
333), the special figure 2 information setting process (step A334) for setting the special figure 2 information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern of the special figure 2 is performed, and the variation of the second special figure variation display game is performed. A special figure 2 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referencing various kinds of information relating to pattern setting is set, is prepared (step A335). After that, a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process (step A336) for setting a fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation mode in the second special figure fluctuation display game is performed, and fluctuation start information setting for setting fluctuation start information of the special figure fluctuation display game. The process (step A337) is performed to determine whether the probability state of the special figure variation display game is high probability (step A338).

Then, when the high probability is not in progress (step A338; N), it is determined whether or not the high probability final change is in progress (step A339), and when it is not in the high probability final change (step A339;
In N), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 is changing (the special figure 1 changing display game is being executed) (step A340). When the special figure 1 is changing (step A340; Y), the remaining change time of the special figure 1 is calculated (step A343). The remaining variation time of the special figure 1 can be calculated from the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer (the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer area).

Next, when step A343 is completed, the process proceeds to step A344, and the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 to be started (for example, the fluctuation time set in step A336) of the special figure 1 currently changing. It is determined whether it is shorter than the remaining fluctuation time (calculation result of step A343) (step A344).

When the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 is not shorter than the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 1 (step A3
44; N) prepares a command for notifying that the variation time of Toku-zu 2 is longer (step A345), and performs effect command setting processing (step A346).

Next, when the high probability is in progress (step A338; Y), when the high probability final fluctuation is in progress (
If the special figure 1 is not changing (step A340; N), the special figure 2
If the fluctuation time of is shorter than the remaining fluctuation time of Toku-zu 1 (step A344; Y), and
When step A346 ends, the process moves to step A347 (FIG. 24).

When the process proceeds to step A347, the high-probability variation number update process (step A347) is performed, "1" is set as the process number (step A348), and the special figure 2 game process number is an area for storing the special figure 2 game process number in the RWM. In the game process number area, the process number, that is, "1"
Is saved (step A349), and the customer waiting demo flag area, which is an area where the customer waiting demo flag is set in the RWM, is cleared (step A350). After that, the signal regarding the start of the special figure 2 fluctuation (the special symbol 2 during fluctuation signal is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A351), and the changing flag is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area of the RWM (
Step A352), save the initial value (for example, 100 ms) of the blink control timer (the timer of the blinking cycle of the special figure 2 symbol display portion 54) in the special figure 2 blink control timer area of the RWM (step A353), and specify the special characteristic of the RWM. The initial value (for example, "0" corresponding to a blank symbol) is saved in the symbol number area during fluctuation in FIG. 2 (step A354), and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is ended. In addition, in step A354, the reason that "0" is saved in the special symbol 2 changing symbol number area is to start the variable display of the special symbol 2 from the blank symbol.

[Variation start information setting process]
Next, details of the fluctuation start information setting processing (steps A307 and A337) in the above-described special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and special figure 2 fluctuation start processing will be described with reference to FIGS. 25 and 26.
FIG. 25 is a view showing a flowchart of the fluctuation start information setting process of the first embodiment (No. 1).
Is. FIG. 26 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the fluctuation start information setting process of the first embodiment (
Part 2).

In the fluctuation start information setting process, first, the target fluctuation pattern random number 1, fluctuation pattern random number 2,
And the information in the random number storage area of the fluctuation pattern random number 3 is cleared. That is, it is determined whether or not the information of special figure 1 is being set (step A491), and if the information of special figure 1 is being set (step A491).
491; Y), the information (for reserved sphere 1) in the random number storage areas (for reserved sphere 1) of the fluctuation pattern random number 1, fluctuation pattern random number 2 and fluctuation pattern random number 3 of Toku-zu 1 is cleared (step A491a). ). When the information of the special figure 1 is not being set (step A491; N), the information of the random number storage areas of the fluctuation pattern random number 1, the fluctuation pattern random number 2 and the fluctuation pattern random number 3 of the special figure 2 is cleared (step). A491b).

Next, the first half fluctuation time value table is set (step A492), and the first half fluctuation time value corresponding to the first half fluctuation number is acquired (step A493). Further, the latter half fluctuation time value table is set (step A494), and the latter half fluctuation time value corresponding to the latter half fluctuation number is acquired (step A495).

Then, the first half variation time value and the second half variation time value are added (step A496), and the added value is the target special figure game processing timer area (that is, the special figure 1 game processing timer area during the information setting of the special figure 1, During the information setting of the special figure 2, the game is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area) (step A497).

Next, it is determined whether or not the information of special figure 1 is being set (step A498), and if the information of special figure 1 is not being set (step A498; N), it is determined whether or not the long fluctuation of special figure 2 is started (step A498). A49
9) If it is not the long fluctuation start of the special figure 2 (step A499; N), the repetition number area of the special figure 2 game processing timer (area in which the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is stored in the RWM) is set to ""0" is saved (step A500).

On the other hand, if the long fluctuation of special figure 2 has started (step A499; Y), "9" is saved in the repeat count area of the special figure 2 game processing timer (step A501). Then, when the information of special figure 1 is being set (step A498; Y), when the processes of steps A500 and A501 are completed, the process proceeds to step A502.

In addition, in order to change the time which is not enough with the 2-byte special figure game processing timer, special figure 2
The number of repetitions (the number of repetitions of the game processing timer for Toku-zu 2) is set for the long fluctuation of the. If, for example, 60000 ms is set in the special figure 2 game processing timer area in step A497 as the addition result of step A496 and "9" is saved as the number of repetitions in step A501, the timer interrupt processing (step A33 described above) is performed. The value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is decremented, and when the time is up, the number of repetitions of the special figure game processing timer is decremented by 1 in step A36, and further 60000 ms is added to the special figure 2 game processing timer area in step A37. Set. Therefore, in this case, as a result, the total fluctuation time of Toku-zu 2 is 60000 ms×10 and a fluctuation time of 10 minutes in this embodiment. Actually 4
Since it is a timer interrupt of ms, up to about 262 seconds can be set with 2 bytes, but for ease of understanding, the case where it can be represented by multiplication of 60 seconds is described as an example.

Next, when the process proceeds to step A502, the data (MODE) of the variation command corresponding to the first half variation number is prepared (step A502), and the data (ACTION) of the variation command corresponding to the second variation number is prepared (step A503). ), the effect command setting process is performed (step A504).

Although detailed description is omitted, in the effect command setting process, prepared command data (MODE and ACTION) is written in the effect serial transmission buffer unless the effect serial transmission buffer is full. Thereby, the effect command including the prepared command data is transmitted from the game control apparatus 100 to the effect control apparatus 300 by serial communication using the serial communication function of the CPU 111A in the game control apparatus 100. The same applies when the effect command setting process is executed by being called in another step. Further, in the case of this flowchart, the command is transmitted in a 2-byte structure such as “MODE” and “ACTION” like the effect command, but it may be configured in a byte structure of more than that. In those cases, a flow chart corresponding to a multi-byte configuration may be used.

Next, when step A504 is completed, it is determined whether or not the information of special figure 1 is being set (step A504).
505), when the information of special figure 1 is being set (step A505; Y), the number of reserved special figure 1 is updated by "-1" (step A506), and the address of the random number storage area of special figure 1 is set. After setting, the random number storage area of the address is shifted (step A507), the information of the vacant area after the shift is cleared (step A508), and the fluctuation start information setting process ends.

On the other hand, when the information of special figure 1 is not being set (step A505; N), the number of reserved special figure 2 is updated by "-1" (step A506a), and the address of the random number storage area of special figure 2 is set. Then, the random number storage area of the address is shifted (step A507a), the information of the vacant area after the shift is cleared (step A508a), and the fluctuation start information setting process ends.

By the above processing, the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is set. That is,
The game control device 100 serves as a determination unit that determines various random number values stored in the starting storage unit (RAM111C). Further, the game control device 100 constitutes a variation pattern determination means capable of determining the variation pattern of the identification information to be executed in the variable display game, based on the determination information stored in the starting memory.

Then, the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is transmitted to the effect control device 300 by the above-described effect command setting processing, and the effect control device 300 receives the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game, The detailed effect contents in the decorative special figure variation display game are set according to the determined variation pattern, and the decorative special figure variation display game is executed. The information about the start of the special figure variation display game includes a decoration special figure hold number command including information on the number of starting memories (holding number), a decoration special figure command including information about a stop pattern, and variation of the special figure variation display game. A variation command including information about a pattern (which may be referred to as a variation pattern command or the like) is included, and for example, each effect command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 in a predetermined order as shown in the flowchart of the present embodiment. ..

[High probability change count update process]
Next, the high-probability fluctuation number update process (
Details of steps A317 and A347 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 27 shows the first
It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the high-probability fluctuation frequency update process of this embodiment.

In the high probability variation number update processing, first, it is determined whether or not the probability state of the special figure variation display game is in high probability (step A551), and if it is not in high probability of special figure (step A551; N).
), the high-probability fluctuation number update processing is terminated.

If one of the types of the special figure variation display games of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is in the big hit game state, the probability of hitting the other variation display game is controlled to be a low probability, but one is small. In the case of a hit, the other may have a high probability.

When the probability is high (step A551; Y), the number of times of high probability variation that manages the number of executions of the special figure variation display game that is in the high probability state is updated to "-1" (step A552), and the high probability of variation is calculated. It is determined whether the number of times is "0" (step A553).

When the number of times of high probability variation is not "0" (step A553; N), the updating process of number of high probability variations is ended. When the number of high-probability fluctuations is “0” (step A553; Y),
The signal regarding the high probability end is saved in the external information output data area (step A555).
Note that the high probability end signal is a signal that turns off two big hit signals.

Then, a signal regarding the end of high probability & time saving (high probability & no time saving or high probability & time saving) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A556). In addition, the signal regarding the end of high probability & time saving, the signal to turn off the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, the signal to turn off the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, and the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal Signal to
Includes a signal for turning off the special symbol 2 variation time reduction state signal and a signal for turning off the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal. In addition, even in the special figure high probability, since the general figure only changes the probability state, the normal symbol 1 variation time reduction state signal and the normal electric auditors product 1 open extension state signal are always turned off.

Then, the low probability number is saved in the game state display number area (step A557), and the special figure low probability & no time saving flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step A559).
), the high-probability final variation flag corresponding to the symbol (special figure 1 or special figure 2) to start changing is set (step A560), and the high-probability fluctuation number updating process is ended.

The high-probability final variation flag includes information that can determine the type of the special figure variation display game that is a high-probability final variation (special figure 1 or special figure 2). In addition, since the internal probability becomes low at the start of the fluctuation in the high-probability final fluctuation, the information to show that the fluctuation started in the high probability even in the low probability is It is a probability final fluctuation flag. As described above, in the case of the present embodiment, in the high-probability final change, the probability state of the target special figure (the setting state in the game control device 100) is returned to the low probability at the start of the change. Thereby, when the game ball wins the starting opening during the special figure fluctuation which is the final time in the high probability state, it is possible to prevent a problem that the hit determination for the starting winning is determined with high probability.

[Special figure 1 processing during fluctuation]
Next, details of the special figure 1 changing process (step A9) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process will be described with reference to FIGS. 28 and 29. FIG. 28 is a diagram (No. 1) showing a flowchart of the processing during fluctuation of Toku-zu 1 according to the first embodiment. FIG. 29 is a diagram (No. 2) showing the flowchart of the processing during fluctuation of Toku-zu 1 of the first embodiment.

In the special figure 1 changing process, first, the number of times of symbol determination output is updated by "+1" (step A5
71), load a command (decorative special figure 1 command including stop pattern information for special figure 1) from the decorative special figure 1 command area, prepare (step A572), and perform effect command setting processing (step A573). ..

Next, a decoration special figure 1 stop command (design stop command for special figure 1) is prepared (step A574), effect command setting processing (step A575) is performed, and a high probability final variation flag is set according to the state of the high probability final variation flag. It is determined whether there is a change (step A576). And, if it is not the high probability final variation (step A576; N), the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern saved in the stop symbol pattern area in the special symbol 1 stop symbol setting process is changed to this special symbol 1 variable display game. Is set as the stop display time (step A577), and if it is a high-probability final change (step A576; Y), the display time at the time of high-probability final change is set to this special figure 1.
It is set as the stop display time of the variable display game (step A578), and the process proceeds to step A579. Here, the stop display time set in steps A577 and A578 is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area in a step (not shown) provided immediately before step A579, for example.

To give an example of the display time of the special figure 1, in the case of the first embodiment, 600 ms is set as the display time when the stop symbol pattern is a falling symbol pattern, and the stop symbol pattern is a jackpot symbol pattern. In some cases, 2000 ms is set as the display time, and when the stop symbol pattern is the small hit pattern, 136 ms is set as the display time.
The display time of the high-probability final fluctuation is set to 7000 ms.

Next, when proceeding to step A579 (FIG. 29), it is determined whether or not the current (currently running) special figure 1 variable display game is out based on the information determined and set in the jackpot flag 1 setting process. (Step A579), if it is out (Step A579; Y), Step A
If it shifts to 594 and is not out of alignment (step A579; N), the special figure 2 is also currently changing (
It is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed) (step A580).

It should be noted that whether or not the special figure 2 is changing is determined based on either the information of the special figure 2 game processing number area, the information of the special figure status area, or the information of the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area. You can That is, the configuration may be such that it is determined to be changing if "1" is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area, or if it is changing if special figure 2 changing is set in the special figure status area. The configuration may be used, the configuration may be determined to be changing if the changing flag is saved in the special figure 2 change control flag area, or the combination may be used to make the determination.

If the special figure 2 is also changing (step A580; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 2 displaying process is being executed (step A581), and the special figure 2 displaying process is not being executed. In the case (step A581; N), the number of times the symbol determination frequency is output is updated by “+1” (step A581).
582).

Next, when step A582 is finished and when the special figure 2 displaying process is being executed (step A581; Y), the display time of this special figure 1 (the time set in step A577 etc.) is set. For example, the result of adding 4 ms is set as the display time of the special figure 2 (step A58).
3), the display time of the special figure 2 is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step A5).
84). By the processing of steps A583 and A584, when the special figure 2 has already started the stop display, the display time of the special figure 2 is reset. By this resetting, the display time of Toku-zu 2 is basically extended, but it may be shortened in some cases.

After that, a command (decorative special figure 2 command including stop pattern information for special figure 2) is loaded from the decorative special figure 2 command area and prepared (step A585), and effect command setting processing (step A586) is performed. Next, a decoration special figure 2 stop command (design stop command for special figure 2) is prepared (step A587), and the effect command setting process (step A)
588) is performed, and special figure 2 display processing transition setting processing 2 (step A589) is performed.

According to the processing of steps A579 to A589 described above, when the special figure 1 variable display game of this time in which the decorative design is stopped and displayed is a win (big hit or small hit), the special figure being changed at the same time The variable display of 2 will be forcibly ended.

Next, when step A589 is completed and when the special figure 2 is not changing (step A5
80; N) loads a command from the decoration special figure 1 command area and saves it in the hit symbol command area (step A590), and determines whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game this time is a small hit (step A591). ..

If it is a big hit but not a small hit (step A591; N), information from the special figure 1 round number upper limit value information area (special figure 1 to control the big hit game after the end of fluctuation of special figure 1)
Special figure 1 Round number upper limit value information that determines the upper limit of the number of rounds is loaded and saved in the round number upper limit value information area (step A592). Save in the mouth opening information area (step A593).

Next, if the special figure 1 variable display game this time is out (step A579; Y), if the special figure 1 variable display game this time is small hit (step A591; Y), step A5
When 93 is finished, the process moves to step A594. When step A594 is entered,
Information (stop symbol number) is loaded from the special figure 1 stop symbol save area, saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol area (step A594), and the special figure 1 display processing transition setting process 1 (step A595) is performed, Toku-zu 1 The process during change ends. In addition, in the special figure 1 stop symbol evacuation area, special figure 1
A predetermined stop symbol number is saved in the stop symbol setting process.

In this way, the game control device 100 constitutes stop time setting means for setting the stop time for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game. Further, when the variation display game based on the first start memory has a special result (hit), the game control device 100 serves as means for ending the variation display game based on the second start memory that is being executed at the same time.

[Special figure 2 processing during fluctuation]
Next, details of the special figure 2 changing process (step A49) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 game process will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 and 31. FIG. 30 is a diagram (No. 1) showing a flowchart of the processing during fluctuation of special figure 2 according to the first embodiment. FIG. 31 is a diagram (No. 2) showing the flowchart of the special figure 2 changing process in the first embodiment.

In the special figure 2 changing process, first, the number of times the symbol determination frequency is output is updated by "+1" (step A6).
01), load a command (decorative special figure 2 command including stop pattern information for special figure 2) from the decorative special figure 2 command area, prepare (step A602), and perform effect command setting processing (step A603). ..

Next, a decoration special figure 2 stop command (design stop command for special figure 2) is prepared (step A604), effect command setting processing (step A605) is performed, and a high probability final variation flag is set according to the state of the high probability final variation flag. It is determined whether there is a change (step A606). If it is not the high probability final fluctuation (step A606; N), the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern saved in the stop symbol pattern area in the special symbol 2 stop symbol setting process is changed to the special symbol 2 variable display game this time. Is set as the stop display time (step A607), and if it is a high-probability final change (step A606; Y), the display time at the time of high-probability final change is set in this special figure 2.
It is set as the stop display time of the variable display game (step A608), and the process proceeds to step A609. Here, the stop display time set in steps A607 and A608 is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area in a step (not shown) provided immediately before step A609, for example.

To give an example of the display time of the special figure 2, in the case of the first embodiment, when the stop symbol pattern is a falling symbol pattern, 600 ms is set as the display time, and the stop symbol pattern is the jackpot symbol pattern. In some cases, 600 ms is set as the display time, and when the stop symbol pattern is the small hit pattern, 600 ms is set as the display time. The display time of the high-probability final fluctuation is set to 7000 ms. In the case of the first embodiment, the same design time is set for the stop design pattern, the big design pattern, the big hit design pattern, and the small hit design pattern, but different display times may be set.

Next, when the process proceeds to step A609 (FIG. 31), it is determined whether or not the current (currently running) special figure 2 variable display game is out based on the information determined and set in the jackpot flag 2 setting process. (Step A609), if it is out (Step A609; Y), Step A
If the process shifts to 624 and it is not out of alignment (step A609; N), the special figure 1 is also currently changing (
It is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed) (step A610).

It should be noted that whether or not the special figure 1 is changing is determined based on either the information of the special figure 1 game processing number area, the information of the special figure status area, or the information of the special figure 1 change control flag area. You can That is, the configuration may be such that it is determined that “1” is being saved in the special figure 1 game process number area, or that it is changing if “special figure 1 changing” is set in the special figure status area. The configuration may be used, the configuration may be determined to be changing if the changing flag is saved in the Toku-zu 1 change control flag area, or the combination may be used to make the determination.

If the special figure 1 is also changing (step A610; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 displaying process is being executed (step A611), and the special figure 1 displaying process is not being executed. In the case (step A611; N), the number of times the symbol determination frequency is output is updated by "+1" (step A).
612).

Next, when step A612 is finished and when the special figure 1 displaying process is being executed (step A611; Y), the display time of this special figure 2 (the time set in step A607 etc.) is set. For example, the result of adding 4 ms is set as the display time of Toku-zu 1 (step A61).
3), the display time of the special figure 1 is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step A6).
14). By the processing of steps A613 and A614, when the special figure 1 has already started the stop display, the display time of the special figure 1 is reset. By this resetting, the display time of Toku-zu 1 is basically extended, but it may be shortened in some cases.

After that, a command (decorative special figure 1 command including stop pattern information for special figure 1) is loaded from the decorative special figure 1 command area and prepared (step A615), and effect command setting processing (step A616) is performed. Next, a decoration special figure 1 stop command (a design stop command for special figure 1) is prepared (step A617), and an effect command setting process (step A)
618) is performed, and special figure 1 display processing transition setting processing 2 (step A619) is performed.

According to the processing of steps A609 to A619 described above, when the special figure 2 variable display game of this time in which the decorative design is stopped and displayed is a win (big hit or small hit), the special figure being changed at the same time The variable display of 1 is forcibly ended.

Next, when step A619 is completed and when the special figure 1 is not changing (step A6
10; N) loads the command from the decoration special figure 2 command area and saves it in the hit symbol command area (step A620), and determines whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game this time is a small hit (step A621). ..

If it is a big hit but not a small hit (step A621; N), in order to control the big hit game after the end of the change in the special figure 2, the information from the special figure 2 round number upper limit value information area (special figure 2
Special figure 2 Round number upper limit value information that determines the upper limit number of rounds) is loaded and saved in the round number upper limit value information area (step A622). It is saved in the mouth opening information area (step A623).

Next, if the special figure 2 variable display game this time is out (step A609; Y), if the special figure 2 variable display game this time is small hit (step A621; Y), step A6
When 23 is finished, the process proceeds to step A624. When the process moves to step A624,
Information (stop symbol number) is loaded from the special figure 2 stop symbol save area, saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol area (step A624), and the special figure 2 display processing transition setting process 1 (step A625) is performed, The special figure 2 process during change ends. In addition, special figure 2 stop symbol evacuation area, special figure 2
A predetermined stop symbol number is saved in the stop symbol setting process.

In this way, the game control device 100 constitutes stop time setting means for setting the stop time for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game. Further, when the variation display game based on the second start memory has a special result (hit), the game control device 100 serves as means for ending the variation display game based on the first start memory that is being executed at the same time.

[Special figure 1 display processing transition setting processing 1]
Next, the special figure 1 displaying process transition setting process 1 (step A in the special figure 1 changing process described above)
595) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is a view showing a flowchart of the special figure 1 display processing shift setting processing 1 of the first embodiment.

In the special figure 1 displaying process shift setting process 1, first, "2" which is the process number related to the special figure 1 displaying process is set as a process number (step A631), and the process is set in the special figure 1 game process number area. The number, that is, "2" is saved (step A632).

Next, the signal relating to the end of fluctuation of Toku-zu 1 is saved in the test signal output data area (step A633). In addition, the signal related to the end of the variation of the special symbol 1 is a signal for turning off the signal during the transition of the special symbol 1.

After that, as information for controlling the special figure 1 variable display game in the special figure 1 symbol display portion 53,
The stop flag related to the fluctuation stop in the special figure 1 symbol display portion 53 is saved in the special figure 1 change control flag area (step A634), and the special figure 1 display processing transition setting process 1 is ended.

[Special figure 2 display transition process setting process 1]
Next, the special figure 2 displaying process transition setting process 1 (step A in the special figure 2 changing process described above)
Details of (625) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special figure 2 display processing transition setting processing 1 of the first embodiment.

In the special figure 2 displaying process shift setting process 1, first, "2" which is the process number related to the special figure 2 displaying process is set as a process number (step A641), and the process is set in the special figure 2 game process number area. The number, that is, "2" is saved (step A642).

Next, the signal related to the end of fluctuation of Toku-zu 2 is saved in the test signal output data area (step A643). In addition, the signal related to the end of the special symbol 2 fluctuation is a signal for turning off the special symbol 2 fluctuation signal.

After that, as information for controlling the special figure 2 variable display game in the special figure 2 symbol display portion 54,
The stop flag related to the fluctuation stop in the special figure 2 symbol display portion 54 is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step A644), and the special figure 2 display processing transition setting process 1 is ended.

[Special figure 1 display processing transition setting processing 2]
Next, in the above-mentioned special figure 2 changing process, the special figure 1 displaying process shift setting process 2 (step A
619) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 34 is a view showing a flowchart of the special figure 1 display processing transition setting processing 2 of the first embodiment. In addition, the special figure 1 during-display process shift setting process 2 is forced to end the special figure 1 variable display game that is changing at the same time when the special figure 2 variable display game that started the change is a hit. This is a process for causing it. That is, this is a process for setting information when the other symbol is hit, and the symbol is forcibly stopped.

In the special figure 1 displaying process shift setting process 2, first, "2" which is the process number related to the special figure 1 displaying process is set as a process number (step A651), and the process is set in the special figure 1 game process number area. The number, that is, "2" is saved (step A652).

Next, the signal relating to the end of fluctuation of Toku-zu 1 is saved in the test signal output data area (step A653). In addition, the signal related to the end of the variation of the special symbol 1 is a signal for turning off the signal during the transition of the special symbol 1.

After that, as information for controlling the special figure 1 variable display game in the special figure 1 symbol display portion 53,
The stop flag related to the fluctuation stop in the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A654), and the stray stop symbol pattern is the stop symbol pattern area (the area for storing the stop symbol pattern in RWM). )) (step A655). In addition, in the special symbol 1 variable display game being executed, this stop symbol pattern area is usually already a predetermined stop symbol pattern in the special symbol 1 stop symbol setting process (depending on the extracted random number, it is a stop symbol pattern of hit). There is also a case) is saved, but here, even if the saved stop pattern pattern is a hit, it is forcibly rewritten to the stop pattern pattern. Also in subsequent steps A656 to 661 of this routine, even if there is data once set in the regular step, the data is cleared or reset for forced termination in the same way.

Next, the special figure 1 round number upper limit value information area (the area for storing special figure 1 round number upper limit value information in RWM) is cleared (step A656), and the special figure 1 special winning opening opening information area (RW
Clear the special figure 1 special winning opening opening information in M) (step A657),
The deviation information is saved in the small hit flag 1 area (step A658). The deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area (step A659). Here, the small hit flag 1 area and the big hit flag 1 area are the small hit flag area and the big hit flag area for the special figure 1, and the information on whether the special figure 1 variable display game is the small hit or not. Is an area of the RWM that stores each of the information, and information is normally set in the jackpot flag 1 setting process,
That information is reset here.

Next, the special figure 1 stop symbol evacuation area is cleared (step A660), the deviation stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol area (step A661), and the special figure 1 display processing transition setting process 2 is ended. ..

[Special figure 2 display processing transition setting processing 2]
Next, in the above-mentioned special figure 1 changing process, the special figure 2 displaying process shift setting process 2 (step A
Details of (589) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special figure 2 displaying process shift setting process 2 of the first embodiment. In addition, the special figure 2 during-display process shift setting process 2 is forced to end the special figure 2 variable display game that is changing at the same time when the special figure 1 variable display game that started the change is a hit. This is a process for causing it. That is, this is a process for setting information when the other symbol is hit, and the symbol is forcibly stopped.

In the special figure 2 displaying process shift setting process 2, first, "2" which is the process number related to the special figure 2 displaying process is set as a process number (step A671), and the process is set in the special figure 2 game process number area. The number, that is, "2" is saved (step A672).

Next, the signal relating to the end of fluctuation of Toku-zu 2 is saved in the test signal output data area (step A673). In addition, the signal related to the end of the special symbol 2 fluctuation is a signal for turning off the special symbol 2 fluctuation signal.

After that, as information for controlling the special figure 2 variable display game in the special figure 2 symbol display portion 54,
The stop flag related to the fluctuation stop in the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step A674), and the falling stop symbol pattern is the stop symbol pattern area (the area for storing the stop symbol pattern in RWM). )) (step A675). In addition, in the special symbol 2 variable display game being executed, this stop symbol pattern area is usually already a predetermined stop symbol pattern in the special symbol 2 stop symbol setting process (depending on the extracted random number, the stop symbol pattern is a hit). There is also a case) is saved, but here, even if the saved stop pattern pattern is a hit, it is forcibly rewritten to the stop pattern pattern. In subsequent steps A676 to 681 of this routine, similarly, even if there is data once set in the regular step, it is cleared or reset to be forcedly ended.

Next, the special figure 2 round number upper limit value information area (the area which stores special figure 2 round number upper limit value information in RWM) is cleared (step A676), and the special figure 2 special winning opening opening information area (RW
Clear the special figure 2 special winning opening opening information in M) (step A677),
The deviation information is saved in the small hit flag 2 area (step A678). The deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area (step A679). Here, the small hit flag 2 area and the big hit flag 2 area are the small hit flag area and the big hit flag area for the special figure 2, and the information of whether the special figure 2 variable display game is the small hit or not Is an area of the RWM that stores each of the information, and information is normally set in the jackpot flag 2 setting process,
That information is reset here.

Next, the special figure 2 stop symbol evacuation area is cleared (step A680), the deviation stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol area (step A681), and the special figure 2 display processing transition setting process 2 is ended. ..

[Processing during display of special figure 1]
Next, details of the special figure 1 displaying process (step A10) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 36 is a diagram (No. 1) showing a flowchart of the processing during display of Toku-zu 1 according to the first embodiment. FIG. 37 is a diagram (No. 2) showing the flowchart of the processing during display of Toku-zu 1 according to the first embodiment. FIG. 38 is a diagram (No. 3) showing the flowchart of the processing during display of Toku-zu 1 according to the first embodiment.

In the special figure 1 displaying process, first, the small hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 variation start process is loaded (step A701), and the information of the small hit flag 1 area of the RWM is displayed. Clear (step A702).

Next, the big hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 variation start process is loaded (step A703), and the information in the big hit flag 1 area of the RWM is cleared (step A704). Then, it is judged whether or not the loaded big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step A705), and if it is judged as a big hit (step A705; Y), the big hit of the first special figure variation display game (special figure 1 The signal related to the start of the big hit is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A706), the special figure 2 abnormal variation cancellation command is prepared (step A707), and the effect command setting process (step A708) is performed to determine the number of rounds. The upper limit value table is set (step A709). In addition, the signal regarding the start of the special figure 1 big hit, the signal that turns on the condition device operating signal, the signal that turns on the accessory continuous operation device operating signal, and the signal that turns on the special symbol 1 per signal Including.

Next, after setting the round number upper limit value table (step A709), the round number upper limit value corresponding to the round number upper limit value information (in the case of the first embodiment, for example, “16” or “
4” and others, for example, “8” and “2” may be present, and are saved in the round number upper limit value area of the RWM (step A710). Subsequently, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (step A711).

Next, the decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is loaded from the hit symbol command area of the RWM and prepared (step A712), and the effect command setting process (step A71).
Perform 3). Subsequently, prepare a fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A
714) and effect command setting processing (step A715).

Next, the special winning opening opening information and a signal corresponding to the state of the probability of being a winning result in the normal figure variation display game and the special figure variation display game are saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step A716). In the case of the first embodiment, in step A716, two jackpot signals and three jackpot signals are saved as the signals corresponding to the special winning opening opening information and the probability state. Each ON/OFF is determined by the special winning opening opening information and the state of probability. For example, the jackpot 2 signal is on for jackpots other than the 2R hit chance, on for the 2R hit jackpot with high probability, and off for the 2R hit jackpot with low probability. In addition, the big hit 3 signals are turned on for big hits other than the 2R hit probability, turned off for the 2R hit big hit in the high probability, and turned on for the 2R hit big hit in the low probability.

After that, the big hit fanfare time corresponding to the big winning opening information (for example, 5000 m
s, 4700 ms, 7700 ms, or 300 ms) (step A717)
The set jackpot fanfare time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step A718), and it is determined whether or not it is a jackpot to open the upper jackpot (special variation winning device 38) (step A719).

If it is a big hit to open the special winning opening (step A719; Y), the information in the number area of illegal winnings for special winnings is cleared (step A720), and the fraud monitoring period flag area is set in the upper special winning portion fraud monitoring period flag area. Is saved (step A721), and the process proceeds to step A724.

On the other hand, when it is not a big hit of the upper special winning opening opening (step A719; N), the information of the lower special winning opening illegal prize number area is cleared (step A722), and the lower special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area is illegally monitored. The out-of-period flag is saved (step A723), and the process proceeds to step A724.

When the process proceeds to step A724, 3 is set as the process number (step A724), the process number, ie, "3" is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (step A725), and the process transition setting process during the fanfare/interval (step) A726) is performed, and the process of displaying the special figure 1 is terminated.

On the other hand, in step A705, when the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (step A705
;N) determines whether the loaded small hit flag 1 is a small hit (step A727).
), when it is determined that the small hit flag 1 is a small hit (step A727; Y), it is determined whether or not the high-probability final fluctuation is in progress (step A728).

When it is determined in step A728 that the high-probability final fluctuation is occurring (step A
728; Y), a probability information command related to information that makes the probability of a hit result in the normal figure variation display game and the special figure variation display game a normal probability state (low probability state) is prepared (step A729). , Production command setting processing (step A730) is performed. Then, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at power failure recovery, which saves the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of power recovery (step A731), and the right-handing instruction notification flag is cleared (step A731). A732). Note that step A732 assumes a mode in which a right-handed instruction is informed in a high-probability state, and is configured to clear the right-handed instruction informing flag because the high-probability state is determined to have been determined to be a high-probability final change. It is illustrated. However, when the present embodiment is a mode in which the right-handing instruction is not issued in the high probability state, step A
732 is the configuration that has been deleted (or, in the high probability state, a left-handing instruction is informed and step A732 is performed).
Then, there may be a mode in which the left-handing instruction notification flag is cleared).

Next, when step A732 is completed and when the high-probability final fluctuation is not in progress (step A
728; N), the command is loaded from the hit symbol command area and prepared (step A
733), effect command setting processing (step A734) is performed. Continuously, a small hit fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process is prepared (step A735), and effect command setting process (step A736). Then, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is a predetermined state to be left-handed (for example, the normal power support state, the big hit or the special mode) (step A737).

When it is determined in step A737 that the player is in the predetermined state in which left-handedness is required (step A73
7; Y), the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step A738). The signal related to the left-handed instruction is, for example, a signal that turns off the firing position designation signal 1. Next, in order to turn off the indicator LED which is hitting right, the game state display number 2
The number in the left-handed state is saved in the area (step A739), and the process proceeds to step A742.

On the other hand, if it is not determined that the predetermined state for left-handed stroke is reached (step A737; N), the signal relating to right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step A740).
). The signal relating to the right-handing instruction is, for example, a signal that turns on the firing position designation signal 1. Next, in order to turn on the right-handed display LED, the right-handed state number is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A741), and the process proceeds to step A742.

When the process proceeds to step A742, it is determined whether or not it is a small hit that opens the upper special winning opening (special variation winning device 38) (step A742). If it is a small win for opening the upper special winning opening (step A742; Y), the information of the upper special winning opening illegal prize number area is cleared (step A743).
Save the flag outside the fraud monitoring period in the fraud monitoring period flag area of the upper special winning opening (step A7
44), and proceeds to step A747.

On the other hand, when it is not the small hit of opening the upper special winning opening (step A742; N), the information of the lower special winning opening illegal prize number area is cleared (step A745), and the lower special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area is illegal. The flag outside the monitoring period is saved (step A746), and the process proceeds to step A747.

When the process moves to step A747, the process for setting the special figure 1 small hit fanfare process transition process (step A747) is performed, and the process for displaying the special figure 1 ends. In addition, in the special figure 1 small hit fanfare mid-process shift setting processing, a processing of saving "7" as a processing number in the special figure 1 game processing number area, and a small hit fanfare time (eg, 4 in the special figure 1 game processing timer area).
m) is saved.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step A727 that the small hit flag 1 is not the small hit (step A727; N), it is determined whether or not the high-probability final variation is in progress (step A748).
When it is determined in step A748 that the high-probability final fluctuation is in progress (step A
In 748; Y), a probability information command related to information that makes the probability of a hit result in the normal figure variation display game and the special figure variation display game a normal probability state (low probability state) is prepared (step A749). , Production command setting processing (step A750) is performed. Next, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at power failure recovery that saves the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of power recovery (step A751), and the right-handing instruction notification flag is cleared (step A751). A752), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is in the middle of a hit (during a big hit or a small hit) (step A753). It should be noted that step A752 is just an example assuming a mode in which the right-handing instruction is issued in the high probability state, as in step A732 described above.

Next, when it is determined that the special figure 2 variable display game is not hit (step A753; N)
In order to save the signal related to the left-handing instruction (the firing position designation signal 1 is turned off) in the test signal output data area (step A754) and turn off the display LED during right-handing, the game state display number 2 area is left. The number being hit is saved (step A755). In the present embodiment, when the special figure 2 variable display game is in the middle of a hit (during a big hit or a small hit), the upper special winning opening (special variable winning device 38) which is opened at that time is aimed at the right. When the special figure 2 is hitting (step A753; Y), steps A754 and A are performed because hitting is required.
After passing 755, the process proceeds to step A756. Also, when step A755 ends, the process moves to step A756.

Then, when the process moves to step A756, the special map 1 in the special map status area in the RWM is displayed.
The information indicating that it is changing (the special display 1 variable display game is being executed) is cleared (information subtraction) (step A756), and the process number related to the special FIG.
Is saved (step A757), and the process of displaying the special map 1 ends. Note that step A75
When 6 is executed, the special figure status is in a state in which only the special figure 2 is changing or neither the special figure 1 nor the special figure 2 is changing.

[Processing during display of special figure 2]
Next, details of the special figure 2 displaying process (step A50) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 game process will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 39 is a diagram (No. 1) showing a flowchart of the processing during display of the special figure 2 according to the first embodiment. FIG. 40 is a view (No. 2) showing the flowchart of the processing during display of the special figure 2 according to the first embodiment. FIG. 41 is a view (No. 3) showing the flowchart of the processing during display of the special figure 2 according to the first embodiment.

In the special figure 2 displaying process, first, the small hit flag 2 set in the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 variation start process is loaded (step A761), and the information of the small hit flag 2 area of the RWM is displayed. Clear (step A762).

Next, the big hit flag 2 set in the big hit flag 2 setting processing in the special figure 2 variation start processing is loaded (step A763), and the information in the big hit flag 2 area of the RWM is cleared (step A764). Then, it is judged whether or not the loaded big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step A765), and if it is judged as a big hit (step A765; Y), the big hit of the second special figure variation display game (special figure 2 Save the signal about the start of the big hit) to the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A766), prepare the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation cancellation command (step A767), perform the effect command setting process (step A768), and set the number of rounds. The upper limit value table is set (step A769). In addition, the signal regarding the start of the special figure 2 big hit, the signal which turns on the condition device operating signal, the signal which turns on the accessory continuous operation device operating signal, and the signal which turns on the special symbol 2 hit signal Including.

Next, after setting the round number upper limit value table (step A769), the round number upper limit value corresponding to the round number upper limit value information (in the case of the first embodiment, for example, "16" or "
4” and others, for example, “8” and “2” may be present) are acquired and saved in the RWM round number upper limit value area (step A770). Subsequently, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (step A771).

Next, a decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is loaded from the hit special figure command area of the RWM, prepared (step A772), and effect command setting processing (step A77).
Perform 3). Subsequently, prepare a fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A
774) and effect command setting processing (step A775) is performed.

Next, the special winning opening opening information and a signal corresponding to the state of the probability of being a winning result in the general figure variation display game and the special figure variation display game are saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step A776). In the case of the first embodiment, in step A776, two big hit signals and three big hit signals are saved as the signals corresponding to the special winning opening opening information and the probability state. Each ON/OFF is determined by the special winning opening opening information and the state of probability. For example, the jackpot 2 signal is on for jackpots other than the 2R hit chance, on for the 2R hit jackpot with high probability, and off for the 2R hit jackpot with low probability. In addition, the big hit 3 signals are turned on for big hits other than the 2R hit probability, turned off for the 2R hit big hit in the high probability, and turned on for the 2R hit big hit in the low probability.

After that, the big hit fanfare time corresponding to the big winning opening information (for example, 5000 m
s, 4700 ms, 7700 ms, or 300 ms) (step A777)
The set jackpot fanfare time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step A778), and it is determined whether or not it is a jackpot for opening the special jackpot (special variation winning device 38) (step A779).

If it is a big hit for opening the special winning opening (step A779; Y), the information in the number area for illegal winnings of special winning opening is cleared (step A780), and the fraud monitoring period flag area is set in the upper special winning portion fraud monitoring period flag area. Is saved (step A781), and the process proceeds to step A784.

On the other hand, when it is not a big hit for opening the upper special winning opening (step A779; N), the information in the lower special winning opening illegal prize number area is cleared (step A782), and the lower special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area is illegally monitored. The out-of-period flag is saved (step A783), and the process proceeds to step A784.

When the process proceeds to step A784, 3 is set as the process number (step A784), the process number, that is, "3" is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step A785), and the fanfare/interval interval process transition setting process (step A786) is performed, and the process of displaying special figure 2 is terminated.

On the other hand, in step A765, if the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (step A765
;N) determines whether or not the loaded small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step A787).
), if it is determined that the small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step A787; Y), it is determined whether or not the high-probability final fluctuation is in progress (step A788).

When it is determined in step A788 that the high-probability final fluctuation is occurring (step A)
788; Y), a probability information command related to the information that makes the probability of a hit result in the normal figure variation display game and the special figure variation display game the normal probability state (low probability state) is prepared (step A789). , Production command setting processing (step A790) is performed. Next, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at power failure recovery, which saves the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (step A791), and the right-handing instruction notification flag is cleared (step A791). A792). Note that step A792 assumes a mode in which the right-handing instruction notification is made in the high-probability state, and is configured to clear the right-handing instruction notification flag because the high-probability state is determined to be a high-probability final change and has ended. It is illustrated. However, when the present embodiment is a mode in which the right-handing instruction is not issued in the high probability state, step A
792 is the configuration that has been deleted (or, in the high probability state, the left-handing instruction is informed and step A792
Then, there may be a mode in which the left-handing instruction notification flag is cleared).

Next, when step A792 is completed and when the high-probability final fluctuation is not in progress (step A
788;N), commands are loaded from the hit symbol command area and prepared (step A).
793) and effect command setting processing (step A794). Subsequently, a small hit fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is prepared (step A795), and the effect command setting process (step A796) Then, it is determined whether or not the game state is a predetermined state that should be left-handed (for example, the normal power support state, the big hit or the special mode) (step A797).

When it is determined in step A797 that the predetermined state for left-handed stroke is reached (step A79)
7; Y), the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step A798). The signal related to the left-handed instruction is, for example, a signal that turns off the firing position designation signal 1. Next, in order to turn off the indicator LED which is hitting right, the game state display number 2
The number in the left-handed state is saved in the area (step A799), and the process proceeds to step A802.

On the other hand, when it is not determined that the predetermined state for left-handed stroke is reached (step A797; N), the signal for right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step A800).
). The signal relating to the right-handing instruction is, for example, a signal that turns on the firing position designation signal 1. Next, in order to turn on the right-handed display LED, the right-handed state number is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A801), and the process proceeds to step A802.

When the process moves to step A802, it is determined whether or not it is a small hit that opens the upper special winning opening (special variation winning device 38) (step A802). If it is a small hit of opening the upper special winning opening (step A802; Y), the information in the area of the number of illegal upper special winning openings is cleared (step A803).
, Save the flag outside the fraud monitoring period in the fraud monitoring period flag area of the upper special winning opening (step A8
04), and proceeds to step A807.

On the other hand, if it is not a small hit to open the upper special winning opening (step A802; N), the information in the lower special winning opening fraudulent winning number area is cleared (step A805), and the lower special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area is fraudulent. The flag outside the monitoring period is saved (step A806), and the process proceeds to step A807.

When the process moves to step A807, the special figure 2 small hitting fanfare processing transition setting processing (step A807) is performed, and the special figure 2 displaying processing ends. In the special figure 2 small hit small fanfare processing transition setting process, a process of saving "7" as a process number in the special figure 2 game process number area, and a small hit fanfare time (eg, 4 in the special figure 2 game process timer area).
m) is saved.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step A787 that the small hit flag 2 is not the small hit (step A787; N), it is determined whether or not the high-probability final fluctuation is in progress (step A808).
When it is determined in step A808 that the high-probability final fluctuation is occurring (step A
In 808; Y), a probability information command related to information that makes the probability of a hit result in the normal figure variation display game and the special figure variation display game a normal probability state (low probability state) is prepared (step A809). , Production command setting processing (step A810) is performed. Subsequently, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at power failure recovery for saving the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (step A811), and the right-handing instruction notification flag is cleared (step A811). (A812), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit (
Step A813). It should be noted that step A 812 is just an example that assumes a mode in which a right-handing instruction is issued in a high probability state, as in step A 792 described above.

Next, when it is determined that the special figure 1 variable display game is not a big hit (step A813; N
), the signal related to the left-handed instruction (the firing position designation signal 1 is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A814), and the display LED during the right-handed operation is turned off. The number in the left-handed state is saved (step A815). In addition, in the present embodiment, when the special figure 1 variable display game is in the midst of a big hit, it is in a state where a right-handed hit is aimed at the upper special winning opening (special variable winning device 38) that is opened at that time. When Toku-zu 1 is in the midst of a big hit (step A813; Y), steps A814 and A815 are passed and the process moves to step A816. Further, in the present embodiment, when the special figure 1 variable display game is in the middle of a small hit, it is in a state in which the player should hit the leftward by aiming at the lower special winning opening (special variable winning device 95). If the special figure 1 is not in the big hit (step A813; N) (including the case where the special figure 1 is in the small hit), steps A814 and A815 are executed and then step A81 is executed.
Go to 6. However, the processing content regarding such right-handed and left-handedness varies depending on the board configuration of the gaming machine and the game nature, and is merely an example. Again, step A815
When the process is completed, the process proceeds to step A816.

Then, when the process proceeds to step A816, the special map 2 of the special map status area in the RWM is displayed.
The information indicating that the change is in progress (the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed) is cleared (information subtraction) (step A816), and the process number related to the special figure 2 normal process is set in the special figure 2 game process number area, that is, "0".
Is saved (step A817), and the process of displaying the special figure 2 ends. Note that step A81
When 6 is executed, the special figure status is either a state in which only the special figure 1 is changing or a state in which neither the special figure 1 nor the special figure 2 is changing.

[External information editing process]
Next, details of the external information editing process (step S134) in the above timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 and 43. FIG. 42 is a diagram (No. 1) showing a flowchart of the external information editing process according to the first embodiment. FIG. 43 is a view (No. 2) showing the flowchart of the external information editing process according to the first embodiment.

In the external information editing process, the payout command transmission process (step S125), the winning opening switch/state monitoring process (step S128), the magnet fraud monitoring process (step S132), and the board radio fraud monitoring process (step S133) are used as the monitoring results. On the basis of the above, a process of creating information to be output to an external device such as an information collecting terminal, an amusement hall internal management device, or a test shooting test device and setting the information in an output buffer is performed.

In the external information editing process, first, a process of setting information according to an error state or a security state is performed. In the process of setting the information according to the error status and the security status, when the glass frame opening error is occurring (step C71; Y) and the main body frame opening error is occurring (step C72; Y), the door/frame is opened. The ON data of the release signal is saved in the external information output data area (step C73), and the ON data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step C74). That is, the occurrence of the glass frame opening error and the body frame opening error are output as external information and a test signal.

On the other hand, if neither the glass frame opening error nor the body frame opening error has occurred (steps C71 to C72; N), the OFF data of the door/frame opening signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S71). C75), the off-data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step C76).

Next, a security signal control timer for measuring a predetermined time (for example, 256 ms) from the time when the data stored in the RAM is initialized by operating the initialization switch or the like is set to "0".
If not, "-1" is updated (step C77). The minimum value of the security signal control timer is set to "0". Then, the value of the security signal control timer is "0".
Or not (step C78).

When the value of the security signal control timer is not "0" (step C78; N), that is, when the time has not expired, the ON data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step C79). On the other hand, the value of the security signal control timer is "0"
In the case of (step C78; Y), that is, when the time is up, step C79
The process of is passed. That is, from the time when the data stored in the RAM is initialized in the above-described main process and the initial value (for example, 256 ms) is saved in the security signal control timer until the security signal control timer times out. ON data of the security signal is output as external information.

Next, a magnet is being illegally generated (step C80; Y) and a board radio wave is being generated (step C81;
Y), fraudulent radio wave occurrence (step C82; Y), fraudulent winning hole occurrence (step C83)
;)), or when the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation is occurring (step C84; Y), the ON data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step C85), and the ON data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved. The data is saved in the test signal output data area (step C86). In addition, even in the case where the illegal call is occurring, similarly, the ON data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step C85), and the ON data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area. (Step C86) The configuration may be adopted.

On the other hand, if none of the magnet fraud, board radio fraud, frame radio fraud, universal telephone fraud, special winning opening fraud, or special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation has occurred (steps C80 to C84; N), switch abnormality 1 or It is determined whether a switch abnormality of switch abnormality 2 is occurring (step C87).
If no switch abnormality is occurring (step C87; N), the off data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step C88).

If any switch abnormality is occurring (step C87; Y), the ON data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step C8).
6). Here, the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation, switch abnormality, and the like are abnormalities monitored by the winning opening switch/state monitoring processing in the timer interrupt processing.

Next, after completion of step C86 or C88, in the external information editing process, the starting opening 1 (
The winning opening 1 signal editing process (step C89) for editing the winning signal (starting opening 1 signal) of the starting winning opening 36, which is the starting winning opening of FIG. A starting opening 2 signal editing process (step C90) for editing the winning signal (starting opening 2 signal) of the starting winning opening 92) which is the starting winning opening of FIG. 2 is performed. Then, the main prize ball signal editing process (step C91) for editing the main prize ball signal relating to the number of prize balls to be paid out is performed, and the symbol decision number signal is output based on the symbol decision number output number (symbol decision number signal output number). The symbol determination frequency signal editing process (step C92) for editing is performed, and the external information editing process is ended.

[Main processing]
Next, the main processing of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 44 is a view showing a flowchart of main processing in the effect control device of the first embodiment.

The main process is a process executed by the control unit (CPU 311) of the effect control device 300 when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started.
[Step D11] The control unit prohibits interruption.

[Step D12] The controller initializes the CPU 311.
[Step D13] The control unit initializes the VDP 312.
[Step D14] The control unit permits interruption.

[Step D15] The control unit permits generation of display data. That is, the control unit
A display circuit (not shown) in the DP 312 accesses a VRAM (not shown) in the VDP 312 and permits display data to be generated.

[Step D16] The control unit sets a random number seed. This is a process of setting a pseudo random number generation sequence using, for example, a srand function. Here, the control unit may use a fixed value such as 0 (zero) as an argument given to the srand function, or use a value created based on the ID value of the CPU or the like so as to be different for each gaming machine. You may.

[Step D17] The control unit controls the RWM of the effect control device 300 (for example, the RAM 322).
The initial value at power-on is saved in an area to be initialized (for example, a production flag area (a storage area used as various flags described later in the control process of the production control device 300)).

[Step D18] The control unit clears the WDT (watchdog timer).
[Step D19] The control unit executes effect button input processing. The effect button input process is a process of performing editing when the effect buttons (the selection button switch 25a and the determination button switch 25b) are operated when enabled. Since the effect button does not turn on and off at high speed, the control unit may perform the process of sensing the input of the effect button within the effect button input process or within a short-period timer interrupt (not shown). Good.

[Step D20] The control unit executes the hall/player setting mode process. The hall/player setting mode process is performed by setting the changeable range of the brightness and volume of the LED and the display device 41,
This is a process of accepting operations such as changing the brightness and volume of the LEDs and the display device 41 by the player.

[Step D21] The control unit executes a random number update process. The random number update process is performed by, for example, r
In this process, the pseudo random number is updated at least once every control cycle of the main process using the and function. Since the rand function generates a random number based on the designated generation sequence each time recalculation is performed, the control unit can obtain the random number only by executing the rand function. Note that a counter that increments by "1" like the main board (game control device 100) may be used as the random number.

[Step D22] The control unit executes received command check processing. The received command check processing will be described later with reference to FIG.
[Step D23] The control unit executes effect display edit processing. The effect display editing process is V
This is a process of setting various commands and their parameters for instructing the DP 312 of the drawing content on the display device 41. For example, the control unit sets the commands in a table in the effect display editing process.

[Step D24] The control unit executes the drawing command preparation end setting. The drawing command preparation end setting is a process of setting that preparation of all commands to the VDP 312 set in the effect display editing process is completed.

[Step D25] The control unit determines whether or not it is the frame switching timing, the process proceeds to Step D26 if the frame switching timing, and waits for the frame switching timing if it is not the frame switching timing. Here, the frame switching timing is V blank interrupt (
It is a timing that arrives at a time interval corresponding to a processing cycle (for example, 1/30 seconds≈33.333 ms) created based on a cycle of V sync interrupt (for example, 1/60 seconds). The V blank interrupt is generated each time the VDP 312 completes one scan of the entire screen for drawing. The generation period of this V blank interrupt is, for example, 1/60 second as described above. In the case of this embodiment, when the same drawing is repeated twice and V blank interrupts occur twice, frame switching is performed, and the cycle of frame switching timing is twice the cycle of V blank interrupts (for example, 1/60 seconds). (For example, 1/30 second ≈ 33.33 ms
)become. However, the frame switching timing is not limited to this mode, and the frame switching timing can be arbitrarily changed as appropriate. For example, frame switching (image updating) may be performed at a cycle of 1/30 second or more, or less than 1/30 second. Frame switching may be performed in a cycle.

Depending on the frame switching timing determination processing, subsequent processing (steps D26 to D30 and subsequent steps D18 to D24) is executed at the frame switching timing in each processing cycle. Note that the time management that needs to be synchronized with the effect contents is performed on a frame-by-frame basis (that is, on a processing cycle basis). When the processing cycle is 1/30 second, it becomes 100 ms in three frames, for example. This is the same as the main board (game control device) managing the time value in units of 4 ms of the timer interrupt period.

[Step D26] The control unit follows VDP3 according to the command set in step D23.
12 is instructed to draw a screen. For example, the control unit sequentially transmits commands set in a table to instruct the VDP 312 to draw a screen.

[Step D27] The control unit executes a sound control process. The sound control process is a process relating to volume control of sound from the speakers (upper speaker 19a, lower speaker 19b).

[Step D28] The control unit executes a decoration control process. The decoration control process is a process of controlling various LEDs and the like of the board decoration device 46, the frame decoration device 18, and the like.
[Step D29] The control unit executes a movable body control process. The movable body control process is a process of controlling a movable body (for example, the board effect device 44) including various motors and SOLs (solenoids).

[Step D30] The control unit executes a firing information control process. The launch information control process sets launch-related information based on the launch state flag, and effects according to the special figure rotation state (the number of special figure changes per game for a predetermined amount of money (that is, a predetermined number of lent balls)) This is a process for performing mode correction.

After executing Step D30, the control unit returns to Step D18, and thereafter, Step D1.
The processing from 8 to step D30 is repeatedly executed. That is, steps D18 to D
30 is a loop process (repeatedly executed in the above processing cycle after the effect control device 300 is activated (
In some cases, it is called the main loop processing).

Note that the control unit executes the processes of steps D27 to D29 in the main loop process in order to match the effect on the screen. However, the signals and data (especially various LEDs and motors) generated or set by these control processes are executed. The process of actually outputting a signal for controlling driving, etc.) to the port is performed in a timer interrupt (not shown) of a short cycle. However, when an IC specialized for controlling various devices is used, there is a case in which a signal or the like is not output by a timer interrupt simply by instructing by serial communication or the like.

[Reception command check processing]
Next, the received command check process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 45 is a diagram showing a flowchart of received command check processing in the effect control device of the first embodiment. The received command check process is a process executed by the control unit in step D22 of the main process.

In addition, the received command (effect command) is MODE data (1 byte) and ACTIO
It has a configuration including N data (1 byte), and effect commands are sequentially transmitted from the game control device (main board) 100 to the effect control device 300. Hereinafter, such data forming the command will be referred to as command data or command data.

In addition, the command reception process from the main board is the "command reception interrupt process" (not shown).
It is done by. That is, in the serial communication of this example, hardware (automatically, by the function of the CPU) automatically transmits and receives, and when reception of the command is completed, an interrupt (command reception interrupt) occurs and informs the serial reception. Although it is only necessary to retrieve from the buffer, in the above "command reception interrupt processing", each time there is a command reception interrupt, a command is loaded from the serial reception buffer, and the loaded command data is checked for any abnormalities before the command Data (MODE and ACTION data) is stored in the command buffer, and the value of the command reception counter is increased by "1" by the stored amount. In the description of the control process, the term “storing” simply means readable and storable in a predetermined storage area for use in subsequent control processes (same below). The command buffer is, for example, a ring buffer. This command buffer is configured by a storage area in the RAM 311a (or the RAM 322) of the CPU 311, for example. The capacity of the command buffer may be equal to or larger than the number of commands that may be transmitted from the main board in the system control cycle (the above-mentioned processing cycle; for example, 1/30 second).

[Step D41] The control unit loads the value of the command reception counter as the command reception number. The command reception counter is RWM (RAM322 or RAM311a).
Is set to. In principle, the command reception counter is cleared to "0" in step D43, and therefore stores the number of commands received during one frame (1/30 second) (one cycle of the above-described processing cycle).

[Step D42] The control unit determines whether the command reception number is not “0 (zero)”, and if the command reception number is not “0”, the process proceeds to step D43, and the command reception number is “0”. If so, the received command check processing ends. In the present application, as in step D41, “loading” data in the control process means RAM (the effect control device 300 of this example).
Means to retrieve data from the RAM 322 or RAM 311a).

[Step D43] The control unit subtracts the content of the command reception counter area (that is, the value of the command reception counter) by the number of command receptions.
If A: command reception counter value and B: command reception number, step D41
Immediately after the execution of, “A=B”. Immediately after the execution of step D43, “A=A−B=
It is a normal movement to be “0”, but in the mode of this example, the effect control device 300 is the game control device (
Since the command reception interrupt from the (main board) 100 is given the highest priority without being disabled, the value of A may increase between the processing of step D41 and the processing of step D43. Therefore, if the process of step D43 is set to "A←0" (that is, the process of setting the value of the command reception counter to zero), the command count will shift, so step D43.
Then, the subtraction process "AB" is performed. However, when serial communication is used for transmitting and receiving a command from the main board as in this embodiment, the value of A is prevented from increasing during the processing of step D41 to the processing of step D153 by disabling interrupts. Then, the processing content of step D43 may be "A←0".

[Step D44] The control unit controls the content of the received command buffer (corresponding to the command buffer, which may be simply referred to as the command buffer hereinafter) (that is, the command data stored at the address corresponding to the read pointer of the command buffer). Copy to the command area (sometimes called the command storage area). The command area is a storage area in the RAM 322 or the RAM 311a, for example, and is a so-called FIFO (first in, first out) buffer.

[Step D45] Since the control unit has read the data in the command buffer, the control unit updates the value of the command read index, which is the read pointer of the command buffer, by increasing it by "1" in the range of "0" to "31", for example. Do it. In addition, "0" to "31" here
The range of corresponds to the capacity of the command buffer (for example, “32”).

[Step D46] The control unit determines whether or not the commands for the number of received commands have been completely copied (
That is, it is determined whether step D44 and step D45 have been repeatedly executed for the number of command receptions). The control unit proceeds to step D47 when the copying of the commands for the number of received commands is completed, and proceeds to step D44 when the copying is not completed.

[Step D47] The control unit loads (ie, reads) the contents of the command area (the first stored data among the unread data in the command area, that is, the data to be read next). To do.

[Step D48] The control unit executes received command analysis processing. The received command analysis process is a process of analyzing the data of the loaded command (hereinafter referred to as the current command). The received command analysis processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Step D49] The control unit updates the address of the command area (the address of the data to be read next).
[Step D50] The control unit determines whether or not the commands for the number of received commands have been analyzed (that is, whether or not steps D47 to D49 have been repeatedly executed for the number of received commands). The control unit proceeds to step D47 when the analysis of the commands for the number of received commands is not completed, and ends the received command check processing when the analysis is completed.

[Reception command analysis processing]
Next, the received command analysis process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 46 is a view showing a flowchart of received command analysis processing in the effect control device of the first embodiment. The received command analysis process is a process executed by the control unit in step D48 of the received command check process.

[Step D51] The control unit sets MODE to the upper byte and ACT to the lower byte of the data of the command this time loaded in Step D47 of the received command check processing.
Separate and store in each. In the case of a fluctuation type command that commands the fluctuation pattern of the special figure, the upper byte data stored as MODE commands the first half fluctuation pattern, and AC
The lower byte data stored as T commands the latter half variation pattern.

[Step D52] The control unit determines whether or not the MODE value separated in step D51 is within the normal range. If the MODE value is within the normal range, the control unit proceeds to step D53.
Then, if the MODE value is not within the normal range, the received command analysis process ends. In addition,
Some MODE values are not defined and are not used. When such MODE values are not used, it is determined in step D52 that the value is not within the normal range.

[Step D53] The control unit determines whether or not the ACT value separated in step D51 is within the normal range. The control unit proceeds to step D54 when the ACT value is within the normal range, and ends the received command analysis processing when the ACT value is outside the normal range.

The determination in step D53 as to whether or not the ACT value separated in step D51 is within the normal range is performed as follows, for example. That is, the effective ACT value differs for each MODE, and the upper and lower limits of the effective ACT value are determined by a predetermined ACTION check table (
It is defined in (not shown), and in step D53, it is checked whether the separated ACT values fall within the upper limit range and the lower limit range. I have not been able to check for omissions).

[Step D54] The control unit determines whether or not the separated ACT value and the separated MODE value are a correct combination. The control unit proceeds to step D55 when the ACT value is the correct combination, and ends the received command analysis processing when the ACT value is not the correct combination. The determination as to whether or not the ACT values are the correct combination can be made using, for example, a match check table. The match check table is a table in which all valid ACT values (ACTION values) for the MODE value are registered in order from the head address, and is provided for each MODE value. Then, if there is a separated ACT value in this match check table corresponding to the MODE value, it can be determined that the combination is correct, and if there is no separated ACT value in the match check table, it is correct. It can be determined that it is not a combination.

The determination as to whether or not the ACT values are the correct combination is performed by including the missing tooth check as to whether or not the ACT values are the normal ACT combination. There are multiple valid ACTs for one MODE, but their values are not necessarily continuous (that is, there are values that do not exist discontinuously and values that are missing teeth), so the command Is being compared and confirmed whether is a valid value. Then, since only valid values are defined in the match check table, it is confirmed by comparing each of them with any one of them.

[Step D55] The control unit determines whether or not the MODE data is within the variable system command range. The control unit executes the variable system command processing (details omitted) when the MODE value is within the variable system command range (step D56), and proceeds to step D57 when the MODE data is not within the variable system command range. ..

Here, the MODE data is the MODE data separated and stored in step D51 (the same applies to step D57 described later). Further, the variation system command (also sometimes referred to as variation command or variation pattern command) is a command for instructing the variation pattern of the special figure, and the range of data of this variation command is the variation system command range.

[Step D57] The control unit determines whether or not the MODE data is within the jackpot system command range. The control unit executes the big hit system command processing (details omitted) when the MODE data is within the big hit system command range (step D58), and proceeds to step D59 when the MODE data is not within the big hit system command range. .. The big hit system command is a command for instructing an operation (display of a fanfare screen or a round screen, etc.) related to a big hit medium production, and the range of data of the big hit system command is the big hit system command range.

[Step D59] The control unit determines whether the MODE data is within the symbol-based command range. The control unit executes the symbol-based command processing (details omitted) when the value of MODE is within the symbol-based command range (step D60), and proceeds to step D61 when the MODE data is not within the symbol-based command range. .. Design-related commands (also sometimes referred to as design commands or decorative special drawing commands) are commands for instructing information about special design designs (for example, what to do with the special design stop design, etc.), and this design command The range of data that can be taken is the symbol type command range.

[Step D61] The control unit determines whether or not the MODE data is within the single-shot system command range. The control unit executes the single-shot system command process (details omitted) when the value of MODE is within the single-shot system command range (step D62), and proceeds to step D63 when the MODE data is not within the single-shot system command range. .. It should be noted that, unlike commands that make sense by combining commands such as symbol commands and variable commands, commands that stand alone are called single-shot commands. Single-shot commands (sometimes called single-shot commands) include customer-waiting demo commands, hold number commands, symbol stop commands, probability information-related commands, error/illegal commands, and model designation commands. The range that can be taken by the data of this single-shot command is the single-shot command range.

[Step D63] The control unit determines whether the MODE data is within the prefetch symbol system command range. The control unit executes the prefetch symbol system command process (details omitted) when the MODE data is within the prefetch symbol system command range (step D64), and when the MODE data is not within the prefetch symbol system command range Proceed to D65.

[Step D65] The control unit determines whether or not the MODE data is within the prefetch variation system command range. The control unit executes the read-ahead variable system command processing (details omitted) when the MODE data is within the read-ahead variable system command range (step D66), and is received when the MODE data is not within the read-ahead variable system command range. The command analysis process ends.

The look-ahead symbol system command and the look-ahead variation system command are commands for a look-ahead effect. When any one of steps D56, D58, D60, D62, D64, and D66 ends, the received command analysis process ends.

Here, the look-ahead effect (also referred to as a look-ahead notice or a look-ahead notice effect) is a start winning memory (a starting winning memory is held or simply held) for which the variable display game of the special figure is not executed.
In order to notify the player in advance with a certain degree of reliability whether or not the variation display game corresponding to will be a big hit (or what variation pattern) will be displayed, such as a pending display of the starting prize winning memory. It is an effect such as being performed in a manner different from usual. And the pre-reading system command (pre-reading variation system command, and pre-reading pattern system command) is the command which gives advance notice of the variation pattern and the stop pattern corresponding to the hold of the starting winning prize memory that is the target of the pre-reading effect, and the game at the time of starting winning. It is transmitted from the control device 100 to the effect control device 300. Note that normal variable-based commands and symbol-based commands that are not prefetched are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 at the start of variable display.

[Second Embodiment]
In the second embodiment, the gaming machine 10 includes a sub-display device (movable accessory) whose position can be switched (movable), and performs a display effect using the sub-display device.

First, the sub display device of the gaming machine 10 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 and 48. FIG. 47 is a front view showing an example of the game board of the game machine of the second embodiment. Fig. 48
FIG. 6 is a diagram showing an example of a sub display device according to a second embodiment.

As shown in FIGS. 47A and 47B, the game board 500 includes a display device 41 and a board effect device 44.
A (movable accessory) and a sub display device 501 (movable accessory) are provided.
The sub display device 501 has a position (first position) shown in FIG. 47(1) or FIG.
It is possible to switch to a position (second position) shown in FIG. The second position is closer to the center of the display device 41 than the first position. That is, the visibility of the sub display device 501 at the second position is higher than the visibility of the sub display device 501 at the first position. The sub display device 501 is provided on the front side (player side) of the display device 41 (main display device).

The sub display device 501 includes a display unit 501a, a display unit 501b, a display unit 501c, and a display unit 5.
01d, five 7-segment LEDs of the display unit 501e, and a movable mechanism 501f.

The movable mechanism 501f is in charge of movement (movable switching) of the position of the sub display device 501. The movable mechanism 501f includes a motor or the like (not shown), and the sub display device 5 is driven by driving the motor or the like.
The position of 01 is switched.

The movable mechanism 501f is not limited to the first position and the second position, and the movable mechanism 501f can switch the position of the sub display device 501 to another position (for example, a position between the first position and the second position). it can. For example, the movable mechanism 501f is not limited to movably switching the sub-display device 501 to the vertically displaced position, but can also be movably switched to the horizontally displaced position.

Further, the movable mechanism 501f is not limited to the movable switching of the position of the sub display device 501, but can also perform the movable switching of the tilt. For example, the movable mechanism 501f can tilt the sub display device 501 in a direction in which the right side inclines upward (the left side in the downward direction), and the sub display device 501 in a direction in which the upper part inclines toward the front side (the lower part toward the rear side). You can also lean to. In the gaming machine 10, it is preferable to movably switch the sub display device 501 to a position that does not impair the visibility of a small symbol group, a special figure 1 reserved number display, and a special figure 2 reserved number display, which will be described later.

Note that the display unit 501a to the display unit 501e are electrically connected to the effect control device 300, and the display unit 501a to the display unit 501e are controlled by the effect control device 300. The effect control device 300 sends a control signal from the display unit 501a to the display unit 501e to the sub-display device 501.
Output to.

The motor of the movable mechanism 501f and the effect control device 300 are electrically connected, and the movable mechanism 501f is controlled by the effect control device 300. The effect control device 300 outputs the control signal of the movable mechanism 501f to the sub display device 501.

Next, the configuration of the display screen in the display device 41 of the second embodiment will be described. Figure 49
FIG. 8 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of the display device of the second embodiment.
The display screen 502 shown in FIG. 49(1) is the display content of the display device 41 when the variable display game is changing the symbols and the sub display device 501 is at the first position.

The display screen 502 includes two sets of decorative symbols, a special figure 1 hold number display 505, a special figure 2 hold number display 506, a hold display 507, and a hold exhaustion display 508 in the display content.
The two sets of decorative designs include a large design group 503 as a first decorative design and a small design group 504 as a second decorative design. The large symbol group 503 is in charge of game production for the purpose of improving interest. Therefore, the large symbol group 503 is displayed large in the approximate center of the display device 41. Large pattern group 503
Includes a left symbol 503L, a middle symbol 503C, and a right symbol 503R. The left symbol 503L, the middle symbol 503C, and the right symbol 503R on the display screen 502 all indicate that the corresponding special figure variation display game is in the symbol variation state.

Generally, the large symbol group 503 starts changing in the order of the left symbol 503L, the right symbol 503R, and the middle symbol 503C, and stops (including temporary stop) in the order of the left symbol 503L, the right symbol 503R, and the middle symbol 503C. Therefore, in many cases, the large symbol group 503 forms a reach mode with the left symbol 503L and the right symbol 503R, and waits for the middle symbol 503C to stop, so that a big hit mode can be formed.

Designs constituting the large design group 503 (left design 503L, middle design 503C and right design 503R)
Is mainly based on highly decorative decorative patterns.
The small symbol group 504 is in charge of notification of the variable display state for the purpose of improving the ease of grasping the game state of the player. Therefore, the small symbol group 504 is a peripheral portion of the display device 41 (when the sub display device 501 is at either the first position or the second position) so as to ensure the visibility without disturbing the display effect by the large symbol group 503. Even if it does not overlap), it is displayed small. Small pattern group 5
04 includes a left symbol, a middle symbol, and a right symbol. The left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol in the small symbol group 504 of the display screen 502 indicate that the corresponding special symbol variation display game is in the symbol variation state.

In general, the large symbol group 503 is displayed larger than the small symbol group 504, the degree of freedom of the display position is high, and the display mode can be greatly changed. On the contrary, the small symbol group 504,
Compared with the large symbol group 503, it is displayed in a small size, and the degree of freedom of the display position is low (for example, position fixing).

As a result, the gaming machine 10 can ensure the visibility of the small symbol group 504 while ensuring the variety of display effects for the large symbol group 503, and can facilitate the player's understanding of the game state.

The special figure 1 reserved number display 505 displays the reserved memory number (starting memory number) of the special figure 1 game. For example, the pending storage of the special figure 1 game is triggered by the winning of the starting winning opening 36. The special figure 2 hold number display 506 displays the number of pending storage of the special figure 2 game. For example, the pending storage of the special figure 2 game is triggered by the winning of the normal variable winning device 37. Special figure 1 Hold number display 5
05 and the special figure 2 hold number display 506 are displayed in a portion that does not overlap even when the sub display device 501 is in the second position.

Depending on the display mode, the hold display 507 can clearly indicate the number of held memories of the special figure variation display game, and can also notify the expected degree of the game result for each held memory. The number of holding storages displayed by the holding display 507 is either the number of holding storages displayed by the special figure 1 holding number display 505 or the number of holding storages displayed by the special figure 2 holding number display 506, or depending on the game state. It corresponds to the total number of both.

It should be noted that the number of pending storages displayed by the pending display 507 is a value from “0” to “4”, and the number of pending storages exceeding this is excluded from the display target. In the gaming machine 10, even if the hold display 507 excludes a part of the hold storages from display, the display of the accurate hold storage number can be secured by the special figure 1 hold number display 505 and the special figure 2 hold number display 506.

Depending on the display mode, the hold decommissioning display 508 can indicate that the special figure variation display game is in a variation display state, and can notify the degree of expectation for the game result. That is, the gaming machine 10 can perform the hold announcement effect using the hold display 507 and the hold exhaustion display 508. The pending notice effect is an aspect of the look-ahead effect performed using the pending display 507 and the pending usage display 508.

On the display screen 502, the reserved memory number of the special figure 1 game indicated by the special figure 1 reserved number display 505 is “1”.
Since the reserved memory number of the special figure 2 game indicated by the special figure 2 reserved number display 506 is “0”, the reserved memory number indicated by the reserved display 507 is also “1”. In addition, the display screen 502 shows that the special figure variation display game is in the process of symbol variation by the pending consumption display 508.

Further, the gaming machine 10 can change the variation mode during the variable display for the large symbol group 503 and the small symbol group 504. For example, the gaming machine 10 can easily distinguish between the large symbol group 503 and the small symbol group 504 when the large symbol group 503 is vertically scrolled. Further, the gaming machine 10 can reduce the sense of discomfort given to the player even when the symbols are updated asynchronously between the large symbol group 503 and the small symbol group 504.

The display screen 509 shown in FIG. 49(2) is the display content of the display device 41 when the variable display game is changing the symbols and the sub display device 501 is at the second position.
When the sub display device 501 is at the second position, the sub display device 501 is arranged at a position corresponding to the hold display 507 and the hold exhaustion display 508 on the display screen 502. Therefore, the display screen 509 includes the hold display 507 and the hold exhaustion display 50 among the display elements of the display screen 502.
8 is excluded. Even in this case, the special figure 1 reserved number display 505 and the special figure 2 reserved number display 506 are displayed in the non-overlapping portions even when the sub display device 501 is in the second position. The gaming machine 10 can ensure accurate display of the number of reserved memories by the special figure 1 reserved number display 505 and the special figure 2 reserved number display 506.

In this way, the display device 41 displays the display screen in which the display elements in the portion overlapping the sub display device 501 are removed, so that the gaming machine 10 cannot see some of the display elements in the overlapping portion (partially. Can be reduced). Furthermore, the display device 41 displays the display screen from which the display elements in the portion overlapping the sub display device 501 are removed, whereby the gaming machine 10 can improve the visibility of the sub display device 501.

Next, the effect of the variable display game executed by the gaming machine 10 using the sub display device 501 will be described with reference to FIGS. 50 to 52. FIG. 50 is a diagram (No. 1) showing an example of the presentation mode in the gaming machine of the second embodiment. FIG. 51 is a diagram (No. 2) showing an example of the presentation mode in the gaming machine of the second embodiment. FIG. 52 is a diagram (No. 3) showing an example of the presentation mode in the gaming machine of the second embodiment.

The presentation mode 511 shown in FIG. 50(1) shows the state at the start of the variable display (the state in which the variable display game is started). In the rendering mode 511, the sub display device 501 is at the first position, the board rendering device 44 is stopped, and the display device 41 displays the display screen 502 having the configuration when the sub display device 501 is at the first position. ing.

The effect mode 512 shown in FIG. 50(2) is a mode after the effect mode 511 and is an effect using the sub-display device 501 (corresponding to the duration time at the second position, numbers from "0" are assigned). The mode after starting the (count effect which counts up and displays) is shown. In addition, the count production is
It is an example of an effect in which the sub-display device 501 displays a display corresponding to the duration time located at the second position.

In the presentation mode 512, the sub display device 501 is movably switched from the first position to the second position as the count presentation is started. Then, the display device 41 displays the display screen 509 of the configuration when the sub display device 501 is in the second position, as the sub display device 501 is movably switched from the first position to the second position. There is.

The effect mode 513 shown in FIG. 50(3) is a mode after the effect mode 512, and the sub display device 501 counts up a number from "0" corresponding to the duration time of being positioned at the second position in the count effect. Indicates the state where the display has started.

In the rendering mode 513, the sub display device 501 indicates that the numbers are being counted up and the current count number is “0” (immediately after the start).
During the count-up display, the sub display device 501 displays the number (count number) that is being counted up by the three middle 7-segment LEDs (display unit), and also has the two 7-segment LEDs on both sides. Clearly indicate that the count-up is being displayed.

That is, the two 7-segment type LEDs on both sides of the sub display device 501 are in charge of reporting the execution state of the count-up display, and the three 7-segment type LEDs in the middle of the sub display device 501 are in charge of the count-up display. In charge of notification of numbers.

For example, the sub-display device 501 illuminates any one of the two 7-segment LEDs on both sides while changing the lighting location in a predetermined order to clearly indicate that the count-up display is continuing. For example, in the count effect, the sub display device 501
Count up to a maximum of "100".

In addition, the expectation (reliability) corresponding to the result mode of the variable display game is set to the count number at the end of the count-up in the count effect, that is, the count-up result (count result), and the gaming machine 10 , Count up so that the counting result is according to the degree of expectation. That is, the gaming machine 10 clearly indicates the degree of expectation corresponding to the result mode of the variable display game by the count result of the sub display device 501.

In this way, in order to count up so as to obtain a count result according to the degree of expectation, the gaming machine 10 raises the player's interest in the effect contents (count result) of the count effect of the sub display device 501, and gives the player The effect executed on the sub display device 501 can be more closely watched. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can improve the interest of the player by the effect executed by the sub display device 501.

Note that the degree of expectation is set to be higher as the count result becomes larger, for example. By setting the degree of expectation in this way, the time (duration) of being in the second position
As the value becomes longer, the degree of expectation also increases, and the gaming machine 10 can add value (meaning) to the time (duration) during which the sub display device 501 (movable accessory) waits in the second position. That is, the gaming machine 10 can maintain and improve its interest even after displacing the movable accessory. Further, the expectation level is not limited to the one that corresponds to the possibility of deriving a big hit, and may be one that corresponds to the development stage of the variable display effect such as reach or super reach.

Note that the gaming machine 10 is not limited to a fixed speed for increasing the count number in the count effect, but may have a variable speed. For example, the gaming machine 10 may change the increase speed of the count number in synchronization with the display on the display screen (for example, in synchronization with the rotation speed of the large symbol group),
If it is immediately after the start of counting, the speed of increase is set to high (the frequency of updating the count is high),
When the count is about to end, the count increase speed may be set to a low speed (the count number update frequency is low). Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can adjust the time of the count effect regardless of the count result, and for example, the time of the count effect is the same when the count result is large and when the count result is small. You can also

Further, the increment value of the count in the count effect is not limited to a fixed value and may be a variable value. For example, the gaming machine 10 may count up by "5" immediately after the start of counting, and may count up by "1" near the end of counting. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can adjust the time of the count effect regardless of the count result, and for example, the time of the count effect is the same when the count result is large and when the count result is small. You can also

The gaming machine 10 triggers a predetermined count number (for example, the count number “20”, “4”).
A message (for example, a message that clearly indicates the relationship between the count number and the degree of expectation) may be displayed on the display screen on "0", "60", "80"). In this way, by displaying as a message that the count number is related to the degree of expectation, the gaming machine 10 can easily understand the content of the effect (the increase of the count number is related to the degree of expectation). ..

An effect mode 514 shown in FIG. 51(1) is a mode after the effect mode 513, and shows a state in which the sub display device 501 is counting up the numbers in the count effect.
In the rendering mode 514, the sub display device 501 includes two 7-segment type LEDs on both sides.
It is clearly indicated that the count-up is continuing by turning on any one of the above. In addition, the sub display device 501 indicates that the current count number is “20” by the three 3-segment LEDs in the middle.

An effect mode 515 shown in FIG. 51(2) is a mode after the effect mode 514, and shows a state after the sub display device 501 finishes the count-up display of the numbers in the count effect.

In the rendering mode 515, the sub display device 501 includes two 7-segment type LEDs on both sides.
It is clearly indicated that the count-up display has ended by turning off the. Further, the sub display device 501 has a count result of "3" due to the three 3-segment LEDs in the middle.
It indicates that it is “0”.

An effect mode 516 shown in FIG. 52(1) is a mode after the effect mode 515, and is a mode after the count effect using the sub display device 501 is finished.
In the rendering mode 516, the sub display device 501 is movably switched from the second position to the first position as the count rendering ends. Then, the display device 41 displays the display screen 502 having the configuration when the sub display device 501 is at the first position, as the sub display device 501 is movably switched from the second position to the first position. There is.

An effect mode 517 shown in FIG. 52(2) is a mode after the effect mode 516, and is a mode in which the display device 41 is executing an effect corresponding to the count result.
In the presentation mode 517, the display device 41 displays the display screen 518. Display screen 51
In addition to the display elements displayed on the display screen 502, 8 further includes an effect display 519 that displays an effect corresponding to the count result.

The effect display 519 displays an effect (fire line effect) in a display mode according to the count result.
The effect display 519 displays an effect in a display mode in which the flame displayed on the other end side of the squib at a position corresponding to the board effect device 44 approaches the board effect device 44. The effect display 519 displays a flame in a display mode according to the count result. In other words, the effect display 519 clearly indicates the degree of expectation corresponding to the result mode of the variable display game depending on the flame display mode.

Here, the relationship between the flame display mode, the count result, and the expectation will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 53 is a diagram showing an example of the relationship between the flame display mode, the count result, and the degree of expectation according to the second embodiment.

There are 11 patterns from P1 to P11 for displaying flames in the squib effect. The pattern P1 is a white flame of a small size (first size). The pattern P2 is a small size blue flame. The pattern P3 is a small-sized green flame. Pattern P4
Is a medium sized (second size larger than the first size) green flame. Pattern P5 is a medium sized yellow flame. Pattern P6 is a medium sized orange flame. The pattern P7 is a large-sized (third size larger than the second size) orange flame. The pattern P8 is a large-sized red flame. The pattern P9 is a large-sized cherry blossom flame. The pattern P10 is a cherry blossom flame having a shape in which a large-sized flame and a medium-sized flame are superposed (a shape in which the third size and the second size are combined). The pattern P11 is a rainbow-colored flame having a shape in which a large-sized flame and a medium-sized flame are superimposed.

The display mode of the flame of the pattern P1 corresponds to the count results “0” to “9” of the count effect. That is, the gaming machine 10 performs the squib effect with the flame of the pattern P1 when the count result of the count effect is "0" to "9".

In the display mode of the flame of the pattern P2, the count result of the count effect is "10" to "19".
Corresponds to. That is, in the gaming machine 10, the count result of the count effect is changed from "10" to "1".
If it is "9", the fuse effect with the flame of the pattern P2 is performed.

In the display mode of the flame of the pattern P3, the count result of the count effect is "20" to "29".
Corresponds to. That is, the gaming machine 10 changes the count result of the count effect from “20” to “2”.
If it is "9", the fuse effect with the flame of the pattern P3 is performed.

In the display mode of the flame of the pattern P4, the count result of the count effect is "30" to "39".
Corresponds to. That is, the gaming machine 10 changes the count result of the count effect from "30" to "3".
If it is "9", the fuse effect with the flame of the pattern P4 is performed.

In the display mode of the flame of the pattern P5, the count result of the count effect is "40" to "49".
Corresponds to. That is, in the gaming machine 10, the count result of the count effect is from "40" to "4".
If it is "9", the fuse effect with the flame of the pattern P5 is performed.

In the display mode of the flame of the pattern P6, the count result of the count effect is "50" to "59".
Corresponds to. That is, in the gaming machine 10, the count result of the count effect is changed from "50" to "5".
If it is "9", the fuse effect with the flame of the pattern P6 is performed.

In the display mode of the flame of the pattern P7, the count result of the count effect is "60" to "69".
Corresponds to. That is, the gaming machine 10 changes the count result of the count effect from "60" to "6".
If it is "9", the fuse effect with the flame of the pattern P7 is performed.

In the display mode of the flame of the pattern P8, the count result of the count effect is "70" to "79".
Corresponds to. That is, in the gaming machine 10, the count result of the count effect is changed from "70" to "7".
If it is "9", the fuse effect with the flame of the pattern P8 is performed.

In the display mode of the flame of the pattern P9, the count result of the count effect is "80" to "89".
Corresponds to. That is, the gaming machine 10 changes the count result of the count effect from “80” to “8”.
If it is "9", the fuse effect with the flame of the pattern P9 is performed.

As for the display mode of the flame of the pattern P10, the count result of the count effect is "90" to "99".
". That is, in the gaming machine 10, the count result of the count effect is changed from "90" to "
If it is "99", the fuse effect with the flame of the pattern P10 is performed.

In the display mode of the flame of the pattern P11, the count result of the count effect corresponds to “100”. That is, the gaming machine 10 performs the fuse effect with the flame of the pattern P11 when the count result of the count effect is "100".

The gaming machine 10 sets the lowest expected degree to the pattern P1, sets the highest expected degree to the pattern P11 (for example, big hit confirmation), and sets the expected degree to be gradually increased from the pattern P1 to the pattern P11. .. The gaming machine 10 may set a specific degree of expectation of 0% to 100% in the patterns P1 to P11, for example, “low”, “medium”, and “high”. As described above, a rough expectation level may be set.

It should be noted that the gaming machine 10 may more specifically set the degree of expectation for each count result corresponding to each pattern. For example, the gaming machine 10 sets the degree of expectation such that the greater the number of counts, the higher the degree of expectation (the count result “39” is set to have a higher expectation degree than the count result “30”). The above is the relationship between the flame display mode, the counting result, and the degree of expectation. Returning to FIG. 52(2), the description will be continued.

For example, the effect display 519 displays an effect (a effect in which the flame does not reach the position corresponding to the board effect device 44) in which a part of the fuse is burned when the effect is ended (the variable display game is ended). When continuing (developing) the effect, the effect (the effect that the flame reaches the position corresponding to the board effect device 44) in which all the fuses burn out is displayed. According to such an effect, the player can grasp the effect end timing by the length of the squib. That is, the squib is responsible for clearly indicating the production end timing.

For example, when the game machine 10 displays an effect in which a part of the fuse is left unburned, the effect is ended (the large symbol group is temporarily stopped in a disengaged manner) and the variable display game is ended. On the other hand, when the gaming machine 10 displays an effect in which all of the fuses burn out, the effect is continued (developed), and (
It shifts to the production mode of FIG. 52 (3). For example, when the result mode of the variable display game is off, the game machine 10 ends the effect, and when the result mode of the variable display game is a big hit, the effect is continued ((3) in FIG. 52). Transition to the production mode).

Although the mode of the flame is described as the mode corresponding to the count result, the mode is not limited to this. For example, the gaming machine 10 may have a mode in which the length of the squib corresponds to the count result. In this case, for example, the gaming machine 10 may have a mode in which the smaller the counting result, the longer the squib, or the larger the counting result, the longer the squib. In addition, the gaming machine 10 can set a display mode (for example, shape, color, pattern, etc.) of the fuse to a mode corresponding to the count result.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 can set the shortening speed of the squib to a fixed speed or a variable speed. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can arbitrarily adjust the production time by the shortening speed of the fuse even when the length of the fuse is set to correspond to the count result.
For example, the gaming machine 10 may be configured such that the time for producing the fuse is the same when the fuse is long and when the fuse is short. Note that the gaming machine 10 may be configured such that the shortening speed of the squib corresponds to the count result, and the production time is arbitrarily adjusted depending on the length of the squib.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 counts down the count result (“30” in the figure) displayed on the sub display device 501 so as to coincide with the end timing of the fuse effect, and clearly indicates the end timing of the fuse effect. May be. In this case, the gaming machine 10 may movably switch the position of the sub display device 501 to the second position so that the countdown by the sub display device 501 is easier to see.

52(3) is a mode after effect mode 517, in which an effect (big hit notification effect) for notifying that the variation display result is a big hit is performed using the board effect device 44. The mode of the state where it exists is shown.

In the rendering mode 520, the display device 41 displays the display screen 50 when the fuse effect is completed.
2 is displayed. Further, in the effect mode 520, the board effect device 44 moves downward (display device 41
Toward the center) and notifies that the variation display result is a big hit.

In the effect mode 520, the sub display device 501 performs an effect in which the big hit symbol is clearly shown. The sub display device 501 clarified that it is changing by turning on one of the two 7-segment LEDs on both sides, and configured the three 3-segment LEDs in the middle as a big hit mode. Combination (“111”, “222”, “333”, “
"444", "555", "666", "777") are displayed in order. Then, the sub-display device 501 turns off the two 7-segment type LEDs on both sides at a predetermined timing, and displays any of the combinations of the three 7-segment type LEDs in the middle to form the big hit mode, Clearly indicate that the displayed combination is a jackpot design.

That is, the two 7-segment LEDs on both sides of the sub display device 501 are in charge of notifying that the big hit symbol is continuously changing in the big hit notification effect, and the sub display device 501
The three 7-segment LEDs in the middle of are in charge of notification of a combination of big hit symbols.

Next, the execution timings of the count effect, the fuse effect, and the big hit notification effect will be described with reference to FIG. 54. FIG. 54 is a count effect, a fuse effect, and the like in the second embodiment.
It is a timing chart showing an example of the execution timing of the big hit notification effect.

The gaming machine 10 starts the Nth variation display game at timing t1 ((1) in FIG. 50).
.. The gaming machine 10 has a timing t after a predetermined time has elapsed since the Nth variation display game was started.
The count effect is started to 2, and the sub display device 501 is movably switched from the first position to the second position (FIG. 50(2)).

After movably switching the sub display device 501 to the second position, the gaming machine 10 starts the count-up display using the sub display device 501 from timing t3 after a lapse of a predetermined time (FIG. 5).
0(3), FIG. 51(1)). The gaming machine 10 finishes counting up at timing t4 when it is executed for a predetermined time (FIG. 51(2)).

The gaming machine 10 displays the count result for a predetermined time after the count-up ends,
At the timing t5, the sub display device 501 is movably switched from the second position to the first position, and the count effect is finished (FIG. 52(1)). The gaming machine 10 starts the squib effect at a timing t6 after a lapse of a predetermined time from the end of the counting effect (FIG. 52(2)).

The gaming machine 10 ends the fuse effect at timing t7 after executing the fuse effect for a predetermined time, and starts the jackpot notification effect (FIG. 52(3)).
Next, a description will be given of the effect mode determination process when the count effect is executed. FIG. 55 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the production mode determination processing at the time of executing the count production of the second embodiment. The effect mode determination process is a process performed by the control unit (CPU 311) of the effect control device 300. The effect mode determination process is a process executed by the control unit in step D23 (see FIG. 44) of the main process.

[Step D71] The control unit acquires the variation result of the target variation display game based on the received command.
[Step D72] The control unit determines the mode (count result) of the count effect based on the received command. For example, the control unit determines the count result using the lottery table based on the received command.

[Step D73] The control unit determines the mode of the fuse effect based on the variation result (reception command) and the counting result. The control unit determines success or failure of the effect (whether or not to continue the effect) based on the variation result (reception command), and determines the display mode of the flame based on the count result.

[Step D74] The control unit determines whether or not the fuse effect is successful and the effect is continued. When it is determined that the effect does not continue (the variation result is not a big hit), the control unit ends the effect mode determination process, and when it is determined that the effect continues (the variation result is a big hit), the process proceeds to step D75. move on.

[Step D75] The control unit determines the mode of the big hit notification effect based on the received command. For example, the control unit determines the big hit symbol clearly displayed by the sub display device 501 in the big hit notification effect based on the received command.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the gaming machine 10 notifies the degree of expectation corresponding to the result mode of the variable display game in the variable display game using the sub display device 501, but the present invention is not limited to this.

For example, the gaming machine 10 can also notify the degree of expectation corresponding to the result mode of the variable display game across the variable display games. For example, the gaming machine 10 has a starting memory (
The expectation degree corresponding to the result mode of the variable display game (starting memory corresponding to the icon displayed on the hold display) may be continuously performed using the sub display device 501 from the standby for digestion until after the start of digestion. .. In this case, for example, the gaming machine 10 lights the icon displayed on the hold display to notify the expectation degree corresponding to the result mode of the variable display game of the starting memory corresponding to the icon. Make it clear.

In the above embodiment, the sub display device 501 has been described as having an effect corresponding to the time (the duration of the state in which the sub display device 501 is located), but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be a position different from the first position. For example, when the movement limit (movable limit) from the first position is set to the second position, the gaming machine 10 is located between the first position and the second position. It is also possible to produce an effect corresponding to the duration of the state in the third position not including the first position. The third position mentioned here is a position including the second position.

The gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment described above has the following features in one aspect.
(1) The gaming machine 10 includes first display means (display device 41), second display means (sub display device 501), and control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300). The first display means can display a variable display game. The second display means is at the first position (Fig. 47(1)).
) And the second position (FIG. 47(2)), and a predetermined effect display can be displayed. The control means changes the display mode of the effect display in accordance with the duration of the state in which the second display means is present at the third position between the first position and the second position and not including the first position ( Count-up display) is performed to display information (expectation level) on the result mode of the variable display game on the second display means.

(2) The information on the result form of the variable display game in (1) is the degree of expectation that the special variable display game will derive the special result form (big hit).
(3) The control means of (1) changes the display mode of the display element for notifying the information regarding the result mode of the variable display game according to the duration.

(4) The control means of (1) makes a display corresponding to the information on the result mode of the variable display game notified by the second display means after the display of the information on the result mode of the variable display game by the second display means ends. The first display means is caused to perform a display effect (fire line effect) of the mode (flame display mode).

(5) The second display means of (1) is arranged on the front side of the first display means, and the control means displays the display mode of the first display means (display screen 502) according to the position of the second display means. , Display screen 50
9) Change.

(6) The control means of (5) changes the display mode of the first display means so that the display element is not arranged in the portion located on the back side of the second display means.
[Third Embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment can change the attitude state of the sub display device 501, and can perform variable display of symbols corresponding to the attitude state of the sub display device 501. First,
The posture state of the sub display device 501 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 56 is a diagram showing an example of the posture state of the sub display device according to the third embodiment.

The gaming machine 10 can change the sub display device 501 into four posture states. FIG. 56
(1) shows a standard posture state (standard posture state) of the sub display device 501. The sub display device 501 includes a 5-digit 7-segment display arranged in a horizontal row. Sub display device 50
The standard posture state of 1 is the posture state in which the 5-digit 7-segment display is in the horizontal direction on the front surface of the display device 41 (main display device). The sub-display device 501 projects to the position where the 5-digit 7-segment display is easily visible to the player on the front surface of the display device 41. For example, the sub display device 501 projects from the lower end of the display area of the display device 41 into the display area by a distance d1.

Accordingly, the gaming machine 10 can ensure good visibility of the sub display device 501 in the standard posture state. Further, the gaming machine 10 has a sub display device 50 for the display device 41.
The visibility of 1 can be predominant.

FIG. 56(2) shows a posture state (a retracted posture state) in which at least a part of the sub display device 501 is retracted from the front surface of the display device 41. The retracted posture state of the sub display device 501 is a posture state in which the 5-digit 7-segment display is in the horizontal direction on the front surface of the display device 41. However, the sub display device 501 is retracted from the front surface of the display device 41 to a position where the 5-digit 7-segment display is not easily visible to the player. For example, the sub-display device 501 is partially housed in the center case (game production structure) 40, and projects from the lower end of the display region of the display device 41 by a distance d2 (where d2<d1) into the display region.

As a result, the gaming machine 10 can ensure good visibility of the display device 41 in the retracted posture state. Further, the gaming machine 10 can make the visibility of the sub display device 501 inferior to the display device 41.

FIG. 56(3) shows a posture state in which the sub display device 501 is tilted to the left (left tilt posture state). The left tilted posture state of the sub display device 501 is a posture state in which the 5-digit 7-segment display is tilted to the lower left on the front surface of the display device 41. The sub-display device 501 projects to a position where the player can easily see the 5-digit 7-segment display while tilting to the left on the front surface of the display device 41. For example, the sub display device 501 projects from the lower end of the display area of the display device 41 into the display area at a left inclination of the angle α.

Accordingly, the gaming machine 10 can ensure good visibility of the sub display device 501 in the left tilt posture state. Further, the gaming machine 10 has a sub display device 5 with respect to the display device 41.
The visibility of 01 can be predominant.

FIG. 56(4) shows a posture state in which the sub display device 501 is tilted to the right (right tilt posture state). The right tilt posture state of the sub display device 501 is a posture state in which the 5-digit 7-segment display is tilted to the lower right on the front surface of the display device 41. The sub-display device 501 projects to a position where the 5-digit 7-segment display is tilted to the right on the front surface of the display device 41 and is easily visible to the player. For example, the sub display device 501 projects from the lower end of the display area of the display device 41 into the display area at a right inclination of the angle α.

Accordingly, the gaming machine 10 can ensure good visibility of the sub display device 501 in the right tilt posture state. Further, the gaming machine 10 has a sub display device 5 with respect to the display device 41.
The visibility of 01 can be predominant.

First, the configuration of the display screen of the display device 41 will be described with reference to FIG. Fig. 57
FIG. 9 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating an example of a display screen on the display device of the third embodiment.
In FIG. 57(1), the display device 41 and the sub display device 50 in which the symbols are stopped in the variable display game
The display content of 1 is shown. The gaming machine 10 can share the display content in the variable display game with the display device 41 and the sub-display device 501. However, the display device 41 shown in FIG.
The display in the variable display game is shared only by the display device 41. The display device 41 includes two sets of decorative symbols, a special figure 1 reserved number display 603, a special figure 2 reserved number display 604, and a game guide 610 in the display content of the variable display game while the symbol is stopped.

The two sets of decorative designs include a large design group 601 as a first decorative design and a small design group 602 as a second decorative design. The large symbol group 601 is in charge of game production for the purpose of improving interest. Therefore, the large symbol group 601 is displayed large in the approximate center of the display device 41. Large pattern group 601
Includes a left symbol 601L, a middle symbol 601C, and a right symbol 601R. The left symbol 601L, the middle symbol 601C, and the right symbol 601R all indicate that the corresponding special symbol variation display game is in the symbol stopped state.

In general, the large symbol group 601 starts changing in the order of the left symbol 601L, the right symbol 601R, and the middle symbol 601C, and stops (including temporary stop) in the order of the left symbol 601L, the right symbol 601R, and the middle symbol 601C. Therefore, in many cases, the large symbol group 601 forms a reach mode with the left symbol 601L and the right symbol 601R, and can form a hit mode after waiting for the middle symbol 601C to stop.

The small symbol group 602 takes charge of notification of the variable display state for the purpose of improving the ease of grasping the game state of the player. Therefore, the small symbol group 602 is displayed small in the peripheral portion of the display device 41 so as to ensure visibility without disturbing the display effect by the large symbol group 601. Small symbol group 602,
It includes a left design, a middle design, and a right design. The left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol in the small symbol group 602 of the display screen 600 indicate that the corresponding special symbol variable display game is in the symbol stopped state.

In general, the large symbol group 601 is displayed larger than the small symbol group 602, the degree of freedom of the display position is high, and the display mode can be greatly changed. On the contrary, the small symbol group 602 is
Compared with the large symbol group 601, it is displayed in a small size, and the degree of freedom of display position is low (for example, position fixing).

The special figure 1 hold number display 603 displays the hold storage number (starting storage number) of the special figure 1 game. The special figure 2 hold number display 604 displays the number of pending storage of the special figure 2 game. The display device 41 displays the reserved memory number “0” of the special figure 1 game on the special figure 1 reserved number display 603, and displays the special figure 2 reserved number display 60.
The reserved memory number “0” of the special figure 2 game is displayed in 4.

The game guide 610 is a display for guiding the player to the game state. For example, game guide 61
Indicates to the player by the message "Right hit" that the game status is a game status corresponding to right hitting (more specifically, a normal power support status, etc.).

The display device 41 may include a hold display and a hold exhaustion display in the display content. Depending on the display mode, the pending display can clearly indicate the number of pending memories of the special figure variation display game, and can also notify the expected degree of the game result for each of the pending memories. The number of pending storages displayed by the pending display corresponds to the sum of the number of pending storages displayed by the special figure 1 pending number display 603 and the number of pending storages displayed by the special figure 2 pending number display 604. Depending on the display mode, the hold depletion display can indicate that the special figure variable display game is in a variable display state, and can also notify the degree of expectation for the game result.

Further, in the gaming machine 10, the large symbol group 601 and the small symbol group 602 each have a three-digit symbol, but may have any digit as long as it includes one or more symbols. In addition, the gaming machine 10,
Although the numbers of digits of the symbols are made uniform in the large symbol group 601 and the small symbols group 602, the numbers of digits of the symbols may be made different in the large symbols group 601 and the small symbols group 602.

Further, the gaming machine 10 may change the transparency of the symbol for the large symbol group 601 during the variable display and the stop display, or during the variable display (for example, change the transparency from 0% to 50%). For the small symbol group 602, the transparency of the symbols can be fixed (for example, the transparency can be fixed to 0%). As a result, the gaming machine 10 can secure the visibility of the small symbol group 602 while ensuring the variety of display effects for the large symbol group 601, and facilitate the player's understanding of the game state.

Further, the gaming machine 10 may change the hue of the symbol (for example, change from red to blue) for the large symbol group 601 during the variable display and the stop display, or during the variable display.
With respect to the small symbol group 602, the hue of the symbol can be fixed (for example, fixed to red). Further, the gaming machine 10 is a large symbol group 6 in the variable display and the stop display, or in the variable display.
Even if the saturation of the symbol for 01 is changed (for example, changed from 100% to 0%), the saturation of the symbol for the small symbol group 602 can be fixed (for example, fixed to 100%). it can. Further, the gaming machine 10 may change the brightness of the symbol for the large symbol group 601 during the variable display and the stop display, or during the variable display (for example, change from 100% to 10% in brightness), The brightness of the symbols is fixed for the small symbol group 602 (for example, the brightness 10
It can be fixed at 0%). Further, the gaming machine 10 can change the size of the symbol for the large symbol group 601 during the variable display and the stop display, or during the variable display (for example, change from the standard size to the enlarged (reduced) size). Even if there is, it is possible to fix the size of the symbol for the small symbol group 602. Further, the gaming machine 10 may change the display position of the symbol for the large symbol group 601 during the variable display and the stop display, or during the variable display (for example, from the center of the screen to the upper left of the screen), The display position of the symbols for the small symbol group 602 can be fixed (for example, fixed to the lower right of the screen). Further, the gaming machine 10 can change the design of the symbol for the large symbol group 601 during the variable display and the stop display, or during the variable display (for example, change from a rectangle to a circle, or a number to a character). Even if there is, the design of the small symbol group 602 can be fixed (for example, fixed to a number). Further, the gaming machine 10 may change the variable display mode of symbols for the large symbol group 601 during variable display (for example, change from vertical scroll to horizontal scroll), but the variable display mode of symbols for the small symbol group 602. Fixed (for example, fixed to shaft rotation fluctuation)
can do.

Also by these, the gaming machine 10 can secure the visibility of the small symbol group 602 while securing the variety of display effects for the large symbol group 601, and can easily understand the game state of the player.

Further, the gaming machine 10 can change the variation mode during the variable display for the large symbol group 601 and the small symbol group 602. For example, the gaming machine 10 can easily distinguish between the large symbol group 601 and the small symbol group 602 when performing vertical scrolling for the large symbol group 601. Further, the gaming machine 10 can reduce the sense of discomfort given to the player even when the symbols are updated asynchronously between the large symbol group 601 and the small symbol group 602.

The sub display device 501 is a five-digit display device including five 7-segment LEDs. Since each 7-segment LED functions as one display unit, the sub-display device 501 includes five display units 501a, 501b, 501c, 501d, 501e. The sub-display device 501 can display the display content related to the variable display game or the display content independent of the variable display game by the display units 501a, 501b, 501c, 501d, and 501e. For example, the sub display device 501 can display the number of acquired game balls, the cumulative number of fluctuations, the number of jackpots, etc., as well as a lively display and error notification. For example, in FIG.
The sub-display device 501 shown in FIG. 7(1) includes display portions 501a, 501b, 501c, 501d.
, 501e are synchronized and sequentially turned on one segment at a time, and a lively display is performed.

In the variable display game in FIG. 57(2), the display device 41 and the sub display device 50 are changing their symbols.
The display content of 1 is shown. The display device 41 shown in FIG. 57(2) shares the display in the variable display game only with the display device 41.

The display device 41 displays the reserved memory number “0” of the special figure 1 game on the special figure 1 reserved number display 603, and displays the reserved memory number “4” of the special figure 2 game on the special figure 2 reserved number display 604. .. Further, the left symbol 601L, the middle symbol 601C, and the right symbol 601R displayed by the display device 41 all indicate that the corresponding special figure variation display game is in the symbol variation state. Further, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol in the small symbol group 602 displayed by the display device 41 indicate that the corresponding special symbol variation display game is in the symbol variation state.

In the gaming machine 10, since many players are interested in the formation of the reach aspect when the symbol variation starts from the symbol stop, the left symbol 6 that forms the reach aspect in the process of forming the reach aspect
01L and the right design 601R are displayed larger than the middle design 601C.

The sub display device 501 performs the same display as when the symbol is stopped. The sub display device 50
1, the different display may be performed while the symbol is changing and the symbol is stopped. For example,
The sub display device 501 performs lively display as display content independent of the variable display game while the symbols are stopped, and displays the number of acquired game balls and the cumulative number of variations as display content related to the variable display game.

Next, a display example in which the sub display device 501 shares a part of the display content in the variable display game will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58 is a diagram (No. 2) showing an example of the display screen in the display device of the third embodiment.

In the variable display game, the display device 41 in which the symbol is changing and the sub-display device 5 in the standard posture state
The display content of 01 is shown in FIG. 58(1). The display device 41 displays the small symbol group 602, the special figure 1 hold number display 603, the special figure 2 hold number display 604, the game guide 610, and the effect display 611 in the variable display game while the symbols are changing. Including. The sub-display device 501 includes a large symbol group 601s in the display content during the symbol variation of the variable display game.

That is, the gaming machine 10 has a large symbol group 601 displayed on the display device 41 (FIG. 57(1)).
, (2)), the large symbol group 601s can be displayed on the sub display device 501. The large symbol group 601s displayed by the sub display device 501 corresponds to the small symbol group 602 similarly to the large symbol group 601.

In the standard posture state, the sub display device 501 displays a symbol by using three arranged in the center of the display units 501b, 501c, 501d, and displays a symbol by using two positioned at the end of the display units 501a, 501e. .. The display portions 501b, 501c, 501d are respectively left symbols 601.
L, the middle symbol 601C, the right symbol 601R are displayed, and the symbol variation due to symbol switching is displayed. The symbol variation due to the symbol switching will be described later with reference to FIG. 59.

The display device 41 displays the effect display 611 instead of the large symbol group 601. Performance display 611
Includes a character 612, a background 613, and the like. As a result, the display device 41 displays the large symbol group 6
By entrusting the display of 01 to the sub display device 501, a display effect can be performed using a large display area. Further, the display device 41 displays the large symbol group 601 on the sub display device 50.
By entrusting it to 1, it is possible to eliminate the interference between the large symbol group 601 and the display effect.

FIG. 58(2) shows the display device 41 in which the symbols are changing in the variable display game and the display contents of the sub display device 501 in the left tilt posture state. The sub display device 501 displays a symbol by using the five display units 501a, 501b, 501c, 501d, and 501e in the left tilt posture state. The display units 501a, 501b, 501c, 501d, 501e display the symbol variation due to the horizontal scroll. The symbol variation due to the horizontal scroll will be described later with reference to FIG.

The display device 41 changes the display content according to the posture of the sub display device 501. Display device 4
1 changes the display content of the effect display 611 in accordance with the posture of the sub display device 501. For example, the character 612 is slide-displayed on the left side in correspondence with the inclination of the sub display device 501. Further, the background 613 is tilted corresponding to the tilt of the sub display device 501, and clearly shows the correspondence relationship between the posture of the sub display device 501 and the effect display 611.

The display device 41 displays the small symbol group 602, the special figure 1 reserved number display 603, the special figure 2 reserved number display 604, and the game guide 610 independently of the attitude of the sub display device 501. Thereby, the display device 41 ensures easy understanding of the game state by the player even if there is an effect according to the posture of the sub display device 501.

The display content of the display device 41 when the sub display device 501 is in the left tilt posture is described, but the display content of the display device 41 when the sub display device 501 is in the right tilt posture is the same. it can. For example, the display device 41 slides and displays the character 612 to the right according to the tilt of the sub display device 501 when the sub display device 501 is in the right tilt posture.

Next, the symbol variation due to the symbol switching in the sub display device 501 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 59 is a diagram showing an example of a symbol variation due to symbol switching in the sub display device of the third embodiment.

The sub display device 501 shown in FIG. 59(1) is a large symbol group 60 during symbol fluctuation due to symbol switching.
1s is being displayed. The sub-display device 501 shown in FIG. 59(1) includes display units 501b and 50b.
The symbols are switched and displayed by using the three arranged in the center of 1c and 501d, and the display units 501a and 501e are displayed.
The decoration display (for example, G segment lighting, other lighting off) is performed using the two positioned at the end of. In the sub-display device 501 shown in FIG. 59(1), the display portion 501b is a left symbol 601L, the display portion 501c is a middle symbol 601C, and the display portion 501d is a right symbol 601R. Show. That is, the sub display device 501 shown in FIG.
Indicates that the left symbol 601L, the right symbol 601R, and the middle symbol 601C are changing due to symbol switching.

In the sub-display device 501 shown in FIG. 59(2), the display section 501b displays the left symbol 601L as "1".
Indicates that a stop display (including temporary stop) is being performed with a black-filled number. In addition, in FIG.
In the sub-display device 501 shown in 2), the display unit 501c displays the middle pattern 601C and the display unit 501d.
Cross hatching indicates that the right symbols 601R are being switched.

In the sub display device 501 shown in FIG. 59(3), the display unit 501b displays the left design 601L as "1".
It is indicated by a black-filled number that the display is stopped and displayed and that the display unit 501c is displaying the middle pattern 601C by "1". Further, in the sub display device 501 shown in FIG. 59(3), the display unit 501d indicates that the right symbol 601R is in the process of symbol switching by cross hatching. That is, the sub display device 501 shown in FIG. 59(3) shows a state during reach variation.

In the sub-display device 501 shown in FIG. 59(4), the display unit 501b displays the left symbol 601L as "1".
The display is stopped and displayed, the display unit 501c is displaying the middle pattern 601C with a stop of "1", and the display unit 501d is displaying the right design 601R with a stop of "7" in black. Indicated by filled numbers. That is, the sub-display device 501 shown in FIG. 59(4) shows the detachment stop mode after the reach variation.

In the sub display device 501 shown in FIG. 59(5), the display unit 501b displays the left design 601L as "1".
The stop display is in black, the display unit 501c is displaying the middle pattern 601C as "1", and the display unit 501d is displaying the right design 601R as "1" in black. Indicated by filled numbers. That is, the sub display device 501 shown in FIG. 59(5) shows a hit stop mode after the reach variation.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 can change the symbol by switching the symbol using the sub display device 501. In addition, the sub display device 501 is a lighting mode (for example, a color of a design,
It is possible to distinguish the stop state from the temporary stop state by the brightness, blinking period, etc.) and display the symbol.

Next, a symbol variation due to horizontal scrolling in the sub display device 501 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60 is a diagram showing an example of symbol variation due to horizontal scrolling in the sub display device of the third embodiment.

The sub-display device 501 sets a symbol array 615 in which symbols are arranged in the horizontal direction when performing symbol variation by horizontal scrolling. The symbol array 615 has 3 symbols and 2 positioned on both sides thereof.
One decorative display (for example, G segment lighting, other lighting off) is repeatedly arranged. For example,
The symbol array 615 is a partial symbol array "-, 1, 1, 2, -" including decoration display, "-, 1, 1".
, 1,-", "-, 1,1,2,-", "-, 1,1,2,-", "-, 1,1,1,-
Are arranged in order from the left.

The gaming machine 10 performs horizontal scrolling while changing the posture state of the sub display device 501. First, the sub display device 501 displays the partial symbol array "-, 1, 1, 2, -" shown in FIG. 60(1) as a large symbol group 601s in the standard posture state.

Next, the gaming machine 10 changes the posture state of the sub display device 501 from the standard posture state to the right tilt posture state. The gaming machine 10 moves the large symbol group 601s left on the symbol array 615 when the posture state of the sub display device 501 is the right tilt posture state. That is, the sub display device 50
1 displays the symbol fluctuation in which the large symbol group 601s laterally scrolls to the right.

Sub display device 501, when the horizontal scrolling by one unit (one digit) from the partial symbol array "-, 1, 1, 2, -" (see FIG. 60(1)) to the right, the partial symbols are in the large symbol group 601s. Array "
−, −, 1, 1, 2” (see FIG. 60(2)) is displayed.

Similarly, the sub display device 501 displays the partial symbol array "-, -, 1, 1, 2" (Fig. 60 (
When 4 units (4 digits) are horizontally scrolled from (see 2)), a partial symbol array "-, 1, 1, 1, -" (see FIG. 60 (3)) is displayed in the large symbol group 601s.

Then, the sub display device 501 reaches the end of the symbol array 615 and displays the partial symbol array "-, 1, 1, 2, -" (see FIG. 60(4)) in the large symbol group 601s, and the sub display device is displayed. The posture state of 501 is changed from the right tilt posture state to the standard posture state. At this time, the gaming machine 10
Can make the partial symbol array being displayed in the large symbol group 601s the stop symbol. Further, the gaming machine 10 can change the partial symbol array being displayed in the large symbol group 601s as a temporary stop symbol and change it again.

For example, the gaming machine 10 changes the posture state of the sub display device 501 from the standard posture state to the left tilt posture state. The gaming machine 10 moves the large symbol group 601s right in the symbol array 615 when the posture state of the sub display device 501 is the left tilt posture state. That is, the sub display device 5
01 displays the symbol fluctuation in which the large symbol group 601s horizontally scrolls to the left.

The sub-display device 501, when scrolling leftward by one unit (one digit) from the partial symbol array "-, 1, 1, 2, -" (see FIG. 60(4)), a partial symbol is formed in the large symbol group 601s. Array "
, 1, 1, 2,-,-" (see FIG. 60(5)) is displayed.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 can change the posture state of the sub display device 501, and can also change the symbol according to the posture state of the sub display device 501. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can give a novel display effect to the player, and can further improve the interest. Further, the gaming machine 10 can improve the interest of the player in the posture state (motion state) of the sub display device 501.

In the symbol array 615, the three symbols included in the partial symbol array are “1, 1, 1” and “1”.
, 1, 2, −”, but the symbol combination is not limited to this. Further, although the symbol array 615 has the same partial symbol array in duplicate, it may have a partial symbol array having no overlap.

Next, a display effect determination process for determining a display effect corresponding to the posture state of the sub display device 501 will be described with reference to FIG. 61. FIG. 61 is a view showing a flowchart of the display effect determination processing in the effect control device of the third embodiment.

The display effect determination process is a process performed by the control unit (CPU 311) of the effect control device 300. The display effect determination process is a process executed by the control unit in step D23 (see FIG. 44) of the main process.

[Step D81] The control unit determines whether there is a variable display effect on the sub display device 501. The control unit proceeds to step D82 when there is no variable display effect on the sub display device 501, that is, when the display in the variable display game is shared by only the display device 41.
When there is a variable display effect on the sub display device 501, that is, when the display device 41 and the sub display device 501 share the display in the variable display game, the control unit D
Proceed to 83.

[Step D82] Since the display in the variable display game is shared only by the display device (main display device) 41, the control unit sets the variable display effect by the display device 41 and ends the display effect determination process.

[Step D83] The control unit determines whether or not there is a posture change in the sub display device 501. The control unit proceeds to step D84 when there is a posture change in the sub display device 501, and proceeds to step D88 when there is no posture change.

[Step D84] The control unit determines whether or not the posture change in the sub display device 501 is the left tilt posture state. The control unit proceeds to step D85 when the posture change in the sub display device 501 is the left tilt posture state, and proceeds to step D86 when it is not the left tilt posture state.

[Step D85] The control unit controls the display device (main display device) 41 and the sub display device 501.
The left tilt variation display effect is set. The left tilt variation display effect on the display device 41 is
The display content includes the effect display 611 according to the left tilt posture state of the sub display device 501. Also,
The left tilt variation display effect on the sub display device 501 is displayed on the display units 501a, 501b, 501.
c, 501d, 501e is included in the pattern variation due to horizontal scrolling.

[Step D86] The control unit determines whether or not the posture change in the sub display device 501 is the right tilt posture state. The control unit proceeds to step D87 if the posture change in the sub display device 501 is in the right tilt posture state, and proceeds to step D88 if it is not in the right tilt posture state.

[Step D87] The control unit controls the display device (main display device) 41 and the sub display device 501.
Right tilt change display effect is set. The right tilt variation display effect on the display device 41 is
The display contents include the effect display 611 according to the right tilt posture state of the sub display device 501. Also,
The right tilt variation display effect on the sub display device 501 is displayed on the display units 501a, 501b, 501.
c, 501d, 501e is included in the pattern variation due to horizontal scrolling.

[Step D88] The control unit sets a variable display effect (partial variable display effect) that is not shared by the sub display device 501 among the variable display effects.
[Step D89] Of the variable display effects shared by the sub-display device 501, the control unit sets variable display effects (partial variable display effects) that do not accompany posture changes, and ends the display effect determination process.

As a result, the gaming machine 10 can perform the display effect according to the attitude state of the sub display device 501 on the display device 41 and the sub display device 501.
Next, the attitude change of the sub display device 501 based on the player operation received from the push button 25 will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 and 63. First, the push button (option setting unit) 25 provided in the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 62 is a diagram showing an example of arrangement of push button LEDs and touch sensors in the push button of the third embodiment.

The push button 25 includes a push button LED, a touch sensor, and a push button S.
Including W. The push button LED is a nine-color full-color LED. The touch sensor can detect the player's touch operation at eight locations. Push button SW is push button 2
The pressing operation of 5 can be detected.

The effect control device 300 and the push button 25 are electrically connected. The effect control device 300 outputs the control signal of the push button LED to the push button 25, and inputs the detection signal of the touch sensor and the detection signal of the push button SW from the push button 25.

Here, the selection button switch 25a and the enter button switch 25b described with reference to FIG.
I will explain again. The selection button switch 25a and the determination button switch 25b are signals detected by a combination of the detection signal of the touch sensor and the detection signal of the push button SW. For example, a state in which the touch sensor detects the touch operation at the left and right positions corresponding to the selection operation, and the push button SW detects the pressing operation of the push button 25,
This corresponds to the ON state of the selection button switch 25a. The state in which the touch sensor detects the touch operation at the center position corresponding to the determination operation and the push button SW detects the pressing operation of the push button 25 corresponds to the ON state of the determination button switch 25b.

The push button 25 has a columnar shape in which the upper surface when the player looks down is roughly circular. The push button 25 has nine small circles 250 about the size of a fingertip on its upper surface.
.About.258, a small circle portion 250 is arranged in the center of the upper surface, and 8 on the circumference surrounding the small circle portion 250.
Two small circles 251 to 258 are arranged.

The small circle portion 250 has one system of push button LEDs and one touch sensor (TSW4) arranged in its circumference. The small circle part 251 is located to the left of the small circle part 250, and has one system of push button LEDs and one touch sensor (TSW1) arranged in its circumference. The small circle portion 252 is located diagonally above and to the left of the small circle portion 250.
Two touch sensors (TSW2) are arranged within the circumference. The small circle portion 253 is the small circle portion 25.
Located in the 0 upward direction, one system push button LED and one touch sensor (TSW3)
And are placed within that circumference. The small circle portion 254 is located diagonally above and to the right of the small circle portion 250.
The system push button LED and one touch sensor (TSW5) are arranged within the circumference. The small circle portion 255 is located to the right of the small circle portion 250, and has one system of push button LEDs and one touch sensor (TSW6) arranged in its circumference. The small circle portion 256 is the small circle portion 2
It is located diagonally downward to the right of 50 and has one system of push button LEDs and one touch sensor (T
SW7) and are arranged within the circumference. The small circle portion 257 is located below the small circle portion 250,
One push button LED and one touch sensor (TSW8) are arranged within the circumference. The small circle portion 258 is located diagonally downward to the left of the small circle portion 250, and one system of push button LEDs is arranged within the circumference thereof. Since the small circle portion 258 has no touch sensor,
It has a star-shaped polygonal design for easy distinction from the small circles 250 to 257 in which the touch sensor is arranged. Further, since the small circle portion 258 has no touch sensor, it can be a home position when the player operates the eight touch sensors. This small circle portion 258 is located on the front left side among the small circle portions 251-258 when viewed from the player side when the push button 25 is in the center of the gaming machine 10 and the operation unit 24 is on the right side. , Makes it easy for the player to treat the small circle portion 258 as the home position.

In addition, although the push button 25 does not have the touch sensor arranged in the small circle portion 258, the touch sensor may be arranged similarly to the small circle portions 250 to 257. Also, push button 25
In place of the touch sensor, a touch panel capable of detecting the position coordinates of the player's touch operation may be provided. In that case, the effect control device 300 can detect the touch operation of the small circles 250 to 258 from the coordinates corresponding to the small circles 250 to 258 and the position coordinates detected by the touch panel.

Next, the relationship between the push button operation and the posture change state of the sub display device will be described with reference to FIG. 63. FIG. 63 is a diagram showing an example of the relationship between the push button operation and the posture change state of the sub display device according to the third embodiment.

The control unit (CPU 311) of the performance control device 300 can detect a predetermined touch operation from the detection signal of the touch sensor of the push button 25. The control unit can change the posture state of the sub display device 501 located on the front surface of the display device 41 in accordance with the detected touch operation.

For example, the control unit can detect the counterclockwise touch operation as shown in (1A) from the detection signal of the touch sensor of the push button 25 and detect the counterclockwise touch operation of the push button 25. The posture state of the sub display device 501 can be changed from the standard posture state to the left tilt posture state as shown in (1B).

In addition, the control unit can detect a clockwise touch operation as shown in (2A) from the detection signal of the touch sensor of the push button 25, detect the clockwise touch operation of the push button 25, and display the sub display. The posture state of the device 501 can be changed from the standard posture state to the right tilt posture state as shown in (2B).

Further, since the gaming machine 10 can perform the symbol variation display according to the posture state of the sub display device 501, it is possible to perform an effect in which the player operation intervenes in the symbol variation display.
Such a gaming machine 10 can improve the interest of the player in the posture state (motion state) of the sub display device 501.

In the gaming machine 10, the sub-display device 501 is a five-digit display consisting of five 7-segment LEDs, but a dot-matrix display or an LCD display may be used. Further, although the gaming machine 10 accepts the player's operation from the detection signal of the touch sensor of the push button 25, it is not limited to the touch operation, but the button SW is depressed, the lever is operated, the stick is operated, and the input operation is made by gesture or voice. And so on.

Although not shown, the gaming machine 10 can change and control the attitude of the sub display device 501 by the operation of one or more actuators (motors, solenoids, etc.).
[Modification 1 of the third embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 of the modified example 1 of the third embodiment can change the posture state of the sub display device 501 in the front-back direction, and can perform variable display of symbols corresponding to the posture state of the sub display device 501. it can. FIG. 6 shows the posture state of the sub display device 501 according to the modified example 1 of the third embodiment.
4 will be described. FIG. 64 is a diagram illustrating an example of a posture change state and a variable display of the sub display device according to the modified example 1 of the third embodiment. 64(1A), (2A), (3A)
It is an image figure which looked at the display apparatus 41 and the sub display apparatus 501 from the side. Figure 64 (1B)
, (2B) and (3B) are diagrams showing a variable display mode in the sub display device 501. The gaming machine 10 can change the sub display device 501 into, for example, three posture states.

The drawing shown in (1A) shows a standard posture state (standard posture state) of the sub display device 501. The sub display device 501 is on the front surface of the display device 41 (main display device). The standard posture state of the sub display device 501 is a posture state in which the display surface of the display device 41 and the display surface of the sub display device 501 are substantially parallel to each other, and the display surface of the sub display device 501 faces the front. is there. At this time, the gaming machine 10 displays a symbol variation display by symbol switching on the sub display device 501 ((1B)).

The diagram (2A) shows the posture state in which the sub display device 501 is tilted backward (backward tilted posture state). The sub display device 501 is on the front surface of the display device 41. The rear tilted posture state of the sub display device 501 is a posture state in which the upper end side of the display surface of the sub display device 501 is closer to the display face of the display device 41 than the lower end side of the display surface, and the display surface of the sub display device 501 is It is in a posture of facing diagonally upward. At this time, the gaming machine 10 displays the symbol variation display by the downward vertical scroll on the sub display device 501 ((2B)).

The diagram (3A) shows a posture state in which the sub display device 501 is tilted forward (forward tilt posture state). The sub display device 501 is on the front surface of the display device 41. The front tilted posture state of the sub display device 501 is a posture state in which the lower end side of the display surface of the sub display device 501 is closer to the display face of the display device 41 than the upper end side of the display surface, and the display surface of the sub display device 501 is It is in a posture in which it faces diagonally downward. At this time, the gaming machine 10 performs the symbol variation display by the upward vertical scroll on the sub display device 501 ((3B)).

In this way, the gaming machine 10 can perform the symbol variation display according to the posture state of the sub display device 501. In addition, the gaming machine 10 may be capable of changing the posture state of the sub display device 501 in accordance with a player's operation, or may perform an effect in which the player intervenes in the symbol variable display. Such a gaming machine 10 can improve the interest of the player in the posture state (motion state) of the sub display device 501.

[Modification 2 of the third embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 of the modification 2 of the third embodiment can change the attitude state of the sub display device 501 in the left-right direction, and can perform variable display of symbols corresponding to the attitude state of the sub display device 501. it can. Regarding the attitude state of the sub display device 501 of the second modification of the third embodiment, FIG.
This will be described using 5. FIG. 65 is a diagram showing an example of a posture change state and a variable display of the sub display device according to the second modification of the third embodiment. The diagrams shown in FIGS. 65(1A), (2A), and (3A) are
It is an image view of the display device 41 and the sub display device 501 as viewed from above. FIG. 65 (1B)
, (2B) and (3B) are diagrams showing a variable display mode in the sub display device 501. The gaming machine 10 can change the sub display device 501 into, for example, three posture states.

The drawing shown in (1A) shows a standard posture state (standard posture state) of the sub display device 501. The sub display device 501 is on the front surface of the display device 41 (main display device). The standard posture state of the sub display device 501 is a posture state in which the display surface of the display device 41 and the display surface of the sub display device 501 are substantially parallel to each other, and the display surface of the sub display device 501 faces the front. is there. At this time, the gaming machine 10 displays a symbol variation display by symbol switching on the sub display device 501 ((1B)).

The drawing shown in (2A) shows a posture state in which the sub display device 501 is tilted rearward to the right (right tilt posture state). The sub display device 501 is on the front surface of the display device 41. In the right tilted posture state of the sub display device 501, the right end side of the display surface of the sub display device 501 is compared with the left end side of the display surface of the display device 4.
The display state of the sub display device 501 is a state in which the display surface of the sub display device 501 approaches the display surface of the sub display device 501. At this time, the gaming machine 10 displays a symbol variation display by rightward horizontal scrolling on the sub display device 501 ((2B)).

The drawing shown in (3A) shows a posture state (left tilt posture state) in which the sub-display device 501 is tilted backward to the left. The sub display device 501 is on the front surface of the display device 41. In the left tilted posture state of the sub display device 501, the left side of the display surface of the sub display device 501 is compared with the right side of the display surface of the display device 4.
1 is in an attitude state in which the display surface of the sub display device 501 is close to the display surface, and the display surface of the sub-display device 501 is in an attitude state in which the display surface faces diagonally left. At this time, the gaming machine 10 displays a symbol variation display by leftward horizontal scrolling on the sub display device 501 ((3B)).

In this way, the gaming machine 10 can perform the symbol variation display according to the posture state of the sub display device 501. In addition, the gaming machine 10 may be capable of changing the posture state of the sub display device 501 in accordance with a player's operation, or may perform an effect in which the player intervenes in the symbol variable display. Such a gaming machine 10 can improve the interest of the player in the posture state (motion state) of the sub display device 501.

[Modification 3 of the third embodiment]
The symbol array 615 of the gaming machine 10 of the third embodiment has three symbols and 2 positioned on both sides thereof.
Although one decorative display is repeatedly arranged, the gaming machine 10 of Modification 3 of the third embodiment repeatedly arranges only the symbols without including the decorative display. Sub-display device 501 according to modified example 3 of the third embodiment
The symbol variation due to the horizontal scroll in will be described with reference to FIG. 66. FIG. 66 shows the third
FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a variable display on the sub-display device of Modification 3 of the embodiment of FIG.

The sub-display device 501 sets a symbol array 616 in which symbols are arranged in the horizontal direction when the symbols are changed by horizontal scrolling. The symbol array 616 is a combination of winning symbols (for example, “1
, 1, 1”, “2, 2, 2”, etc.) are repeatedly arranged.

The gaming machine 10 performs horizontal scrolling while changing the posture state of the sub display device 501. First, the sub display device 501 displays the partial symbol array “4, 4, 5” shown in FIG. 66(1) as a large symbol group 601s in the standard posture state.

Next, the gaming machine 10 changes the posture state of the sub display device 501 from the standard posture state to the right tilt posture state. The gaming machine 10 moves the large symbol group 617 left on the symbol array 616 when the posture state of the sub display device 501 is the right tilt posture state. That is, the sub display device 501
Displays a symbol variation in which the large symbol group 617 horizontally scrolls to the right.

When the sub display device 501 horizontally scrolls one unit (one digit) from the partial symbol array "4, 4, 5" (see FIG. 66(1)) to the right, the partial symbol array "4" is displayed in the large symbol group 617. 4,4
(See FIG. 66(2)) is displayed.

Similarly, when the sub display device 501 horizontally scrolls one unit (one digit) from the partial symbol array “4, 4, 4” (see FIG. 66(2)) to the right, the partial symbols are arranged in the large symbol group 617. The array "3, 4, 4" (see FIG. 66(3)) is displayed.

Then, the sub display device 501 reaches the end of the symbol array 616, and when the partial symbol array “7, 1, 1” (see FIG. 66(4)) is displayed in the large symbol group 617, the posture state of the sub display device 501. Is changed from the right tilted posture state to the standard posture state. At this time, the gaming machine 10 can set the partial symbol array being displayed in the large symbol group 617 as a stop symbol. In addition, the gaming machine 10,
The partial symbol array being displayed in the large symbol group 617 is a temporary stop symbol and can be changed again.

For example, the gaming machine 10 changes the posture state of the sub display device 501 from the standard posture state to the left tilt posture state. The gaming machine 10 moves the large symbol group 617 to the right in the symbol array 616 when the posture state of the sub display device 501 is the left tilt posture state. That is, the sub display device 50
1 displays the symbol fluctuation in which the large symbol group 617 horizontally scrolls to the left.

When the sub display device 501 laterally scrolls one unit (one digit) from the partial symbol array "7, 1, 1" (see FIG. 66(4)) to the left, the partial symbol array "1," is displayed in the large symbol group 617. 1,1
(See FIG. 66(5)) is displayed.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 can change the posture state of the sub display device 501, and can also change the symbol according to the posture state of the sub display device 501. Further, the gaming machine 10 can repeatedly display the winning symbol combinations and the “missing” symbol combinations by simply moving the large symbol group 617 on the symbol array 616 by repeatedly arranging the winning symbol combinations. it can.

As a result, the gaming machine 10 can give a novel display effect to the player, and can further improve the interest. Further, the gaming machine 10 can improve the interest of the player in the posture state (motion state) of the sub display device 501.

Although the gaming machine 10 can change the posture state of the sub display device 501 with reference to the display device 41, it has an aspect that the posture state of the sub display device 501 can be changed with reference to the game board 30.

[Modification 4 of the third embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 of the modified example 4 of the third embodiment can produce a double reach by using a five-digit display (sub display device 501) composed of five 7-segment LEDs. Double reach produced using the sub display device 501 will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68. FIG. 67 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating an example of the variable display on the sub display device according to the modified example 4 of the third embodiment. FIG. 68 is a diagram (part 2) illustrating an example of the variable display on the sub display device according to the modified example 4 of the third embodiment.

The sub display device 501 shown in FIG. 67(1) is a large symbol group 61 during symbol fluctuation due to symbol switching.
8 is being displayed. The sub-display device 501 shown in FIG. 67(1) includes display portions 501b and 501.
The symbols are switched and displayed by using the three arranged in the center of c and 501d, and the decorative display (for example, the G segment is turned on and the other is turned off) is used by using the two located at the end of the display units 501a and 501e.
In the sub-display device 501 shown in FIG. 67(1), the display unit 501b is the left symbol 601L, the display unit 501c is the middle symbol 601C, and the display unit 501d is the right symbol 601R at high speed switching. Show. That is, the sub display device 501 shown in FIG. 67(1) indicates that the left symbol 601L, the right symbol 601R, and the middle symbol 601C are changing due to symbol switching.

In the sub-display device 501 shown in FIG. 67(2), the display section 501b displays the left symbol 601L as "4".
Indicates that a stop display (including temporary stop) is being performed with a black-filled number. In addition, FIG.
In the sub-display device 501 shown in 2), the display unit 501c displays the middle pattern 601C and the display unit 501d.
Cross hatching indicates that the right symbols 601R are being switched.

In the sub-display device 501 shown in FIG. 67(3), the display section 501b displays the left symbol 601L as "4".
It is indicated by a black-filled number that the display is stopped and displayed and that the display unit 501d is stopped and displayed on the right pattern 601R at "5". Further, the sub-display device 501 shown in FIG. 67(3) indicates that the display unit 501c is switching the middle symbol 601C by the cross hatching. That is, the sub-display device 501 shown in FIG. 67(3) shows a changing state that does not reach.

Then, when the reach is not derived, the sub display device 501 shown in FIG. 67(3) displays the middle symbol 601C in a stopped state to be in the “disengagement stop mode”. For example, the sub display device 501 shows the “disengagement stop mode” as shown in FIG. 68(6). In the sub display device 501, the display unit 501b is performing the stop display of the left symbol 601L at "4", the display unit 501c is performing the stop display of the middle symbol 601C at "6", and the display unit 501d is Right pattern 601R is "5"
Indicates that the display is stopped and is indicated by a black-filled number.

On the other hand, when deriving the reach, the sub display device 501 shown in FIG. 67(3) switches the decorative display of the display units 501a and 501e to the symbol display before the middle symbol 601C is stopped and displayed. At this time, the sub display device 501 displays the symbol displayed on the display unit 501b on the display unit 5
It is also displayed on 01a. The sub display device 501 also displays the symbol displayed on the display unit 501d on the display unit 501e.

As a result, the sub display device 501 exhibits the display mode as shown in FIG. 67(4). Figure 6
The sub display device 501 shown in 7(4) is a display mode that produces a double reach. The sub-display device 501 shows that the display units 501a and 501b are in the stop display at "4" and that the display units 501d and 501e are in the stop display at "5", respectively, by black-filled numbers. The cross-hatching indicates that the display unit 501c is switching symbols.

The sub display device 501 sets two large symbol groups 619 and 620 instead of the large symbol group 618. Thereby, the sub display device 501, the reach by the large symbol group 619, and the large symbol group 6
A double reach consisting of a reach by 20 is produced.

The large symbol group 619 includes three symbols arranged from the left end of the display portions 501a, 501b, 501c as a left symbol 601L, a middle symbol 601C, and a right symbol 601R. The large symbol group 620 includes three symbols arranged from the right end of the display portions 501c, 501d, 501e as a left symbol 601L, a middle symbol 601C, and a right symbol 601R. That is, the display unit 501a displays a large symbol group 619.
The left symbol 601L is displayed, and the display unit 501b displays the middle symbol 6 in the large symbol group 619.
01C is displayed, the display unit 501c displays the right symbol 601R in the large symbol group 619 and the left symbol 601L in the large symbol group 620, and the display unit 501d displays the middle symbol 601C in the large symbol group 620. The part 501e displays the right symbol 601R in the large symbol group 620.

Thereby, the sub display device 501 displays the reach waiting for the stop of the right symbol 601R in the large symbol group 619, and the reach waiting for the stop of the left symbol 601L in the large symbol group 620.

Then, when deriving the hit stop mode in the large symbol group 619, the sub display device 501 stops and displays "4" on the display unit 501c as shown in FIG. 68(1). As a result, the sub display device 501 displays the hit stop mode in the large symbol group 619, and displays the “outfall stop mode” in the large symbol group 620. Then, the sub display device 501, as shown in FIG. 68(2), is based on the large symbol group 619 in which the hit stop mode is derived from the large symbol group 619 stop mode and the large symbol group 620 stop mode. The stop mode in the large symbol group 618 is displayed.

Further, when deriving the hit stop mode in the large symbol group 620, the sub display device 501 stops and displays “5” on the display unit 501c as shown in FIG. 68(3). As a result, the sub display device 501 displays the hit stop mode on the large symbol group 620, and displays the "disengagement stop mode" on the large symbol group 619. Then, the sub-display device 501, based on the large symbol group 620 from which the hit stop mode is derived from the stop state of the large symbol group 619 and the stop state of the large symbol group 620, as shown in FIG. 68(4). The stop mode in the large symbol group 618 is displayed.

Further, when deriving the "disengagement stop mode" in the large symbol group 620, the sub display device 501 stops and displays, for example, "6" on the display unit 501c as shown in FIG. 68(5). As a result, the sub display device 501 displays the "disengagement stop mode" on the large symbol groups 619 and 620. Then, the sub display device 501 displays the stop mode in the large symbol group 618 as shown in FIG. 68(6) based on the stop mode of the large symbol group 619 and the stop mode of the large symbol group 620.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 can produce a double reach using the sub display device 501.
The gaming machine 10 of the above-described third embodiment (including the modified example) has the following features in one aspect.

(1) The gaming machine 10 includes a display device (sub-display device 501) and control means (game control device 1).
00, production control device 300). The display device can change its posture. The control means causes the display device to display the first state when the display device is changed to the first posture (for example, the left tilt posture state).
Display effect (for example, horizontal scrolling in the left direction) is displayed, and the second display effect (for example, horizontal scrolling in the right direction) is displayed on the display device when the display device is changed to the second posture (for example, right tilt posture state). Is displayed.

(2) The gaming machine 10 of (1) is provided with the back side display device (display device 41) at a position overlapping the display device on the back side of the display device (sub display device 501). Furthermore, the control means of (1) is
When the display device is changed to the first posture, a third display effect (for example, a background 613 tilted corresponding to the tilt of the sub display device 501, a character 612 that is slid to the left) is displayed on the rear display device. When the display device is changed to the second posture,
Display effect (for example, a background 613 tilted corresponding to the tilt of the sub display device 501, a character 612 that is slid on the right side) is displayed.

(3) The gaming machine 10 has display means (sub-display device 501) and control means (game control device 1).
00, production control device 300). The display means can display a variable display game by arranging five display devices (7-segment type LEDs) capable of displaying symbols respectively in a row. The control means is in the first state in which the variable display game can be displayed on the first effective line (large symbol group 618) formed by three of the five indicators (see FIG. 67(3)). And the second effective line formed by three indicators from one side end of the five indicators (large symbol group 619
) And a second state in which the variable display game can be displayed on the third effective line (large symbol group 620) formed by three indicators from the other side end of the five indicators (FIG. 67). (See (4))
And can be switch-controlled.

[Fourth Embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 of the fourth embodiment has a gaming property that can display the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 at the same time. The playability of the gaming machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 69 is a diagram showing an example of the game state transition diagram and the probability variation state of the fourth embodiment.

FIG. 69(1) shows a state transition diagram regarding the gaming state of the gaming machine 10. The gaming machine 10 sets the normal state St1, the big hit state St2, the specific state 1St3, and the specific state 2St4 as the main gaming states.

The normal state St1 is a main gaming state, in which the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are both low-probability states, and there is no normal electric power support. Normal state St
1 is a game state in which a left-handed game is guided to the player. In the gaming machine 10, in the left-handed game, the game ball flows down on the lower left side of the center case 40 in the game area 32. Therefore, in the normal state St1, the gaming machine 10 mainly has a gaming property in which a game ball is won in the starting winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) and waits for a big hit. That is, the gaming machine 10 has the gaming property of waiting for the occurrence of the big hit derived by the special figure 1 variable display game in the normal state St1. The gaming machine 10 has a transition condition Tr from the normal state St1 to the big hit state St2.
12 is a big hit.

The big hit state St2 is a big hit state derived from the special figure 1 variable display game, and the special figure 2
It is a gaming state including a jackpot state derived by the variable display game. The gaming machine 10,
In the big hit state, the special variation winning device (upper special winning opening, big winning opening 2) with the big hit derived by the special figure 1 variable display game and the big hit derived by the special figure 2 variable display game 3
Convert 8 to open.

The gaming machine 10 sets the end of the big hit as a transition condition from the big hit state St2 to another game state,
Among them, the game state after the big hit is low probability and there is no ordinary electric power support is set as the transition condition Tr21 from the big hit state St2 to the normal state St1, and the gaming state after the big hit is high probability and with ordinary electric power support is specified from the big hit state St2. As a transition condition Tr23 to the state 1St3, the gaming state after the big hit is high probability and there is no universal power support from the big hit state St2 to the specific state 2St
The transition condition to 24 is Tr24.

The specific state 1St3 is a gaming state in which both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are high-probability states, and normal electric power support is provided. The specific state 1St3 is a game state in which the player is guided to the right-handed game. In the gaming machine 10, in a right-handed game, a game ball flows down on the right side of the center case 40 in the game area 32. Therefore, the gaming machine 10
In the specific state 1St3, the game ball has a game characteristic that waits for the occurrence of a big hit mainly by causing the normal variation winning device 37 (starting opening 1) to win a game ball. That is, the gaming machine 10 has the specific state 1St.
3 has a playability of waiting for the occurrence of a big hit derived from the special figure 1 variable display game. The gaming machine 10 determines that the transition condition Tr32 from the specific state 1St3 to the big hit state St2 is a big hit. Further, the gaming machine 10 sets the transition condition Tr34 from the specific state 1St3 to the specific state 2St4 to the end of the universal communication support. For example, the gaming machine 10 ends the normal electric power support when the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are variably displayed a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) in the specific state 1St3.

In the specific state 2St4, both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are high-probability states, and there is no gaming support in the gaming state. The specific state 2St4 is a gaming state in which the player is guided to the right-handed game. In the gaming machine 10, in a right-handed game, a game ball flows down on the right side of the center case 40 in the game area 32. Therefore, the gaming machine 10
In the specific state 2St4, mainly has a game playability in which a game ball is won in the starting winning opening 92 (starting opening 2) and waits for a big hit. That is, the gaming machine 10 has the gaming property of waiting for the occurrence of the big hit derived by the special figure 2 variable display game in the specific state 2St4. The gaming machine 10 determines that the transition condition Tr42 from the specific state 2St4 to the big hit state St2 is a big hit.

Here, the probability variation state of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game shown in FIG. 69(2) will be described. In the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game, a small hit can be derived in addition to a big hit. The gaming machine 10 converts the special variation winning device 38 into an open state due to the occurrence of a big hit in the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game. On the other hand, the gaming machine 10 converts the special variation winning device 95 into an open state when a small hit of the special figure 1 variable display game occurs, and causes the special variable winning device 38 to open by a small hit of the special figure 2 variable display game. Convert to open state. The small hit in the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit with a relatively high value because the number of prize balls that can be obtained is larger than that in the small figure 1 variable display game.

In the special display 1 variable display game, a low probability is set for both the big hit probability and the small hit probability, a high probability is set for the big hit probability, and a low probability is set for the small hit probability in the high probability state. For example, in the special figure 1 variable display game, the jackpot probability is halved in the low probability state
50 and 1/50 in the high probability state. In addition, in the special figure 1 variable display game, the small hit probability is 1/10000 (low probability state).

In the special figure 2 variable display game, a low probability is set for both the big hit probability and the small hit probability, and a high probability is set for both the big hit probability and the small hit probability in the high probability state. For example, in the special figure 2 variable display game, the jackpot probability is 1/250 in the low probability state and 1/50 in the high probability state. Also, in the special figure 2 variable display game, the small hit probability is 1/10000 in the low probability state and 9999/10000 in the high probability state.

As a result, the gaming machine 10 has a game property of increasing the number of winning prize balls by a big hit in the big hit state St2, and a game property of increasing the number of winning prize balls by a small hit in the specific state 2St4.
Here, regarding the configuration of the display screen of the display device 41 in the specific state 2St4, FIG.
This will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 70 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating an example of the display screen on the display device of the fourth embodiment. FIG. 71 is a diagram (part 2) illustrating an example of the display screen on the display device of the fourth embodiment. FIG. 72 is a diagram (part 3) illustrating an example of the display screen on the display device of the fourth embodiment.

70(1) shows the display contents of the display device 41 and the sub display device 501 in the specific state 2St4.
). The display content of the display device 41 shown in FIG. 70(1) shows a state in which the symbols are changing in the variable display game. The display device 41 includes the small symbol 625, the special figure 1 hold number display 603, the special figure 2 hold number display 604, and the game guide 610 in the display content of the variable display game during the stop of the symbol. The small design 625 is one of the decorative designs and is displayed in a small size on the peripheral portion of the display device 41. The small symbol 625 is displayed as a one-digit symbol variation.

Further, the display device 41 sets the effect area 622 and displays the effect display 623. For example, the production display 623 produces a game of two characters (a main character (left) and an enemy character (right)).

Further, the gaming machine 10 displays the sub display device 5 on the front surface of the display device 41 in the specific state 2St4.
01 is made to appear, and the cumulative number of prize balls acquired during the specific state 2St4 is displayed on the sub display device 501. The cumulative number of winning prize balls is reset in the normal state St1. For example, the sub display device 501 indicates that the cumulative number of winning prize balls is “410”. The cumulative number of prize balls is
It may be the cumulative number of prize balls acquired in the big hit state St2, the specific state 1St3, and the specific state 2St4.

The display content of the display device 41 shown in FIG. 70(2) shows the state when the symbols are stopped in the variable display game. The display device 41 displays “◯” as the small hit symbol of the small symbol 625. Further, the display device 41 sets the effect area 622 and displays the effect display 624. For example, the effect display 624 effects the victory of the main character (left) of the two characters (main character (left) and enemy character (right)). As a result, the gaming machine 10 guides the occurrence of a small hit with the small symbol 625 and the effect area 622.

The display content of the display device 41 shown in FIG. 71(1) shows a state during a small hit in the variable display game. The display device 41 displays “◯” as the small hit symbol of the small symbol 625. Also,
The display device 41 displays a large design 626 in the effect area 622. The large design 626 is one of the decorative designs and is displayed large in the center of the effect area 622. The large symbol 626 is displayed with the symbol variation omitted. The display device 41 displays, for example, white “7” (hereinafter, “white 7”) as the small hit symbol of the large symbol 626. Therefore, the large symbol 626 is a symbol for notifying that the result of the variable display game was a small hit.

The display content of the display device 41 shown in FIG. 71(2) also shows a state during a small hit in the variable display game. The display device 41 displays “◯” as the small hit symbol of the small symbol 625. Further, the display device 41 displays a large symbol 627 in the effect area 622. The large design 627 is one of the decorative designs and is displayed large in the center of the effect area 622. The large symbol 627 is displayed with the symbol variation omitted. The display device 41 displays, for example, gold (indicated by hatching) “7” (hereinafter, “gold 7”) as a small hit symbol of the large symbol 627. Therefore, the large symbol 627 is also a symbol for notifying that the result of the variable display game was a small hit.

However, the gaming machine 10 does not display the large symbol 627 only when the result of the variable display game is a small hit. In the gaming machine 10, the result of the variable display game is a small hit,
And when the specific state 2St4 continues a predetermined number of times, the large symbol 627 is displayed with a predetermined probability.

For example, in the gaming machine 10, when there is no starting memory for deriving a big hit among the pending starting memories, instead of the large symbol 626 (that is, “white 7”), the large symbol 627 (that is, “gold 7”).
Can be displayed. Accordingly, the gaming machine 10 can inform the player that there is no starting memory for deriving a big hit among the pending starting memories. For example, since the display device 41 shown in FIG. 71(2) displays "4" on the special figure 2 number-of-holds display 604, it can inform that no big hit is included in any of the four starting memories. it can.

In the specific state 2St4, the gaming machine 10 can display "Friday 7" to guide the specific state 2St4 to continue until at least the pending start memory is exhausted. Since the gaming machine 10 has a game property of increasing the number of prize balls to be won by a small hit in the specific state 2St4, it is possible to improve the enjoyment that the player feels by displaying "Kin 7".

Further, the display device 41 shown in FIG. 71(2) displays a state guidance display 628 in the effect area 622. The state guidance display 628 is a strip-shaped message display, which is vertically arranged on both sides of the effect area 622, displays the message “absolutely invincible”, and guides that the specific state 2St4 continues. The gaming machine 10 displays “Friday 7” and the state guidance display 628 at the same time,
It is possible to further enhance the interest of the player.

The gaming machine 10 has a large symbol 626 (that is, “white 7”) and a large symbol 627 (that is, “white”).
The cumulative number of awarded prize balls is updated even while displaying "7". For example, the sub display device 501 is
This indicates that the cumulative number of awarded balls is “420”.

FIG. 72(1) shows the display content of the display device 41 of the next fluctuation after displaying "Friday 7". The display device 41 shown in FIG. 72(1) shows a state in which the symbols are changing in the variable display game. The display device 41 continuously displays the state guidance display 628 in the effect area 622 while the specific state 2St4 continues for a predetermined number of times after displaying “Friday 7”. Thereby, the gaming machine 1
0 indicates that the specific state 2St is displayed by the state guidance display 628 even when the display of “Friday 7” is not displayed.
Can guide the continuation of 4. In addition, the gaming machine 10 updates the cumulative number of winning prize balls even during the change of the symbol after displaying “7”. For example, the sub display device 501 indicates that the cumulative number of winning prize balls is “440”.

The display content of the display device 41 shown in FIG. 72(2) shows a state when the symbols are stopped in the variable display game. The display device 41 displays “◯” as the small hit symbol of the small symbol 625. The display device 41 displays the state guidance display 6 in the effect area 622 while the specific state 2St4 continues for a predetermined number of times not only during the symbol variation of the small symbol 625 but also when the symbol of the small symbol 625 is stopped.
28 is continuously displayed. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can guide the continuation of the specific state 2St4 by the display of the state guidance display 628 even when the display of “Friday 7” is not displayed. In addition, the gaming machine 10 updates the cumulative number of winning prize balls even while the symbols are stopped after displaying “7”. For example, the sub display device 501 indicates that the cumulative number of winning prize balls is “450”.

After this, the gaming machine 10, as shown in FIG. 70 (1) or FIG. 70 (2), large symbol 6
26 (that is, "white 7") and a large pattern 627 (that is, "gold 7") are displayed. The case where the gaming machine 10 derives a small hit has been described, but when deriving a big hit or “out”, a corresponding variable display is performed and a corresponding result is derived.

Although the large symbols 626 and 627 are displayed as decorative patterns, they may be displayed as an effect display during a small hit.
In addition, the large design 627 is displayed when there is no starting memory for deriving a big hit in the pending starting memories, but there is a starting memory for deriving a specific result mode among the pending starting memories. It may be displayed when there is not. For example, the large symbol 627 may be displayed when there is no starting memory for deriving a big hit that does not accompany the probability variation among the pending starting memories.

Next, a display mode of a large symbol selected at the time of a small hit will be described with reference to FIG. 73. Figure 7
FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of a condition-based large symbol display mode at the time of a small hit in the fourth embodiment.
When the special figure 2 holding number display 604 is “1” or more, the gaming machine 10 does not generate a big hit in all of the starting memories of “1” or more in addition to the starting memories during digestion. The display mode of the large symbol selected at the time of winning is set to either "gold 7" or "white 7". For example, the gaming machine 10 has a 10% probability of selecting "gold 7" and a 90% probability of selecting "white 7".

It should be noted that the gaming machine 10 can reserve the selection of "gold 7" for the small hit in the variable display after the next time within the range of the number of stored memories when "gold 7" is selected. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can realize continuous selection of "gold 7". For example, the gaming machine 10 can select “Gold 7” five times in a row including the start memory during the digestion when the special figure 2 hold number display 604 is “4”.

In addition, when the special machine 2 holding number display 604 is “1” or more, the gaming machine 10 may bring out a big hit with a starting memory of “1” or more. The display mode is “white 7”. The gaming machine 10, when the special figure 2 hold number display 604 is "0", regardless of whether or not to derive a big hit in the starting memory during digestion, the display mode of the big symbol selected during the small hit is "white". 7”.

Thereby, the gaming machine 10 is in the specific state 2 by setting the display mode of the large symbol to "gold 7".
It is possible to guide the continuation of St4. Further, the gaming machine 10 changes the display mode of the large symbol to “white 7
It is possible to guide the continuation possibility of the specific state 2St4.

It should be noted that the gaming machine 10 has a 10% probability of selecting “Gold 7” and a 90% probability of “White 7” when the display mode of the large symbol is either “Gold 7” or “White 7”. However, the selection probability may be changed according to the number of stored memories.

For example, the gaming machine 10 has a 10% probability of "4" when the special figure 2 hold number display 604 is "4".
Gold 7" is selected, with a probability of 90%, "White 7" is selected, and when the special figure 2 reserved number display 604 is "1", there is a 30% probability of selecting "Gold 7". “White 7” may be selected with a probability. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can increase the appearance rate of "Gold 7" while suppressing the appearance rate of "Gold 7" as a whole while the number of starting memories that the player is frustrated with is small. Also,
The gaming machine 10 selects "Gold 7" with a probability of 10% and "White 7" with a probability of 90% when the special figure 2 hold number display 604 is "4", and the special figure 2 hold number When the display 604 is "1", "gold 7" may be selected with a probability of 1% and "white 7" may be selected with a probability of 99%. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can improve the operating rate by giving a privilege to a state in which the number of starting memories is large, while suppressing the appearance rate of "gold 7" as a whole.

Next, the small hit symbol determination process for determining the display mode (small hit symbol) of the large symbol displayed during the small hit in the specific state 2St4 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 74 is a view showing a flowchart of the small hit symbol determination processing in the effect control device of the fourth embodiment.

The small hit symbol determination process is a process performed by the control unit (CPU 311) of the effect control device 300. The small hit symbol determination process is step D23 of the main process (see FIG. 44).
Is a process executed by the control unit when in the specific state 2St4.

[Step D91] The control unit determines whether or not the result mode derived from both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game is “out”. The control unit proceeds to step D101 if the result mode derived from both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game is “out”, and proceeds to step D92 if not “out”.

[Step D92] The control unit determines whether or not the number of notification symbol reservations is “1” or more. The control unit proceeds to step D98 when the number of notification symbol reservations is “1” or more, and is less than “1” (
That is, if it is "0"), the process proceeds to step D93. The number of notification symbols reserved is the number of starting memories (number of reservations) that reserves the selection of "gold 7" (notification symbol) for the small hit in the variable display after the next within the range of the number of starting memories.

[Step D93] The control unit obtains information (starting memory number information) regarding the starting memory of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game. The starting memory number information includes the starting memory numbers of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game, and the result mode derived from each starting memory.

[Step D94] The control unit determines whether or not there is a specific result mode (specification result) in the startup memory number information. The control unit proceeds to step D100 when there is a specific result in the starting memory number information, and proceeds to step D95 when there is no specific result. The identification result may be simply a big hit or a big hit without any probability variation, and may be set arbitrarily.

[Step D95] The control unit performs a notification lottery.
[Step D96] The control unit determines whether the result of the notification lottery is winning or losing. The control unit
If the result of the notification lottery is winning, the process proceeds to step D97, and if the result is unsuccessful, step D1
Go to 00.

[Step D97] The control unit sets the number of notification symbol reservations. The control unit may set the number of starting memories as the number of notification symbol reservations, or may set the number of starting memory as the upper limit as the number of notification symbol reservations.

[Step D98] The control unit sets the notification symbol, that is, "gold 7".
[Step D99] The control unit decrements the notification symbol reservation count by "1" and ends the small hit symbol determination process.

[Step D100] The control unit sets a non-notification symbol, that is, sets "white 7" and ends the small hit symbol determination process.
[Step D101] Since the control unit does not derive the small hit as a result of the variable display, the display of the small hit symbol is canceled.

[Step D102] The control unit decrements the notification symbol reservation count by "1" and ends the small hit symbol determination process.
In this way, the gaming machine 10 can determine the display mode of the large symbol displayed during the small hit in the specific state 2St4 according to the result mode derived from the starting memory. In addition, when the gaming machine 10 selects “gold 7”, the gaming machine 10 can reserve the selection of “gold 7” for the small hit in the variable display from the next time onward within the range of the starting memory number.

Thus, the gaming machine 10 can inform the player that there is no starting memory for deriving a specific result mode (eg, big hit) among the pending starting memories. Such a gaming machine 10 has an aspect that the player's interest in the pending announcement effect can be increased.

Next, an example of selecting a small hit symbol when the small hits continue will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 75: is a figure which shows an example of the pending|holding memory of a 4th embodiment, and a small hitting pattern.
The pending start-up memory 630 represents the number of start-up memories of the pending start-up memory by the number of circle display, the start-up memory that derives the specific result by hatching display, and the start-up memory that does not derive the specific result by white display. Represent. The in-digestion starting memory 631 represents the presence or absence of the starting memory with respect to the starting memory during digestion by the presence or absence of the circle display, the starting memory for deriving the specific result by the hatching display, and the starting memory not deriving the specific result by the white display. Represent. A thick line circle indicates that it is reserved as a notification symbol, and a thin line circle indicates that it is not reserved as a notification symbol.

In the selection example of the small hit symbol shown in FIG. 75(1), since there is a starting memory for deriving the third specific result of the pending starting memory 630, the gaming machine 10 derives the starting memory 631 during digestion. As a result, the large design 626 (that is, "white 7") is displayed.

The selection example of the small hitting pattern shown in FIG. 75(2) is the starting memory 630 on hold and the starting memory 6 during digestion.
None of 31 has a starting memory to derive a specific result. The gaming machine 10 displays the large symbol 626 as a result derived by the in-digestion starting memory 631 when the game is lost in the notification lottery in step D95 of the small hit symbol determination process.

The selection example of the small hitting pattern shown in FIG. 75(3) is the starting memory 630 on hold and the starting memory 6 during digestion.
None of 31 has a starting memory to derive a specific result. The gaming machine 10 displays a large symbol 627 (that is, "Friday 7") as a result derived by the in-digestion starting memory 631 when the notification lottery in step D95 of the small hit symbol determination process is won. At this time, the gaming machine 10 reserves the notification symbol within the range of the number of stored in the starting memory 631 during digestion (for example, 3).

The selection example of the small hit symbol shown in FIG. 75(4) is the next variation of the selection example of the small hit symbol shown in FIG. 75(3). The selection example of the small hit symbol shown in FIG. 75(4) displays the large symbol 627 as a result derived from the in-digestion starting memory 631 because the notification symbol is reserved.

The selection example of the small hit symbol shown in FIG. 75(5) is the next variation of the selection example of the small hit symbol shown in FIG. 75(4). The selection example of the small hit symbol shown in FIG. 75(5) displays the large symbol 627 as a result derived by the in-digestion starting memory 631 because the notification symbol is reserved.

The selection example of the small hit symbol shown in FIG. 75(6) is the next variation of the selection example of the small hit symbol shown in FIG. 75(5). The selection example of the small hit symbol shown in FIG. 75(6) displays the large symbol 627 as a result derived from the in-digestion starting memory 631 because the notification symbol is reserved. In addition,
In the selection example of FIG. 75(5) and the selection example of FIG. 75(6), a new starting memory is generated in the pending starting memory 630, but the new starting memory is not reserved as a notification symbol. Although the new starting memory is not the starting memory for deriving the specific result, it is large in the selection example of FIG. 75(5) and the selection example of FIG. 75(6) when it is the starting memory for deriving the specific result. Pattern 6
27 may be replaced with a large design 626.

The gaming machine 10 of the fourth embodiment described above has the following features in one aspect.
(1) The gaming machine 10 is a gaming machine capable of storing a plurality of starting memories as execution rights of the variable display game, and includes control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300). When the control means causes the display means (display device 41) to display the predetermined identification information corresponding to the result mode of the variable display game, the control means specifies the result as the result of the variable display game in the start memory stored as the execution right. When there is nothing to derive the result mode (big hit), the first identification information (for example, “gold 7
)) is displayed on the display means, and second identification information different from the first identification information when there is a start memory stored as an execution right that derives a specific result mode as a result of the variable display game. (For example, other symbols including "white 7") are displayed on the display means.

(2) Even if the control means of (1) derives a specific result mode as the result of the variable display game among the starting memories stored as the execution right, the result mode of the variable display game is the specific result. When the predetermined identification information is displayed on the display means when the mode is not derived, the third identification information (for example, "white 7") different from the first identification information (for example, "gold 7") is displayed. Display on the means.

(3) The control means of (1) displays the first display effect (with the state guide display 628) on the display means when the first identification information (for example, “Fri 7”) is displayed on the display means. Then, when the second identification information (for example, other symbol including “white 7”) is displayed on the display means, the second display effect (without the state guidance display 628) is displayed on the display means.

(4) The control means of (3) derives the result mode corresponding to the start memory stored as at least the execution right when the first identification information (for example, “Gold 7”) is displayed on the display means. Until then, the first display effect (with the state guide display 628) is continuously displayed on the display means.

[Fifth Embodiment]
Next, the gaming machine 10 of the fifth embodiment will be described. The gaming machine 10 of the fifth embodiment is different in that it has a gaming board that replaces the gaming board 30 of the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment. In the description of the fifth embodiment, the same components as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, a game board provided in the game machine 10 of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 76 is a front view showing an example of the game board of the fifth embodiment.
On the surface of the game board 3000, a substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 is formed. The game area 32 is surrounded by resin side cases and guide rails 31 provided at the four corners of the game board 3000, respectively. In the game area 32, a center case 40 provided with a display device (variable display device) 41 is arranged at substantially the center. The display device 41 is attached to a recess provided in the center case 40 at a position deeper than the front surface of the center case 40. Further, on the upper part of the center case 40, an effect lamp 540 whose display mode can be changed, and a board effect device 550 for effecting a game by operating.
, 551 are provided.

Below the center case 40 in the game area 32, a start winning opening 36 (first starting winning opening, starting winning area) for providing a start condition of the special figure variation display game is provided. The game ball that has won the starting winning opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3).

Further, on the right side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, there is provided a normal symbol starting gate (universal figure starting gate) 34 which gives a starting condition of the general figure variable display game. The gaming ball that has won the universal figure starting gate 34 is detected by the gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3).

Further, below the starting winning opening 36, a normal variation winning device 37 (second starting winning opening, starting winning area) for providing a start condition of the special figure variation display game is provided. Ordinary variable winning device 37
Is provided with a movable member 37b that can be converted into a state in which the game ball can easily flow in by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side tilts to the right. This movable member 37b is a closed position where the game ball cannot flow in at all times. The closed state (a disadvantageous state for the player) is maintained. Then, when the result of the universal figure variation display game is a predetermined stop display mode, the universal electric solenoid 3 as a drive device is used.
By 7c (see FIG. 3), it is possible to change the game ball into an open state (an advantageous state for the player) in which the game balls easily flow into the normal variation winning device 37. The game ball that has won the normal variation winning device 37 is detected by the starting opening 2 switch 92a (see FIG. 3).

Further, below the normal variation winning device 37, an out port 30a for collecting game balls that have not won a prize is provided.
Further, on the lower right side of the center case 40 in the game area 32 and below the universal figure starting gate 34, a state in which a game ball is not accepted and a state in which it is easily accepted are converted depending on the result of the special figure variation display game. A possible special variable winning device (big winning opening) 38 is provided.

The special variation winning device 38 has an opening/closing member (opening/closing door) 38c, and the opening/closing member 38c closes the special winning opening depending on the result of the special figure variation display game as an auxiliary game (a disadvantage to the player. The open/close member 38c retreats from the normal closed state) to an open state (a state advantageous to the player) in which the game ball flowing down the game area 32 can be received. That is, the special variation winning device 38 is provided with a special winning opening that is opened and closed by the opening/closing member 38c driven by the special winning opening 2 solenoid 38b (see FIG. 3) as a drive device. During the big hit game state (first special game state, second special game state) as a result of the variable display game, the game balls flow into the special winning opening by converting the big winning opening from the closed state to the open state. And a predetermined game value (prize ball) is given to the player.
A special winning opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 3) is provided inside the special winning opening (winning area) as a detecting means for detecting a game ball that has entered the special winning opening. ..

Further, a general winning opening (not shown) is arranged on the lower left side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, and one general winning opening 351 is arranged on the right side of the center case 40. The game ball that has won the general winning opening 351 is detected by the winning opening switch 35a (see FIG. 3).

In addition, the game ball detected by the winning opening switch 35a, a collection flow path (not shown) for collecting the game ball by the distribution gate 353 arranged immediately below, and a production flow path for reusing the game ball for production. 354. The distribution gate can switch the distribution state by an actuator (for example, a solenoid or a motor) controlled by the effect control device 300. In addition,
The effect control device 300 receives a command transmitted based on the fact that the game control device 100 detects the game ball with the winning opening switch 35a, and the switching state of the sorting gate 353, based on the effect flow of the game ball. The downflow of path 354 can be detected.

The effect flow path 354 is a flow path from below the general winning opening 351 to the effect starting memory display 355 below the center case 40, and is formed by, for example, a tubular transparent member and wins the general winning opening 351. Make the game ball visible. The effect flow path 354 is one form of a flow path for collecting the game balls, and isolates the game ball flowing down the effect flow path 354 from the game ball flowing down the game area 32.

The effect start memory display 355 is a display device that displays the start memory (effect start memory) of the effect game that obtains the execution right by the game balls flowing down the effect flow path 354. Sub display device 530
Displays the effect game based on the effect starting memory displayed by the effect starting memory display 355.

The effect control device 300 can use the reception of a command transmitted based on the game control device 100 detecting the game ball by the winning opening switch 35a as a trigger for generating the effect start memory. In addition, the production control device 300 sets the generation trigger of the production start memory to a predetermined condition (
For example, it may be limited to the time of receiving a command in a predetermined game state or when the number of effect start memories is equal to or less than a predetermined upper limit number).

Next, the sub display device 530 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 77 is a diagram showing an example of the sub display device according to the fifth embodiment.
The sub display device 530 includes three matrix display units 530L, 530C and 530R. The matrix display portions 530L, 530C, and 530R have 56 petal-shaped dot display portions 531 arranged in 8 rows and 7 columns, and each dot display portion 531 can be displayed by gradation control (for example, 256 gradations). The matrix display units 530L, 530C, and 530R are control targets of the effect control device 300.

The sub display device 530 can display a 3-digit symbol variation in the effect game, the matrix display unit 530L is in charge of the variable display of the left symbol, the matrix display unit 530C is in charge of the variable display of the middle symbol, and the matrix The display unit 530R is in charge of the variable display of the right symbol.

The sub display device 530 has three matrix display parts 530L, 530C, 530R.
Can be used as one matrix display device having 8 rows and 21 columns. Further, the sub display device 530 can perform not only the symbol variation but also other displays, and for example, it is possible to perform a realistic character display using gradation control.

Next, display modes of the effect starting memory display 355 and the effect starting memory display 355 will be described with reference to FIG. 78. FIG. 78 is a diagram showing an example of the effect starting memory display and the display mode thereof according to the fifth embodiment.

FIG. 78(1) shows an overview of the effect starting memory display 355. The production start memory display 355 has five display portions 355a, 355b, 355c, 355d, 355e on the petals. The five display units 355a, 355b, 355c, 355d, 355e are, for example, full color L
It is an ED and can be turned on, turned off, or blinked, and can be turned on in any color. The display units 355a, 355b, 355c, 355d, 355e share one changing start memory display and four pending start memory displays. The display units 355a, 355b,
Each of 355c, 355d, and 355e can change the sharing of one changing starting memory display and four holding starting memory displays at any time. The display units 355a, 355b, 355c, 35
5d and 355e are control targets of the effect control device 300.

FIG. 78(2) shows an example of the display mode of the effect starting memory display 355. Performance start memory display 3
55 is a display unit 355a, 355b, when the variable state is "stop" and the number of stored memories is "0".
All of 355c, 355d, and 355e are turned off.

The production start memory display 355 shown in the display example 1 lights the display unit 355a as an initial state when the variation state is “stop” and the number of stored memories is “1”. At this time, the display unit 355a takes charge of the first pending start-up memory display.

Display example 2 is a display example following display example 1. The production start memory display 355 shown in the display example 2 lights the display unit 355a as the initial state when the variation state is “stop” and the number of stored memories is “1”. At this time, the display unit 355a takes charge of the first pending start-up memory display.

The display example 3 is a display example following the display example 2. The effect starting memory display 355 shown in the display example 3 blinks the display unit 355a when the fluctuation state is “variation” and the number of starting memories is “0”. At this time, the display unit 355a takes charge of the changing start memory display.

The display example 4 is a display example following the display example 3. The production start memory display 355 shown in the display example 4 blinks the display unit 355a when the variation state is “variation” and the number of start memory is “1”.
Turn on 55b. At this time, the display unit 355a is in charge of the starting memory display during the change, and the display unit 3
55b is in charge of the first pending start-up memory display.

The display example 5 is a display example following the display example 4. The production start memory display 355 shown in the display example 5 turns off the display unit 355a when the changing state is “stop” and the number of start memory is “1”, and the display unit 3 is displayed.
Turn on 55b. At this time, the display unit 355b takes charge of the first pending start-up memory display.

The display example 6 is a display example following the display example 5. The effect starting memory display 355 shown in the display example 6 blinks the display unit 355b when the fluctuation state is “variation” and the number of starting memories is “0”. At this time, the display unit 355b is in charge of displaying the changing start memory. That is, the effect start memory display 3
Even if the variable state 55 is the variable state “changed” and the starting memory number is “0”, different display modes can be taken depending on the previous states as in the display example 3 and the display example 6.

The display example n is a display example in which four start memories are generated after the display example 6. The effect starting memory display 355 shown in the display example n is the display unit 3 when the changing state is “changing” and the starting memory number is “4”.
55b is blinked and all the display portions 355a, 355c, 355d, 355e are turned on.
At this time, the display unit 355b is in charge of the changing start memory display, the display unit 355c is in charge of the first pending start memory display, the display unit 355d is in charge of the second pending start memory display, The display unit 355e is in charge of the third on-hold starting memory display, and the display unit 355a is in charge of the fourth on-hold starting memory display.

As a result, the effect starting memory display 355 realizes one changing starting memory display and four pending starting memory displays by eliminating the need for shift display. Since the effect starting memory display 355 does not require the player to grasp the correspondence between the display unit before the shift and the display unit after the shift, the player can easily understand the starting memory display. ..

Note that the display portions 355a, 355b, 355c, 355d, 355e may be able to change the display color, and the display color can produce an expectation and the like. Moreover, the production start memory display 355 may be one in which the charge of one changing start memory display and four pending start memory displays in the display units 355a, 355b, 355c, 355d, 355e may be fixed in advance.

Further, the effect start memory display 355 is a hold standby display in the special figure game (for example, FIG. 4).
9(1) may be combined with the hold display 507) and the hold exhaustion display (for example, the hold exhaustion display 508 shown in FIG. 49(1)), and the target of the hold standby display or the hold exhaustion display may be the game state. It may be possible to switch between the special drawing game and the effect game according to the effect mode or the effect mode. For example, the gaming machine 10 can set the object of the hold standby display or the hold exhaustion display in the effect start memory display 355 as the special drawing game in the left-handed game state and the effect game in the right-handed game state. In addition, the gaming machine 10 can set the object of the hold standby display and the hold exhaustion display in the effect starting memory display 355 as the effect game in the normal electric support game state and as the special drawing game in the non-normal electric support game state.

Next, the structure of the effect lamp 540 and the display mode of the effect lamp 540 will be described with reference to FIG. 79. FIG. 79 is a diagram showing an example of the structure and display mode of the effect lamp of the fifth embodiment.

FIG. 79(1) shows the structure of the effect lamp 540. The effect lamp 540 includes a projection lens 541, a display content selection board 542, and a light source 543. The light source 543 is, for example, a full-color LED, which can be turned on, turned off, and blinked, and can be turned on in any color. The display content selection board 542 has a disk shape and is rotatable in the circumferential direction by an actuator. The display content selection board 542 is provided with small circular display plates 544 to 549 which are permeable to the irradiation light of the light source 543 and arranged in the circumferential direction (FIG. 79(2)). The effect lamp 54
0 is a control target of the effect control device 300.

The display boards 544 to 549 have a predetermined image. For example, the display board 544 has the message "heat" on the transparent surface as a fixed image. Further, the display board 546 has the character "tiger" on the transparent surface as a fixed image. Each of the display boards 545, 547, 549 has a required frame of an animation image on its transparent surface. Further, the display board 548 has a plain transparent surface. The display plate 548 is a standard transparent surface that is normally displayed, and does not necessarily need to be plain and may have a predetermined pattern on the transparent surface. For example, the display board 548 may have a background display (moon, mountain river, etc.) according to the game theme on the transparent surface.

The light source 543 can illuminate one of the display plates 544 to 549, and the display content selection panel 542 can switch the display plate illuminated by rotation. The projection lens 541 magnifies and projects the transmitted light of one of the display plates 544 to 549 on the projection surface. As a result, the effect lamp 540 can project a predetermined display on the projection lens 541 depending on the light emitting mode of the light source 543 and the combination of the display plates 544 to 549.

For example, as shown in FIG. 79(3), the effect lamp 540 displays a message "heavy heat" corresponding to the display plate 544 as a fixed image display or a character "tiger" corresponding to the display plate 546. You can Further, the effect lamp 540 can display animations such as petals dancing by switching and displaying the display plates 545, 547, 549 as animation display. At this time, the effect lamp 540 can realize animation display by rotating the display content selection board 542 at a constant speed and controlling the light emission timing of the light source 543. It should be noted that the effect lamp 540 is configured such that the display board 54 is switched by switching the light emission timing.
It is also possible to change the display order of 5,547,549 to change the manner in which the petals dance. For example, the effect lamp 540 can be switched and displayed by using two of the display plates 545, 547, 549, the order of the display plates 545, 547, 549, or the display plates 549, 549,
It is also possible to switch and display in the order of 547 and 545.

The animation display on the effect lamp 540 may be linked to the display performed on the other display unit. For example, the animation display on the effect lamp 540 may have the same display mode as the animation display performed on the display device 41 or the effect start memory display 355 by the hold standby display or the hold exhaustion display. At this time, the gaming machine 10
Animation display on effect lamp 540 and display device 41 and effect start memory display 355.
It is possible to perform a display effect with a sense of unity by synchronizing with the animation display in. Further, the gaming machine 10 can perform continuous display effects by the animation display on the effect lamp 540 being taken over by the animation display on the display device 41 and the effect start memory display 355. Further, the gaming machine 10 can perform display effects having various effect opportunities by making the animation display on the effect lamp 540 asynchronous with the animation display on the display device 41 or the effect start memory display 355.

Further, the effect lamp 540 can perform color change display such as white, blue, red, green, yellow, cherry blossom, and rainbow by switching the emission color of the light source 543 on the display plate 548.

Next, the operation mode of the board effect devices 550 and 551 will be described with reference to FIG. Figure 80
FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an example of an operation mode of the board production device of the fifth embodiment.
FIG. 80(1) shows a non-operating state of the board effect devices 550 and 551. The board effect device 550 is located on the lower left side of the effect lamp 540, and the board effect device 551 is located on the lower right side of the effect lamp 540. The board effect device 550 has the characters “flower” in the disk-shaped structure, and the board effect device 551 has the characters “snow” in the disk-shaped structure. Thereby, the board production devices 550, 55
The non-actuated state of 1 displays the characters "flower, snow".

FIG. 80(2) shows a non-operating state of the board production device 550 and an operating state of the board production device 551. The operation state of the board production device 551 is a state in which the movable member 551a hidden on the back side is moved to directly below the production lamp 540. The movable member 551a is a disk-shaped structure with the letters "Blow".
Have. As a result, the characters "Flower, Fubuki, Snow" and "Hanabuki" are read in the left reading for the non-operating state of the panel rendering device 550 and the operating state of the panel rendering device 551.

FIG. 80(3) shows a non-operating state of the board production device 551 and an operating state of the board production device 550. The operation state of the board production device 550 is a state in which the movable member 550a hidden on the back side is moved to directly below the production lamp 540. The movable member 550a is a disk-shaped structure with the characters "moon".
Have. As a result, the characters "Flower, Moon, Snow" and "Snow Moon Flower" are read in the right reading for the non-operation state of the board production device 551 and the operation state of the board production device 550.

As a result, the board production devices 550 and 551 can produce an expectation to the player by the operation mode and the characters displayed according to the operation mode. In addition, the board production devices 550 and 551 can switch the operation states of the movable members 550a and 551a by the actuators controlled by the production control device 300.

In addition, in the board effect devices 550 and 551, the movable member 551a is arranged on the back surface side of the board effect device 551, but the movable member 551a may be arranged on the front surface side of the board effect device 551. In this case, the board effect device 550 displays the character “flower”, the movable member 551a displays the character “blow”, and the board effect device 551 displays the character “snow”. In the non-operating state, the characters "Flower, Fuki" are displayed, and in the operating state of the board production devices 550, 551, the characters "
"Flowers, blowing, snow" are displayed. Similarly, in the board effect devices 550 and 551, the movable member 550a is arranged on the back surface side of the board effect device 550, but the movable member 550a may be arranged on the front surface side of the board effect device 550. In this case, the board production device 550 displays the character "flower", and the movable member 550a
Displays the character "month", and the board production device 551 displays the character "snow".
In the non-operating state of 50,551, the characters "moon, snow" are displayed, and the board effect device 550,551
The characters "flower, moon, snow" are displayed in the operating state of.

Next, the effect game played by the sub display device 530 will be described. FIG. 81 is a diagram showing an example of a pattern of an effect game played by the sub display device according to the fifth embodiment. The sub display device 530 plays an effect game of a pattern (mode) corresponding to the special figure variation display game simultaneously executed on the display device 41 (main display device). The sub display device 530, when the special figure variation display game derives a reach effect, plays the effect game of a pattern corresponding to the special figure variation display game.

In the effect game executed by the sub display device 530, a result mode (combination of symbols) and a result mode (combination of symbols) corresponding to the result mode (combination of symbols) of the special figure variation display game simultaneously executed on the display device 41 are derived and displayed.

As a pattern of the effect game executed by the sub display device 530, there are five patterns of pattern 1, pattern 2, pattern 3, pattern 4, and pattern 5.
Pattern 1 is a pattern of the effect game executed when the remaining time of the special figure variable display game is 29 seconds or more and the result mode of the variable display is hit. Pattern 1 includes a reach derivation display for 5 seconds, a reach effect display for 22 seconds, a 3 symbol temporary stop display for 2 seconds, and a swing display for n seconds until the special figure variation display game ends. Composed. Therefore, the presentation time in pattern 1 is 29 seconds+n seconds.

In the reach derivation display, the sub display device 530 temporarily stops the two symbols from the state in which the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are fluctuating at high speed (for example, the left symbol and the middle symbol in turn),
A display for deriving a combination of the reach that is derived in the special figure variation display game and the corresponding reach is displayed.

In the reach effect display, the sub-display device 530 temporarily suspends the remaining one symbol (third symbol) that is changing after performing a lively effect (an effect that stimulates whether or not to derive a hit to enhance the interest). Then, a display for deriving a combination of symbols corresponding to the result mode (combination of symbols) of the special figure variation display game is performed.

In the three-symbol temporary stop display, the sub-display device 530 displays three symbols in a temporarily stopped state (a combination of symbols corresponding to the result mode (combination of symbols) of the special figure variation display game). In the swing display, the sub display device 530 displays the three symbols that are temporarily stopped by the combination of hits while swinging the sub display device 530.

Pattern 2 is a pattern of the effect game executed when the remaining time of the special figure variable display game is 29 seconds or more and the result mode of variable display is out of order. Pattern 2 is configured to include a reach derivation display for 5 seconds, a reach effect display for 22 seconds, and a 3 symbol temporary stop display for 2 seconds. Therefore, the presentation time in pattern 2 is 29 seconds.

Pattern 3 is a pattern of the effect game executed when the remaining time of the special figure variation display game is less than 29 seconds and 9 seconds or more. Pattern 3 is a 3 symbol temporary stop derivation display for 7 seconds,
It is configured to include 3 symbols temporary stop display for 2 seconds. Therefore, the presentation time in pattern 3 is 9 seconds.

In the three-symbol temporary stop derivation display, the sub display device 530 sequentially turns the three symbols from the state in which the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are fluctuating at high speed (for example, the order of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol).
The display is temporarily stopped and a combination of symbols corresponding to the result mode (combination of symbols) of the special figure variation display game is derived.

Pattern 4 is a pattern of the effect game executed when the remaining time of the special figure variation display game is less than 9 seconds and 3 seconds or more. Pattern 4 is 3 from the remaining time of the special map variation display game.
Three symbol temporary stop derivation display of n seconds (for example, 4 seconds when the remaining time of the special figure variation display game is 6 seconds) and 2 seconds except 2 seconds for performing the symbol temporary stop display time It is configured to include 3 symbols temporary stop display.

Pattern 5 is a pattern of the effect game executed when the remaining time of the special figure variation display game is less than 3 seconds and 2 seconds or more (more than the time required to perform the temporary stop display of three symbols).
Pattern 5 is configured to include a 3 symbol temporary stop display for 2 seconds.

Next, specific examples of the reach derivation display, the reach effect display, the swing display, and the three symbol temporary stop derivation display will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 82 is a diagram showing an example of reach derivation display in the sub display device of the fifth embodiment. FIG. 83 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating an example of reach effect display on the sub display device according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 84 is a diagram (part 2) illustrating an example of reach effect display on the sub display device according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 85 is a diagram showing an example of rocking display in the sub display device according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 86 is a diagram showing an example of a three-symbol temporary stop derivation display in the sub display device of the fifth embodiment.

In the following, in the special figure variation display game displayed by the display device 41, after deriving a reach in which the reach eye (the pattern for deriving the hit) is “treasure”, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are each “ A specific example corresponding to the case where the reach effect of temporarily stopping at “treasure” and deriving a hit is executed will be described.

First, a specific example of the reach derivation display will be described with reference to FIG.
In the reach derivation display, the sub display device 530, from the state (Fig. 82 (a1)) where the three symbols are changing at high speed (high-speed vertical scrolling change), the left symbol is the left symbol in the result mode of the special figure variation display game. 82 (a2) in the temporary stop state with the corresponding symbol ("Treasure"), and then the temporary stop state with the symbol ("Treasure") corresponding to the medium symbol in the result mode of the special figure variation display game. (FIG. 82(a3)), the combination of the reach derived in the special figure variation display game and the corresponding reach (the reach in which the symbol for deriving the hit is “treasure”) is derived.

Next, a specific example of the reach effect display will be described with reference to FIGS. 83 and 84.
In the reach effect display, the sub display device 530 switches the fluctuation speed of the right symbol to a speed fluctuation (low speed vertical scroll fluctuation) lower than that in FIG. 82(a3) (FIG. 83(b1)). Sub display device 5
When the right symbol is changing at a low speed, when the symbol 30 is displayed (Fig. 83 (b2)), the symbol (here, "month") immediately before the "treasure" that is the symbol for deriving the hit is displayed. The change mode is switched from the low speed change (low speed vertical scroll change) to a different change mode (gradual change mode). Specifically, in the gradual change mode, in the sub display device 530, the character “month” gradually disappears (gradual disappearance).
The dot display portion 531 in charge of the character portion is gradually turned off as shown in FIG.
), FIG. 83(b4), FIG. 83(b5)), the dot display portion 531 which is in charge of the character portion is gradually turned on so that the character “Treasure” gradually appears (gradual appearance) (FIG. 83). (B6),
FIG. 83(b7) and FIG. 83(b8)). Further, the sub display device 530 gradually turns off the dot display portion 531 that is in charge of the character portion so that the character “Treasure” gradually disappears (FIG. 84).
(B9), FIG. 84 (b10), FIG. 84 (b11)), the symbol after the “treasure” (here, “
The dot display portion 531 that is in charge of the character portion is gradually turned on so that the character "Sakura") gradually appears (FIG. 84 (b12), FIG. 84 (b13), FIG. 84 (b14)). When the sub display device 530 is in a state in which the symbol one behind the "treasure" is displayed (FIG. 84 (b14)), the variation mode is switched to the low speed variation again (FIG. 83 (b1)).

The sub display device 530, while repeating such a variation, finally puts the right symbol in a temporary stop state with a symbol (“treasure”) corresponding to the right symbol in the result mode of the special figure variation display game.

In this way, changes to the symbol (“treasure”) that derives the hit, and the symbol (“treasure”) that derives the hit
By changing the variation mode in the variation from one symbol to the next symbol (“Sakura”) and the variation mode in the variation from another symbol to the symbol, the gaming machine 10 expects that the symbol for deriving the hit is temporarily stopped. Can be held by the player. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can improve the interest of the player in playing the game.

In the gaming machine 10, the board effect device 55 is included in the three symbols displayed by the sub display device 530.
0,551 (including movable members 550a, 551a) decoration (for example, "flower", "snow",
When a pattern (board decoration pattern) corresponding to “month”, “blow”, etc.) is included, the board rendering device 550
, 551 may be operated. Alternatively, the gaming machine 10 has the sub display device 530.
When the board decoration pattern is included in the three patterns displayed by, the board effect devices 550 and 551 may be operated, and may be operated after the establishment of the operation condition such as the detection of the push button 25 operation. .. The case where the board decoration symbol is included in the three symbols displayed by the sub display device 530 may be only one symbol of the three symbols, or a specific symbol (for example, the final stop symbol). It may be possible to use any two of the three designs, specific two designs (for example, reach configuration design), or all three designs. For example, the gaming machine 10 operates the board effect devices 550 and 551 when the sub display device 530 displays "month (board decoration pattern)" on the left symbol and the middle symbol and becomes a reach system. In addition, game machine 1
0 indicates that the sub-display device 530 displays "Treasure (non-board decoration pattern)" on the left and middle patterns and becomes a reach type, and then displays "Month (board decoration pattern)" on the right pattern and falls off. When (including temporary stop) is displayed, the board effect devices 550 and 551 are made operable, the operation of the push button 25 is detected, the board effect devices 550 and 551 are operated, and the sub-display device 530 is changed again.
In the gaming machine 10, the operation modes of the board effect devices 550 and 551 may be different according to the type and combination of the board decoration symbols displayed by the sub display device 530.

Note that the gaming machine 10 does not operate the board effect devices 550 and 551 if sufficient effect time cannot be secured even if the board decoration symbol is included in the three symbols displayed by the sub display device 530. You may For example, the gaming machine 10 may not operate the board effect devices 550 and 551 when the variation time of the sub display device 530 is shortened or in a shortenable state. Accordingly, the gaming machine 10 can promptly progress the production game on the sub display device 530 without considering the operation time (including the return operation time) of the board effect devices 550 and 551.

Next, a specific example of swing display will be described with reference to FIG.
In the swing display, the sub display device 530 continuously displays the state in which the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are temporarily stopped with the symbol of "treasure" while swinging the device, and the special symbol variation display The swing width is gradually reduced toward the timing when the game ends (FIG. 85(c1), FIG. 85(c2).
), FIG. 85 (c3)).

In this way, by swinging the sub display device 530, it is possible to clearly show that the effect in the special figure changing display game is being executed (changing). In addition, the sub display device 530 gradually reduces the swing width as the timing of ending the special figure variation display game is approached,
The timing when the special figure variable display game ends can be specified.

Next, the three-symbol temporary stop derivation display will be described with reference to FIG. 86.
In the three-symbol temporary stop derivation display, the sub-display device 530 displays the left symbol in the result mode of the special figure variation display game from the state (FIG. 86 (d1)) in which the three symbols are changing at high speed (high-speed vertical scrolling variation). In the pattern corresponding to the left symbol (“treasure”), the temporary stop state is set (FIG. 86 (d2)), and then the middle symbol is a symbol (“treasure”) corresponding to the middle symbol in the result mode of the special figure variable display game. In the temporary stop state (Fig. 86 (d3)), the right symbol is temporarily stopped with the symbol ("treasure") corresponding to the right symbol in the result mode of the special map variation display game (Fig. 86 (d4)), A combination of symbols corresponding to the result mode (combination of symbols) of the figure variation display game is derived. Thereby, the sub-display device 530 can notify not only the result mode (hit or miss) but also whether or not the hit is accompanied by probability variation.

Next, the process of counting up the effect start memory which is the right to execute the effect game on the sub display device 530 will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 87 is a view showing a flowchart of the effect starting memory count increasing process in the effect control device of the fifth embodiment. The effect start memory count increase process is a process performed by the control unit (CPU 311) of the effect control device 300. The display effect determination process is a process executed when a command transmitted based on detection of a game ball by the winning opening switch 35a is received from the game control device 100, and the received command analysis process step D63 (FIG. (See 46)).

[Step D111] The control unit specifies the gaming state.
[Step D112] The control unit determines whether to operate the sorting gate 353 based on the gaming state. For example, the control unit determines to operate the sorting gate 353 in the right-handed state. Note that the control unit determines whether or not to operate the sorting gate 353 based on whether or not it is in a specific game state (right-handed state), and the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the control unit controls the distribution gate 3 based on the number of revolutions after a specific game state is reached.
You may judge whether 53 is operated.

When it is determined that the sorting gate 353 is not operated, the control unit ends the effect start memory count increase processing, and when it is determined that the sorting gate 353 is operated, the control unit proceeds to step D113.

[Step D113] The control unit switches the route of the distribution gate 353 so that the game ball flows into the effect flow passage 354.
[Step D114] The control unit sets a wait time.

[Step D115] The control unit increments the count of the effect starting memory.
[Step D116] The control unit determines whether or not the command transmitted from the game control device 100 based on the detection of the game ball by the winning opening switch 35a is received.

When the control unit determines that the command transmitted from the game control apparatus 100 based on the detection of the game ball by the winning opening switch 35a is received, the process proceeds to step D115, and the gaming control apparatus 100 operates the winning opening switch 35a. When it is determined that the command transmitted based on the detection of the game ball is not received, the process proceeds to step D117.

[Step D117] The control unit determines whether the set wait time has timed out. The control unit proceeds to step D116 when it determines that the wait time has not timed out, and proceeds to step D118 when it determines that the wait time has timed out.
Proceed to.

[Step D118] The control unit switches the route of the distribution gate 353 so that the game balls do not flow into the effect flow passage 354, and ends the effect start memory count increase processing.
Next, the process of determining the execution timing of the effect game on the sub display device 530 will be described with reference to FIG.
Will be explained. FIG. 88 is a view showing a flowchart of the effect game execution timing determination process in the effect control device of the fifth embodiment.

The effect game execution timing determination process is a process performed by the control unit (CPU 311) of the effect control device 300. The effect game execution timing determination process is a process which is executed when the effect start memory increases, when the user operates the push button 25, and at the start timing of the special figure variation display game, and the step D23 (FIG. (See 44)).

[Step D121] The control unit determines whether or not the effect game execution timing determination process has been started in response to the increase in the effect starting memory. When the control unit determines that the effect game execution timing determination process is started by the start of the special figure variation display game or the operation of the push button 25, the process proceeds to step D122, and the effect start memory is increased. If it is determined that the effect game execution timing determination process has been started, the process proceeds to step D123.

[Step D122] The control unit determines whether or not there is a performance start memory. The control unit proceeds to step D129 if the effect starting memory is “0”, and proceeds to step D125 if the effect starting memory is other than “0”, that is, if the effect starting memory is present.

[Step D123] The control unit determines whether or not the special figure variation display game is being executed. The control unit proceeds to step D129 if it is determined that the special figure variation display game is not being executed, and proceeds to step D124 if it is determined that the special figure variation display game is being executed.

[Step D124] The control unit determines whether or not the effect game has been executed in the special figure variation display game being executed. When the control unit determines that the effect game has been executed in the running special figure variation display game, the control unit proceeds to step D129, and determines that the effect game has not been executed in the running special figure variation display game. For that, go to Step D125.

[Step D125] The control unit specifies the effect contents of the special figure variation display game.
[Step D126] The control unit determines whether or not the special figure variation display game derives a reach effect. The control unit proceeds to step D129 when it is determined that the special figure variation display game does not derive the reach effect, and proceeds to step D127 when it is determined that the special figure variation display game derives the reach effect.

[Step D127] The control unit determines whether or not the remaining time of the special figure variation display game is 2 seconds or more. The control unit proceeds to step D129 if it determines that the remaining time of the special figure variation display game is 2 seconds or more, and proceeds to step D128 if it determines that the remaining time of the special figure variation display game is 2 seconds or more. move on.

[Step D128] The control unit determines that it is an opportunity to execute the effect game, and ends the effect game execution opportunity determination process.
[Step D129] The control unit determines that it is not an opportunity to execute the effect game, and ends the effect game execution opportunity determination process.

According to this, in addition to the timing synchronized with the start timing of the special figure variation display game, the gaming machine 10 starts the production game at a timing asynchronous with the start timing of the special figure variation display game (the execution game execution trigger). Can be

Next, the process of setting the pattern of the effect game executed by the sub display device will be described with reference to FIG. 89. FIG. 89 is a view showing a flowchart of the effect game pattern setting processing in the effect control device of the fifth embodiment.

The effect game pattern setting process is a process performed by the control unit (CPU 311) of the effect control device 300. The effect game pattern setting process is a process executed when it is determined that it is an opportunity to execute the effect game, and is step D23 of the main process (FIG. 44).
Refer to) and is executed by the control unit.

[Step D131] The control unit specifies the remaining time of the special figure variation display game.
[Step D132] The control unit specifies a result mode of the special figure variation display game.
[Step D133] The control unit determines whether or not the remaining time of the special figure variation display game is 29 seconds or more. The control unit proceeds to step D134 if it determines that the remaining time of the special figure variation display game is 29 seconds or more, and proceeds to step D137 if it determines that the remaining time of the special figure variation display game is not 29 seconds or more. Proceed to.

[Step D134] The control unit determines whether or not the result mode of the special figure variation display game is a win. The control unit proceeds to step D135 if it is determined that the result mode of the special figure variation display game is a hit, and proceeds to step D136 if it is determined that the result aspect of the special figure variation display game is not a hit.

[Step D135] The control unit sets pattern 1 as the pattern of the effect game, and ends the effect game pattern setting process.
[Step D136] The control unit sets pattern 2 as the pattern of the effect game, and ends the effect game pattern setting process.

[Step D137] The control section determines whether or not the remaining time of the special figure variation display game is 9 seconds or more. The control unit proceeds to step D138 when it determines that the remaining time of the special figure variation display game is 9 seconds or more, and advances to step D139 when it determines that the remaining time of the special figure variation display game is not 9 seconds or more. Proceed to.

[Step D138] The control unit sets pattern 3 as the pattern of the effect game, and ends the effect game pattern setting process.
[Step D139] The control unit determines whether or not the remaining time of the special figure variation display game is 3 seconds or more. The control unit proceeds to step D140 when it is determined that the remaining time of the special figure variation display game is 3 seconds or more, and proceeds to step D141 when it is determined that the remaining time of the special figure variation display game is not 3 seconds or more. Proceed to.

[Step D140] The control unit sets pattern 4 as the pattern of the effect game, and ends the effect game pattern setting process.
[Step D141] The control unit sets pattern 5 as the pattern of the effect game, and ends the effect game pattern setting process.

By setting the pattern of the effect game in this manner, the gaming machine 10 can keep the effect game within the effect time of the corresponding special figure variation display game.
By the way, in the effect game executed by the sub display device 530, the effect can be skipped based on an instruction from the player. The skip of the effect based on the instruction from the player will be described with reference to FIG. 90. FIG. 90 is a view showing a flowchart of the effect game skip processing in the effect control device of the fifth embodiment.

The effect game skip processing is processing for skipping the effect of the effect game being executed on the sub display device 530 by the operation of the player (pressing the push button 25).
The effect game skip process is a process performed by the control unit (CPU 311) of the effect control device 300. The effect game skip process is a process that is executed when the player's operation (push button press) is detected, and is step D19 (FIG. 4) of the main process.
(See 4)).

[Step D151] The control unit determines whether it is a timing at which the effect game can be skipped. When the production game is in the three-symbol temporary stop display or the swing display, the control unit,
That is, when the result mode corresponding to the result mode of the special figure variation display game has already been derived, it is determined that the timing of the effect game cannot be skipped. On the other hand, the control unit is in the reach derivation display, the reach effect display, or the three symbol temporary stop derivation display (the state before the three symbols are temporarily stopped in the combination of the symbols corresponding to the result mode of the special figure variable display game) If it is, it is determined that the timing of the effect game can be skipped.

The control unit proceeds to step D152 if it is determined that the effect game can be skipped, and ends the effect game skip processing if it is determined that the effect game is not skippable.

[Step D152] The control unit skips the effect game that is being executed, and executes three-symbol temporary stop display for 2 seconds.
[Step D153] The control unit ends the effect game when the three-symbol temporary stop display is executed,
The effect game skip processing ends.

According to such an effect skip, the gaming machine 10 is
The result mode corresponding to the result mode of the special figure variation display game can be derived to the sub display device 530 at a timing desired by the player. Accordingly, the gaming machine 10 can allow the player to grasp the result mode of the special figure variation display game at an arbitrary timing (for example, early).

The effect skip may be a step of skipping a part of the effect in the effect game. For example, when the gaming machine 10 receives a production skip instruction during the reach derivation display, the gaming machine 10 may skip the reach production.

Next, a description will be given of a processing flow when the production game is performed in the pattern 1, the pattern 2, the pattern 3, the pattern 4, and the pattern 5. In FIG. 91, the production control device of the fifth embodiment uses the production game pattern 1
5 is a timing chart showing the flow of processing in the case of. FIG. 92 is a timing chart showing the flow of processing when the production control device of the fifth embodiment plays the production game in pattern 2. In FIG. 93, the production control device of the fifth embodiment uses the production game in pattern 3
5 is a timing chart showing the flow of processing in the case of. FIG. 94 is a timing chart showing the flow of processing when the production control device of the fifth embodiment plays the production game in pattern 4. In FIG. 95, the effect control device of the fifth embodiment plays the effect game in pattern 5
5 is a timing chart showing the flow of processing in the case of. In the timing chart below, if the effect game starts at a timing asynchronous with the special figure variation display game,
That is, an explanation will be given using an example of the case where it is determined that the execution trigger is due to an increase in the effect start memory or an operation of the push button 25 by the user being accepted.

First, the flow of processing in the case of playing the effect game in pattern 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 91(1) shows a flow of processing when the player does not perform the effect skip.
FIGS. 91(2) and 91(3) show the flow of processing when the player performs an effect skip.

In FIG. 91(1), the gaming machine 10 starts the Nth special view variation display game from timing t11, and starts the effect game (pattern 1) on the sub display device 530 at timing t12 to perform reach derivation display. Get started. In the effect game (pattern 1) being played on the sub display device 530, the effect skipping is enabled when the reach derivation display is started.

The gaming machine 10 performs the reach derivation display from the timing t12 for 5 seconds to the timing t14, performs the reach effect display for 22 seconds from the timing t14 to the timing t18, and performs the three symbol temporary stop display from the timing t18. In the effect game (pattern 1) performed on the sub display device 530, the effect skip is not performed because the result mode corresponding to the result mode of the special figure variation display game is derived by the three symbol temporary stop display at the timing t18. It becomes possible.

The gaming machine 10 performs the three symbol temporary stop display from the timing t18 for 2 seconds until the timing t19, and the timing t when the Nth special figure variation display game ends from the timing t19.
Swing display is performed for n seconds up to 20, the effect game (pattern 1) is ended, and the Nth special figure variation display game is also ended.

In FIG. 91(2), the gaming machine 10 starts the Nth special view variation display game from timing t11, and starts the effect game (pattern 1) on the sub display device 530 at timing t12 to perform reach derivation display. Get started. In the effect game (pattern 1) being played on the sub display device 530, the effect skipping is enabled when the reach derivation display is started.

When the game machine 10 accepts the skip operation (depression of the push button 25) by the player at the timing t13 during the reach derivation display, the reach derivation display is ended and the three symbol temporary stop display is started. The gaming machine 10 ends the effect game (Pattern 1) when the three-symbol temporary stop display is performed from timing t13 to timing t15 after 2 seconds, and ends the Nth special figure variation display game at timing t20.

In FIG. 91(3), the gaming machine 10 starts the Nth special view variation display game from timing t11, and starts the effect game (pattern 1) on the sub display device 530 at timing t12 to perform reach derivation display. Get started. In the effect game (pattern 1) being played on the sub display device 530, the effect skipping is enabled when the reach derivation display is started.

The gaming machine 10 performs the reach derivation display from the timing t12 for 5 seconds until the timing t14, and starts the reach effect display from the timing t14. When the game machine 10 accepts the skip operation (pressing the push button 25) by the player at the timing t16 during the reach effect display, the reach effect display is ended and the three symbol temporary stop display is started. The gaming machine 10 ends the effect game (Pattern 1) when performing the three-symbol temporary stop display from timing t16 to timing t17 after 2 seconds, and ends the Nth special figure variation display game at timing t20. The above is the flow of processing when the effect skip is performed and when the effect skip is not performed in the effect game (pattern 1).

Next, a flow of processing when the effect game is performed in the pattern 2 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 92(1) shows a processing flow when the player does not perform the effect skip.
FIGS. 92(2) and 92(3) show the flow of processing when the player performs the effect skip.

In FIG. 92(1), the gaming machine 10 starts the Nth special view variation display game from timing t21, and starts the effect game (pattern 2) on the sub display device 530 at timing t22 to perform reach derivation display. Get started. In the effect game (pattern 2) being played on the sub display device 530, the effect skipping is enabled when the reach derivation display is started.

The gaming machine 10 performs the reach derivation display from the timing t22 for 5 seconds to the timing t24, performs the reach effect display for 22 seconds from the timing t24 to the timing t28, and performs the three symbol temporary stop display from the timing t28. The effect game (Pattern 2) performed on the sub display device 530 is pushed by the player as the result mode corresponding to the result mode of the special figure variation display game is derived by the three symbol temporary stop display at the timing t28. It becomes impossible to skip the effect of the effect game by operating the button 25.

The gaming machine 10 performs a three-symbol temporary stop display from timing t28 for 2 seconds until timing t29, ends the effect game (pattern 2), and ends the Nth special figure variation display game at timing t30.

In FIG. 92(2), the gaming machine 10 starts the Nth special view variation display game from timing t21, and starts the effect game (pattern 2) on the sub display device 530 at timing t22 to perform reach derivation display. Get started. In the effect game (pattern 2) being played on the sub display device 530, the effect skipping is enabled when the reach derivation display is started.

When the game machine 10 accepts the skip operation (depression of the push button 25) by the player at the timing t23 during the reach derivation display, the reach derivation display is ended and the three symbol temporary stop display is started. The gaming machine 10 ends the effect game (Pattern 2) when the three-symbol temporary stop display is performed from timing t23 to timing t25 after 2 seconds, and ends the Nth special figure variation display game at timing t30.

In FIG. 92(3), the gaming machine 10 starts the Nth special view variation display game from timing t21, starts the effect game (pattern 2) on the sub display device 530 at timing t22, and performs reach derivation display. Get started. The production game (pattern 2) being played on the sub display device 530 is in a state where production skip can be performed when the reach derivation display is started at the timing t21.

The gaming machine 10 performs the reach derivation display from the timing t22 for 5 seconds until the timing t24, and starts the reach effect display from the timing t24. When the game machine 10 accepts the skip operation (depression of the push button 25) by the player at the timing t26 during the reach effect display, the reach effect display is ended and the three symbol temporary stop display is started. The gaming machine 10 ends the effect game (Pattern 2) when performing the three-symbol temporary stop display from the timing t26 to the timing t27 after 2 seconds, and ends the Nth special figure variation display game at the timing t30. The above is the flow of processing in the case where the effect skip is performed in the effect game (pattern 2) and in the case where the effect skip is not performed.

Next, a flow of processing when the effect game is performed in the pattern 3 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 93(1) shows a flow of processing when the player does not perform the effect skip.
FIG. 93(2) shows the flow of processing when the player skips the effect.

In FIG. 93(1), the gaming machine 10 starts the Nth special figure variation display game from the timing t31, starts the effect game (pattern 3) on the sub display device 530 at the timing t32, and derives three symbols temporary stop. Start displaying. In the effect game (pattern 3) being performed on the sub display device 530, the effect skipping is enabled as the three-symbol temporary stop derivation display is started.

The gaming machine 10 performs the three symbol temporary stop derivation display from the timing t32 for seven seconds until the timing t35, and performs the three symbol temporary stop display from the timing t35. Sub display device 53
In the effect game (pattern 3) that is performed at 0, the effect skip is impossible because the result mode corresponding to the result mode of the special figure variation display game is derived by the three symbol temporary stop display at the timing t35. Becomes

The gaming machine 10 performs a three-symbol temporary stop display from timing t35 for two seconds until timing t36, ends the effect game (pattern 3), and ends the Nth special figure variation display game at timing t36.

In FIG. 93(2), the gaming machine 10 starts the Nth special view variation display game from the timing t31, starts the effect game (pattern 3) on the sub display device 530 at the timing t32, and derives three symbols temporary stop. Start displaying. In the effect game (pattern 3) being performed on the sub display device 530, the effect skipping is enabled as the three-symbol temporary stop derivation display is started.

When the game machine 10 accepts the skip operation by the player (pressing the push button 25) at the timing t33 during the three-symbol temporary stop derivation display, the three-symbol temporary stop derivation display is ended, and 3
The symbol temporary stop display is started. The gaming machine 10 has a timing t 2 seconds after the timing t33.
When the three-symbol temporary stop display is performed up to 34, the effect game (pattern 3) is finished, and the Nth special figure variation display game is finished at timing t36. The above is the flow of processing when the effect skip is performed and when the effect skip is not performed in the effect game (pattern 3).

Next, a flow of processing when the effect game is performed in the pattern 4 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 94(1) shows a flow of processing when the player does not perform the effect skip.
FIG. 94(2) shows the flow of processing when the player skips the effect.

In FIG. 94(1), the gaming machine 10 starts the Nth special figure variation display game from the timing t41, starts the effect game (pattern 4) on the sub display device 530 at the timing t42, and derives the three symbol temporary stop. Start displaying. In the effect game (pattern 4) being performed on the sub display device 530, the effect skipping is enabled as the three-symbol temporary stop derivation display is started.

The gaming machine 10 performs three symbol temporary stop derivation display from timing t42 for n seconds until timing t45 (remaining time until the special figure variation display game ends-2 seconds), and timing t
45 to 3 symbols temporary stop display is performed. In the effect game (Pattern 4) performed on the sub display device 530, the effect skip is not performed because the result mode corresponding to the result mode of the special figure variation display game is derived by the three symbol temporary stop display at the timing t45. It becomes possible.

The gaming machine 10 performs a three-symbol temporary stop display from timing t45 for 2 seconds until timing t46, ends the effect game (pattern 4), and ends the Nth special figure variation display game at timing t46.

In FIG. 94(2), the gaming machine 10 starts the Nth special figure variation display game from the timing t41, starts the effect game (pattern 4) on the sub display device 530 at the timing t42, and derives the three symbol temporary stop. Start displaying. In the effect game (pattern 4) being performed on the sub display device 530, the effect skipping is enabled as the three-symbol temporary stop derivation display is started.

When the game machine 10 accepts the skip operation (pressing the push button 25) by the player at the timing t43 during the three-symbol temporary stop derivation display, the three-symbol temporary stop derivation display is ended and 3
The symbol temporary stop display is started. The gaming machine 10 has a timing t 2 seconds after the timing t43.
When three symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed up to 44, the effect game (pattern 4) is finished, and the Nth special figure variation display game is finished at timing t46. The above is the flow of the processing in the case where the effect skip is performed and in the case where the effect skip is not performed in the effect game (pattern 4).

Next, a flow of processing when the effect game is performed in the pattern 5 will be described with reference to FIG.
The gaming machine 10 starts the Nth special figure variation display game at timing t51, starts the effect game (pattern 5) on the sub display device 530 at timing t52, and starts performing three-symbol temporary stop display. The gaming machine 10 performs a three-symbol temporary stop display from timing t52 to timing t53 for 2 seconds, ends the effect game (pattern 5), and ends the Nth special figure variation display game at timing t54. The above is the flow of processing of the effect game (pattern 5).

In this way, the gaming machine 10 has a result mode to be derived at the same time as the main display device (display device 4).
The sub-display device 5 is a result mode corresponding to the result mode of the special figure variation display game executed in 1), and the effect game that can be asynchronously controlled with the special figure variation display game executed on the main display device.
Run at 30.

According to this, the gaming machine 10 can ensure the performance of the game (game rules) in the special figure variation display game on the main display device, and can derive the result mode at any time on the sub display device 530. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can widen the width of the game.

In the above embodiment, the case where the effect game is executed only while the special figure variation display game is being executed has been described as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the gaming machine 10, when the fluctuation start memory increases (occurs) even when the special figure fluctuation display game is stopped, the special symbol fluctuation display game satisfying the conditions is changed to the high speed fluctuation state of the three symbols. Until the start (until it is determined to be an execution trigger), the high-speed fluctuation state may be kept in standby.

[Modification 1 of Fifth Embodiment]
In the fifth embodiment, in the pattern 1 of the effect game, the swing display is performed after the three-symbol temporary stop display (the winning combination display). In the modified example 1 of the fifth embodiment, the setting of the effect mode of the effect (hit effect) in the special game state performed by the main display device after the special figure variation display game derives the hit is changed to the swing display.

First, a display performed in place of the swing display will be described with reference to FIG. 96. FIG. 96 is a diagram showing an example of the music selection display on the sub display device of the first modification of the fifth embodiment.
The music selection display is an example of a display for setting the effect mode of the effect (hit effect) in the special game state. The gaming machine 10 can also perform, for example, a character selection display, a mode selection display, or the like, in place of or in addition to the music selection display, as the setting of the effect mode of the effect (hit effect) in the special game state.

In the song selection display, the sub display device 530 displays selectable songs as shown in FIGS. 96(e1), (e2), and (e3) (“song A?”, “song B?”, “song C”). ?)), and allows the player to select which song should be used for the effect in the special game state. Then, the sub display device 530
When the player selects a song by operating the push button 25, FIG. 96 (e4)
As shown in (), the accepted song is displayed ("Song A!!") and the song selection display is terminated.

Next, the flow of processing when the swing display is changed to the music selection display in FIG. 91 is shown in FIG.
Will be explained.
FIG. 97 is a timing chart showing the flow of processing when the production control device of the first modification of the fifth embodiment plays the production game in pattern 1. Note that the same timing will be described here as a comparison with FIG. 91.

The gaming machine 10 starts the Nth special figure variation display game from timing t11, starts the effect game (pattern 1) on the sub display device 530 at timing t12, and starts performing reach derivation display. In the effect game (pattern 1) being played on the sub display device 530, the effect skipping is enabled when the reach derivation display is started.

The gaming machine 10 performs the reach derivation display from the timing t12 for 5 seconds to the timing t14, performs the reach effect display for 22 seconds from the timing t14 to the timing t18, and performs the three symbol temporary stop display from the timing t18. In the effect game (pattern 1) performed on the sub display device 530, the effect skip is not performed because the result mode corresponding to the result mode of the special figure variation display game is derived by the three symbol temporary stop display at the timing t18. It becomes possible.

The gaming machine 10 performs the three symbol temporary stop display from the timing t18 for 2 seconds until the timing t19, and the timing t when the Nth special figure variation display game ends from the timing t19.
Music selection display is performed for n seconds until 20 and the effect game (pattern 1) is ended.

In this way, by using the sub display device 530, it is possible to set the effect mode of the effect in the special game state before executing the effect in the special game state on the main display device side (before deriving the result mode). , It is not necessary to set the effect mode at the start of the special game state, and the effect time for effect in the special game state can be extended (the effect time for effect in the special game state is reduced by the time for setting the effect mode. Never). As a result, the gaming machine 10 can secure a longer production time of the effect in the special game state, increase the degree of freedom of the effect, and improve the interest.

In addition, although it is described that the display is changed to the swing display, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the gaming machine 10, in the case where the special figure changing display game derives a hit, and if there is time until the special figure changing display game ends after three symbols temporary stop display, until the end. It may be executed in time (for example, executed at t15 in FIG. 91(2)).

Further, in the gaming machine 10, before executing the effect in the special game state on the main display device side (before the winning is derived), a part of the effect in the special game state on the sub display device 530 (for example, an introduction portion or the like). ) May be executed.

It should be noted that the selection of the music to be selected at the time of selecting the music may be performed by an operation by the player, or the selection of the music may be performed on the basis of time (for example, 2
The music may be switched every second). In the case of switching a song as an option with time as an opportunity, the switching timing may be adjusted based on the display time of the song selection display. For example, in the gaming machine 10, when the song selection display time is 4 seconds and there are 4 songs to be selected, the songs are switched within 1 second so that all the options can be selected. To do.

[Modification 2 of Fifth Embodiment]
In the modified example 2 of the fifth embodiment, the determination is made in consideration of the game state of the game machine 10 in addition to the effect contents of the special figure variation display game in the determination of whether or not it is an execution timing of the effect game. Figure 9
FIG. 8 is a view showing a flowchart of the effect game execution timing determination process in the effect control device of the modified example 2 of the fifth embodiment.

[Step D161] The control unit determines whether or not the effect game execution trigger determination process has been started, triggered by the increase in the effect start memory. When the control unit determines that the effect game execution timing determination process is started by the start of the special figure variation display game or the operation of the push button 25, the process proceeds to step D162, and the effect start memory is increased. If it is determined that the effect game execution timing determination process has started, the process proceeds to step D163.

[Step D162] The control unit determines whether or not there is an effect start memory. The control unit proceeds to step D170 when the effect starting memory is “0”, and proceeds to step D165 when the effect starting memory is other than “0”, that is, when the effect starting memory is present.

[Step D163] The control unit determines whether or not the special figure variation display game is being executed. The control unit proceeds to step D170 if it determines that the special figure variation display game is not being executed, and proceeds to step D164 if it is determined that the special figure variation display game is being executed.

[Step D164] The control unit determines whether or not the effect game has been executed in the special figure variation display game being executed. If the control unit determines that the effect game has been executed in the running special figure variation display game, the control unit proceeds to step D170, and determines that the effect game has not been executed in the running special figure variation display game. To step D165.

[Step D165] The control unit specifies the effect contents of the special figure variation display game.
[Step D166] The control unit determines whether or not the gaming state of the gaming machine 10 is a gaming state that can trigger execution of the effect game. For example, when the gaming state of the gaming machine 10 is a predetermined state that should be hit to the right, the control unit determines that the gaming state can be an execution trigger.

When the control unit determines that the gaming state of the gaming machine 10 is a gaming state that can trigger execution of the effect game, the process proceeds to step D167, and the gaming state of the gaming machine 10 cannot trigger the execution of the effect game. If it is determined to be, the process proceeds to step D170.

[Step D167] The control unit determines whether or not the special figure variation display game derives a reach effect. The control unit proceeds to step D170 when determining that the special figure variation display game does not derive the reach effect, and proceeds to step D168 when determining that the special figure variation display game derives the reach effect.

[Step D168] The control unit determines whether or not the remaining time of the special figure variation display game is 2 seconds or more. The control unit proceeds to step D170 when determining that the remaining time of the special figure changing display game is not less than 2 seconds, and proceeds to step D169 when determining that the remaining time of the special figure changing display game is not less than 2 seconds. move on.

[Step D169] The control unit determines that it is an execution timing of the effect game, and ends the effect game execution timing determination process.
[Step D170] The control unit determines that it is not an opportunity to execute the effect game, and ends the effect game execution opportunity determination process.

As described above, the gaming machine 10 uses the gaming state to determine whether or not the timing is the execution timing, and thus enables the player to grasp the gaming state depending on whether or not the performance game is executed.

[Modification 3 of Fifth Embodiment]
In the fifth embodiment, one effect game is played in one special figure variation display game. In the fifth embodiment, it is possible to execute the effect game a plurality of times within one special figure variation display game.

For example, the gaming machine 10 determines the number of times of the effect game to be executed and the effect time thereof in one special figure variation display game at the time of determining the execution timing of the effect game. For example, game machine 1
When 0 is determined to be the execution timing in the execution timing determination process, the number of effect games executed in the special figure variation display game and the effect time allocated to each effect game are the remaining time of the special figure variation display game. It is determined based on the number of pending production start memories.

The flow of processing in the case of executing a plurality of effect games in one special figure variation display game will be described with reference to FIG. 99. FIG. 99 is a timing chart showing the flow of processing when the effect control device of the modified example 3 of the fifth embodiment executes the effect game a plurality of times in one special figure variation display game. The timing chart shown in FIG. 99 shows the flow of processing in the case where the effect game is played three times when the special figure variation display game derives a hit.

The gaming machine 10 starts the Nth special figure variation display game from the timing t61 and starts the first effect game (Pattern 3) to start the three symbol temporary stop derivation display. In the first effect game (pattern 3) performed on the sub-display device 530, the effect skipping is enabled as the three-symbol temporary stop derivation display is started.

The gaming machine 10 performs the three-symbol temporary stop derivation display from the timing t61 for 7 seconds until the timing t62, and performs the three-symbol temporary stop display from the timing t62. Sub display device 53
In the first effect game (pattern 3) performed at 0, the effect skip becomes impossible as the three symbol temporary stop display is started at the timing t62.

Gaming machine 10 performs three symbol temporary stop display from timing t62 to timing t63 for 2 seconds, ends the first effect game (Pattern 3), and starts the second effect game (Pattern 3) to 3 symbols. Start the temporary stop derivation display. In the second effect game (Pattern 3) performed on the sub display device 530, the effect skipping is enabled as the three-symbol temporary stop derivation display is started.

The gaming machine 10 performs the three-symbol temporary stop derivation display from the timing t63 for 7 seconds until the timing t64, and performs the three-symbol temporary stop display from the timing t64. Sub display device 53
In the second effect game (Pattern 3) executed at 0, the effect skip becomes impossible with the start of the three symbol temporary stop display at the timing t64.

The gaming machine 10 performs the three-symbol temporary stop display from timing t64 to timing t65 for 2 seconds, finishes the second effect game (pattern 3), and starts the third effect game (pattern 1) to reach reach. Start displaying. In the third effect game (Pattern 1) played on the sub display device 530, the effect skipping is enabled when the reach derivation display is started.

The gaming machine 10 performs the reach derivation display from the timing t65 to the timing t66 for 5 seconds, performs the reach effect display from the timing t66 to the timing t67 for 22 seconds, and performs the three symbol temporary stop display from the timing t67. In the third effect game (Pattern 1) performed on the sub display device 530, the effect skip becomes impossible as the three symbol temporary stop derivation display starts to be performed at the timing t67.

The gaming machine 10 performs three symbol temporary stop display from timing t67 for 2 seconds until timing t68, and timing t68 from timing t68 when the Nth special figure variation display game ends.
Swing display is performed for n seconds up to 69, and the third effect game (pattern 1) is ended.

The gaming machine 10 derives a result mode (3
The combination of the symbols in the pattern temporary stop display) is the result mode corresponding to the result mode of the special figure variable display game, and the result mode derived in the other effect game is not the result mode of the special figure variable display game. Aspect.

According to this, the gaming machine 10 makes the player understand that the result mode of the special figure variation display game is off in the first and second effect games, and then changes the special figure in the third effect game. It is possible to know that the result mode of the display game is actually a win. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can be more entertaining than in the case where the result mode of the special figure variation display game is recognized as winning in one effect game.

In addition, the game machine 10 functions as skipping the effect of each effect game in the effect skip in each effect game (for example, in the case of effect skipping in the first effect game, 3 in the first effect game). It may be made to skip to the pattern temporary stop display), or it functions as a skip of the entire effect game for three times (for example, if the effect skips during the first effect game, the three symbol temporary stop display for the third effect game) Skip to).

Although it has been described that the effect game is executed three times in the one-time special figure variation display game, instead of this, in the gaming machine 10, the effect game is executed three times in one effect game. The processing shown in FIG. 99 may be realized by performing an effect (so-called pseudo-relation) that makes the user aware.

[Modification 4 of Fifth Embodiment]
In the fifth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 88, when the special figure variation display game is being executed when the effect start memory is increased (D121: YES) (D123: YES), the effect game is performed in the special figure variation display game. Is not already executed (D124: NO), the special figure variable display game is not the special figure variable display game that is the target of the effect game (D126: N).
O or D127:NO), it is determined that it is not an execution trigger.

On the other hand, in the modified example 4 of the fifth embodiment, when the special figure variation display game being executed does not derive the reach effect (D126: NO), the remaining time of the special figure variation display game being executed is short. Even in some cases (D127: NO), the special figure variation display game (the special figure variation display game that is the target of execution of the effect game) in which the reach effect is derived in the pending storage and the effect is performed for 2 seconds or more is executed. When there is a pending storage to be executed, and when the hit does not occur before the start of the special figure variation display game, it is determined to be an execution timing, and the effect game corresponding to the special figure variation display game of the pending storage. Is executed before the effect of the corresponding special figure variation display game is started.

For example, the gaming machine 10 has a left symbol until the corresponding special figure variation display game starts,
The middle symbol and the right symbol are continuously rotated at high speed (high speed variable display), and when the corresponding special figure variable display game starts, the effect game (pattern 1 to pattern 5) described in the fifth embodiment is started.

The processing flow of the modification 4 of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 100 is a timing chart showing the flow of processing when the production control device of the modified example 4 of the fifth embodiment plays the production game over a plurality of special figure variation display games.

In the timing chart shown in FIG. 100, the N-th special figure variation display game is a special figure variation display game that is not the target of execution of the effect game (for example, a special figure variation display game that does not derive the reach effect, the remaining time). It is assumed that the special figure variation display game is less than 2 seconds or the special figure variation display game in which the effect game has been executed). In addition, the N+1th variation display game is a special figure variation display game that is a target of execution of the effect game.

When the starting memory occurs at the timing t71 of the Nth special figure variation display game, the gaming machine 10 detects the special figure variation display game which is the target of the effect game execution from the pending storage, and N+
It is specified that the first special figure variation display game is a special figure variation display game which is a target of execution of the effect game. For example, in the gaming machine 10, when the effect control device 300 generates the pending storage (
Based on the received command received from the game control device 100 at the time of winning that triggers the occurrence of the pending storage), the special figure variation display game to be the target of execution of the effect game is detected from within the pending storage.

Then, from the timing t71, the gaming machine 10 starts the effect game corresponding to the N+1th special figure variation display game and starts high-speed variation display. In the effect game played on the sub-display device 530, since the corresponding special figure variation display game (N+1th time) has not been started, effect skip becomes impossible.

At the timing t72, the gaming machine 10 ends the Nth special map change display game, starts the (N+1)th special map change display game, ends the high speed change display, and starts the reach derivation display. The effect game played on the sub display device 530 is in a state in which effect skipping is possible when the N+1th special figure variation display game is started.

The gaming machine 10 performs reach derivation display from timing t72 to timing t73 after 5 seconds, performs reach production display from timing t73 to timing t74 for 22 seconds, and performs three symbol temporary stop display from timing t74. In the effect game played on the sub display device 530, the effect skip becomes impossible as the three symbol temporary stop display starts to be performed at the timing t74.

The gaming machine 10 performs a three-pattern temporary stop display from timing t74 to timing t75 for 2 seconds, and performs swing display for n seconds from timing t75 to timing t76 at which the N+1th special figure variation display game ends, and the effect game. To finish.

According to this, the gaming machine 10 can execute the effect game even during the special figure variation display game that is not the target of execution of the effect game. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can improve the interest of the player.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 straddles the special figure variation display game when there is a special figure variation display game to be the target of execution of the effect game in the pending storage, and is a feature subject to execution of the relevant effect game. Since the effect game corresponding to the figure variation display game is played, it is possible to clearly indicate to the player that there is a pending memory for deriving the reach effect. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can prevent the player from overlooking the reach effect.

[Modification 5 of Fifth Embodiment]
In Modification 4 of the fifth embodiment, when the special figure variation display game being executed does not derive the reach effect (D126: NO), or when the remaining time of the special figure variation display game being executed is short. Even in the case of (D127: NO), the reach effect is derived in the pending storage, and the special figure variation display game (the special figure variation display game which is the target of execution of the effect game) is executed to perform the effect for 2 seconds or more. If there is a pending storage and the hit does not occur before the start of the special figure variation display game, it is determined to be an execution trigger, and the effect game corresponding to the special figure variation display game of the relevant pending storage is handled. Suppose that the special figure variation display game is executed before the effect starts.

In the modified example 5 of the fifth embodiment, the special figure variation display game being executed does not derive the reach effect (D126: NO), or the remaining time of the special figure variation display game being executed is short. Even if it is (D127: NO) (even if the special figure variation display game being executed is not a special figure variation display game that is not the target of execution of the effect game), if the pending storage exists, the effect game is executed. To do.

For example, the gaming machine 10, regardless of the contents of the effect of the special figure variation display game that is currently being executed, a production game including three symbol temporary stop derivation display and three symbol temporary stop display (2 seconds). Execute. In this case, the game machine 10 sets the execution time of the three-symbol temporary stop derivation display so that the three-symbol temporary stop display (2 seconds) can be performed in the special figure variation display game to be executed next.

The processing flow of the fifth modification of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 101 is a timing chart showing a flow of processing when the production control device of the modified example 5 of the fifth embodiment plays the production game over a plurality of special figure variation display games.

In the timing chart shown in FIG. 101, the Nth special figure variation display game is a special figure variation display game that is not the target of execution of the effect game (for example, a special figure variation display game that does not derive the reach effect, the remaining time It is assumed that the special figure variation display game is less than 2 seconds or the special figure variation display game in which the effect game has been executed).

When the start memory is generated at the timing t81 of the Nth special figure variation display game, the gaming machine 10 specifies that there is a reserved memory (the reserved memory is not 0).
Then, the gaming machine 10 starts the effect game corresponding to the N+1th special figure variation display game from the timing t81, and starts performing the three-symbol temporary stop derivation display. Sub display device 53
In the effect game performed in 0, since the corresponding special map variable display game (N+1th time) has not started with the start of the three-symbol temporary stop derivation display, the effect skip is impossible. Becomes

At the timing t82, the gaming machine 10 ends the Nth special view variation display game and starts the (N+1)th special figure variation display game. The effect game played on the sub display device 530 is in a state in which effect skipping is possible when the N+1th special figure variation display game is started.

The gaming machine 10 performs three symbol temporary stop derivation display from timing t82 to timing t83, and performs three symbol temporary stop display from timing t83. In the effect game played on the sub display device 530, the effect skip becomes impossible as the three-symbol temporary stop display is started at the timing t83.

The gaming machine 10 performs the three-symbol temporary stop display from timing t83 until timing t84 for 2 seconds, and ends the effect game.
According to this, the gaming machine 10 can secure an opportunity to execute the effect game. That is, the gaming machine 10 can prevent the starting memory from being saturated (exceeding the maximum number).

Note that the gaming machine 10 may link the accessory and the effect game. For example, in the production game, when the symbol is temporarily stopped at "month", the character month may be moved to the center, and when temporarily stopped by another symbol, the character may be stopped or returned to the initial position. ..

In addition, the gaming machine 10 does not operate the accessory even if the accessory and the effect game are interlocked, because if the effect game can be skipped, the operation may not be in time due to the skip. Good.

Further, even when the game machine 10 links the character game with the effect game, if the effect game cannot be skipped in place of the above, the game machine 10 operates the character object to clarify the boundary of the game. You may not allow it.

Further, in the gaming machine 10, even when the accessory and the effect game are interlocked, even when the effect game is being executed, when the remaining time of the corresponding special figure variation display game is short, the effect game is also ended. The accessory may not be operated because it is near.

In addition, even when the gaming machine 10 interlocks the accessory and the effect game, in the case where a specific effect (for example, an effect in which the effect may be hidden by the accessory) is performed in the special figure variation display game. May not operate the accessory. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can prevent the visibility of the effect performed in the special figure variation display game from being lowered.

The gaming machine 10 of the fifth embodiment (including the modified examples 1 to 4) has the following features in one aspect.
(1) The gaming machine 10 includes a main control unit (game control device 100) and a sub-control unit (production control device 300). The main control means controls the progress of the first variable display game (special figure variable display game), which has the right to execute the detection of the establishment of the first condition (winning at the starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37). To control. The sub-control means receives an instruction from the main control means to display the first variable display game on the first display means (display device 41), and establishes a second condition different from the first condition (game ball production flow path). 354), the progress (start timing, end timing) of the second variable display game (rendering game) that has the right to execute detection of the second variable display game is controlled asynchronously with the first variable display game. Is displayed on the second display means (sub display device 530),
At the same time, the result mode of the second variable display game is derived based on the result mode derived by the first variable display game in the variable display.

(2) The game machine 10 of (1) is an operation means (push button 25) capable of accepting an operation.
Further comprising: when the operation mode of the operating means is accepted, the result mode of the first variable display game is derived from the result mode of the second variable display game based on the result mode of the first variable display game. Can also be derived before.

(3) The gaming machine 10 of (1) further includes operation means (push button 25), the second variable display game can shorten the effect (skip effect), and the slave control device operates the operation means. When the operation of is detected, the effect of the second variable display game is shortened.

(4) The result mode of the second variable display game of (3) is the same mode as the result mode of the first variable display game.
(5) The sub-control means of (4) derives the result form in the second variable display game at a timing before deriving the result form in the first variable display game.

(6) The sub control means of (5) derives the result mode of the second variable display game at the timing when the operation means is operated.
(7) The sub-control means of (6) determines the presentation mode of the second variable display game based on the remaining time of the first variable display game which is simultaneously executed.

(8) The sub-control means of (7) determines the effect mode of the second variable display game based on the result mode of the first variable display game which is simultaneously executed.
(9) When the sub-control means of (8) derives the result mode (hit) that triggers the first variable display game to shift to the special game state, the first variable display game displays the result mode. Before deriving, the effect mode in the special game state is set using the second display means.

[Sixth Embodiment]
Next, the gaming machine 10 of the sixth embodiment will be described. The gaming machine 10 of the sixth embodiment includes a gaming board 3000 (see FIG. 76) like the gaming machine 10 of the fifth embodiment. The gaming machine 10 of the sixth embodiment uses the display device 41, the sub display device 530, the push button 25 (see FIG. 62 ), the effect lamp 540, and the board effect devices 550 and 551 to make a reservation notice. Produce.

First, the configuration of the display screen of the display device 41 will be described with reference to FIG. Figure 1
02 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen in the display device of the sixth embodiment.
In the gaming machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment, the position of the sub display device 530 can be changed and the position is retracted to the lower end of the center case 40 (retracted position), and the position is advanced to the front of the display device 41 (advance position). ) And can be switched.

First, FIG. 102(1) shows the display screens of the center case 40 and the display device 41 when the sub display device 530 is in the retracted position while the symbols are changing in the variable display game. The effect lamp 540 and the board effect devices 550 and 551 are turned on in a manner corresponding to the symbol variation.
For example, the effect lamp 540 and the board effect devices 550 and 551 blink in white. The board effect devices 550 and 551 are in a non-operating state.

The display device 41 shown in FIG. 102(1) has two sets of decorative patterns, a special figure 1 reserved number display 603, a special figure 2 reserved number display 604, a reserved display 605, and a reserved consumption display 606. Including.

The two sets of decorative designs include a large design group 601 as a first decorative design and a small design group 602 as a second decorative design. The large symbol group 601 is in charge of game production for the purpose of improving interest. Therefore, the large symbol group 601 is displayed large in the approximate center of the display device 41. Large pattern group 601
Includes a left symbol 601L, a middle symbol 601C, and a right symbol 601R. The left symbol 601L, the middle symbol 601C, and the right symbol 601R on the display screen 600 all indicate that the corresponding special figure variation display game is in the symbol variation state.

The large symbol group 601 starts changing in the order of the left symbol 601L, the middle symbol 601C, and the right symbol 601R, and stops (including temporary stop) in the order of the left symbol 601L, the middle symbol 601C, and the right symbol 601R. Therefore, the large symbol group 601, in many cases, the left symbol 601L and the middle symbol 601.
A reach mode is formed with C, and the hit mode can be formed after waiting for the stop of the right symbol 601R.

The small symbol group 602 takes charge of notification of the variable display state for the purpose of improving the ease of grasping the game state of the player. Therefore, the small symbol group 602 is displayed small in the peripheral portion of the display device 41 so as to ensure visibility without disturbing the display effect by the large symbol group 601. Small symbol group 602,
It includes a left design, a middle design, and a right design. The left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol in the small symbol group 602 of the display screen 600 all indicate that the corresponding special symbol variation display game is in the symbol variation state.

In general, the large symbol group 601 is displayed larger than the small symbol group 602, the degree of freedom of the display position is high, and the display mode can be greatly changed. On the contrary, the small symbol group 602 is
Compared with the large symbol group 601, it is displayed in a small size, and the degree of freedom of display position is low (for example, position fixing).

The special figure 1 hold number display 603 displays the hold storage number (starting storage number) of the special figure 1 game. The special figure 2 hold number display 604 displays the number of pending storage of the special figure 2 game. Depending on the display mode, the hold display 605 can clearly indicate the number of held storages of the special figure variation display game and can notify the degree of expectation for the game result for each held storage. The number of pending storages displayed by the pending display 605 corresponds to the sum of the number of pending storages displayed by the special figure 1 pending number display 603 and the number of pending storages displayed by the special figure 2 pending number display 604. Depending on the display mode, the hold decommissioning display 606 can indicate that the special figure variable display game is in a variable display state, and can notify the degree of expectation for the game result.

Since the reserved memory number of the special figure 1 game indicated by the special figure 1 reserved number display 603 is “2” and the reserved memory number of the special figure 2 game indicated by the special figure 2 reserved number display 604 is “0”, Hold display 605
The number of pending storages indicated by is "2". In addition, the hold consumption display 606 indicates that the special figure variation display game is in the process of symbol variation.

Next, FIG. 102(2) shows the display screens of the center case 40 and the display device 41 when the sub display device 530 is in the advanced position while the symbols are changing in the variable display game. The effect lamp 540 and the board effect devices 550 and 551 are turned on in a manner corresponding to the symbol variation.
The board effect devices 550 and 551 are in a non-operating state.

The display device 41 shown in FIG. 102(2) includes a small symbol group 602, a special figure 1 reserved number display 603, a special figure 2 reserved number display 604, and a reserved consumption display 606 in the display content.
The sub display device 530 is in the advanced position and hides a part of the display area of the display device 41.
For example, the sub display device 530 is in a position to hide the hold display 605. At this time, the display device 41 displays the hold display 605 in the display area hidden by the sub display device 530.
May or may not be displayed. The display device 41 can reduce the processing load of the effect control device 300 by not displaying the hold display 605 in the display area hidden by the sub display device 530.

The sub display device 530 can display the effect game. The display device 41 sets a production area 560 in place of the display of the large symbol group 601 in order to direct the player's attention to the production game, and displays a required production display. The effect game is a variable display game that is performed in connection with the pending notice effect. The effect game is a special display variable display game (including the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game) or a variable display game for production different from the normal figure variable display game. It should be noted that the pending notice effect is one aspect of the prefetch effect, and the gaming machine 10 has the pending display 605 and the pending consumption display 60.
Use 6 and 6 to make a pending announcement effect.

Look-ahead effect (also called look-ahead notice or look-ahead notice effect) means that the variable display game corresponding to the start winning memory (the starting winning memory is held, or simply called) is not executed yet. In order to notify the player in advance with a certain degree of reliability whether or not it will be a big hit when it is played, a presentation such as holding display of starting winning prize memory etc. in a manner different from usual Is. And the pre-reading system command (pre-reading variation system command, and pre-reading pattern system command) is the command which gives advance notice of the variation pattern and the stop pattern corresponding to the hold of the starting winning prize memory that is the target of the pre-reading effect, and the game at the time of starting winning. It is transmitted from the control device 100 to the effect control device 300. Note that normal variable-based commands and symbol-based commands that are not prefetched are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 at the start of variable display.

Here, the effect game displayed on the sub display device 530 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 103 is a diagram showing a display example of the effect game on the sub display device according to the sixth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 103(1), the sub display device 530 has three matrix display portions 530.
A pattern or an image can be variably displayed for each of L, 530C, and 530R. For example, the sub display device 530 stops and displays the left partial image of the push button 25 on the matrix display portion 530L and variably displays the matrix display portions 530C and 530R (see FIG.
2)). Then, the sub display device 530 displays the push button 2 on the matrix display portion 530C.
The middle image of 5 is stopped and displayed, and the matrix display portion 530R is variably displayed (FIG. 103).
(3)). Subsequently, the sub display device 530 stops and displays the right portion image of the push button 25 on the matrix display portion 530R, and displays the entire image of the push button 25 on the matrix display portions 530L, 530C, and 530R (FIG. 103 (4)). ).

In this way, the gaming machine 10 can play an effect game in which the entire image of the push button 25 is derived on the sub display device 530. The production game is push button 2
Derivation of the whole image of No. 5 is the success of the production, and not deriving the whole image of the push button 25 is the failure of the production.

It should be noted that the gaming machine 10 may perform outlier variation without deriving the entire image of the push button 25 in the sub display device 530, or may perform reach variation before deriving the entire image of the push button 25 in the sub display device 530. May be. Further, the execution timing of the effect game may be the establishment of a predetermined event trigger, for example, the reception timing of a prefetching type command, or the winning timing of a predetermined winning opening.

In response to the success of the effect game on the sub display device 530, the gaming machine 10 displays the display device 41.
The push button 25 for the player using the sub display device 530 and the effect lamp 540.
Guide the operation of. Here, the operation guidance of the push button 25 is shown in FIGS. 104 and 105.
Will be explained. FIG. 104 is a diagram (part 1) showing an example of push button operation guidance using the display device, the sub display device, and the effect lamp of the sixth embodiment. FIG. 105 is a diagram (part 2) illustrating an example of push button operation guidance using the display device, the sub display device, and the effect lamp of the sixth embodiment.

First, the gaming machine 10 lights the effect lamp 540 in a predetermined mode while keeping the state in which the entire image of the push button 25 is derived displayed on the sub display device 530 to notify the success of the effect game (FIG. 104 (1 )).
Next, the gaming machine 10 scrolls upward to display the entire image of the push button 25 displayed on the sub display device 530. At this time, the gaming machine 10 displays, in the effect area 560 of the display device 41, a range lacking from the display range of the sub display device 530 in the entire image of the push button 25 (FIG. 104 (2)). That is, the gaming machine 10 displays the entire image of the push button 25 on the display device 41 and the sub display device 530, while displaying the sub display device 53.
The entire image of the push button 25 is scrolled upward from the display range of 0 to the effect area 560 of the display device 41. As a result, the gaming machine 10 allows the player to easily perceive the relevance between the display regarding the result of the effect game performed on the sub display device 530 and the display regarding the operation guidance of the push button 25 performed on the display device 41. be able to.

In the case of displaying the entire image of the push button 25 (result form of the effect game) on the sub display device 530, the gaming machine 10 may also give a notice of the operation result of the push button 25 by using the effect lamp 540. Good. For example, the gaming machine 10 detects a push operation of the push button 25 and displays a hold display (hold standby display or hold exhaustion display).
When changing, the display mode of the effect lamp 540 is changed to the display mode corresponding to the changed hold display mode. More specifically, when the gaming machine 10 detects the pressing operation of the push button 25 and changes the display mode of the specific hold standby display from white display to red display, the push button 2
The change of the hold display mode is suggested in advance by setting the effect lamp 540 to the red display mode before the pressing operation of No. 5 is detected. It should be noted that the gaming machine 10 does not necessarily have to set the display mode of the effect lamp 540 to the display mode that matches the changed hold display mode in suggesting a change in the hold display mode, and a display that matches the changed hold display mode. The display mode may have a lower degree (expectation level, reliability level, etc.) than the mode.

When the entire image of the push button 25 is displayed in the effect area 560 of the display device 41, the gaming machine 10 displays a message regarding the operation guidance of the push button 25 on the sub display device 530. For example, the sub display device 530 horizontally scrolls and displays the message "READY" before the operation reception timing of the push button 25 to prompt the player to prepare for the operation of the push button 25 (FIG. 105(1)).

Then, the gaming machine 10 changes the display mode of the entire image of the push button 25 in the effect area 560 of the display device 41 (for example, increases the brightness) to inform the player that it is the operation acceptance timing of the push button 25. invite. Further, the gaming machine 10 has the sub display device 5
A message regarding operation guidance of the push button 25 is displayed on 30. For example, the sub-display device 530 displays a message "Press!" at the operation acceptance timing of the push button 25 to prompt the player to operate the push button 25 (FIG. 105(2)).

As described above, in the gaming machine 10, the display device 41 and the sub-display device 530 cooperate with each other to guide the operation of the push button 25, so that the player can be more surely notified of the operation guide and the interest is improved. Can be planned. Although the gaming machine 10 displays the message and the like on the sub display device 530, the display device 41 may display the message and the like in addition to the sub display device 530 or in place of the sub display device 530. ..

The gaming machine 10 displays the message “READY” or the message “press!” to be displayed on the sub display device 530 from the display range of the sub display device 530 to the effect area 560 of the display device 41, similarly to the entire image of the push button 25. The display may be scrolled upwards.

It should be noted that the gaming machine 10 may display the image scrolled to the effect area 560 in a display mode such as the dot display displayed on the sub display device 530, or a low-resolution display such as the dot display. The display mode may be switched to a high resolution display mode instead of the mode.

The gaming machine 10 accepts the operation of the push button 25, and performs the hold announcement effect accompanied by the change of the display mode of the hold display 605 or the hold exhaustion display 606. With reference to FIG. 106 to FIG. 108, the pending notice effect accompanied by the change of the display mode of the pending display 605 or the pending display 606 will be described. FIG. 106 is a diagram (No. 1) showing an example of the pending notice effect accompanied by the change of the display mode of the pending display or the pending display of the sixth embodiment. FIG. 107 is a diagram showing an example of a pending notice effect accompanied by a change in the display mode of the pending display or the pending usage display of the sixth embodiment (
Part 2). FIG. 108 is a diagram (No. 3) showing an example of the pending notice effect accompanied by the change of the display mode of the pending display or the pending display of the sixth embodiment.

The gaming machine 10 receives an operation (for example, a pressing operation) of the push button 25, and changes the display mode of the effect lamp 540 according to the reliability of notifying as the prefetch effect (FIG. 106 (
1)). For example, the gaming machine 10 turns on the effect lamp 540 in a display mode corresponding to the changed display mode of the hold display 605 or the hold consumption display 606. More specifically, the gaming machine 1
0 is the effect lamp 54 when the hold display 605 or the hold exhaustion display 606 is changed to red.
0 is illuminated in red.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 changes the display mode of the effect lamp 540 and the board effect device 550.
, 551 is changed ((1) in FIG. 106). For example, the gaming machine 10 moves the movable member 551a hidden on the back side of the board effect device 551 to directly below the effect lamp 540.
Such a change in the operation mode of the board production devices 550 and 551 can direct the player's attention to the upper part of the display device 41, and also direct the player's attention to the change in the display mode of the production lamp 540 performed at the same time. be able to. Accordingly, the gaming machine 10 can easily make the player feel that the effect lamp 540 and the board effect devices 550 and 551 are responsible for the effect related to the pending notice effect. Further, the gaming machine 10 can direct the player's attention to the display device 41.

Further, the gaming machine 10 changes the position of the sub display device 530 from the advanced position to the retracted position (
106(1) and (2)). As a result, the display device 41 clearly shows the hold display 605.
In this way, the gaming machine 10 can make the player feel the correspondence relationship between the effect game and the pending notice effect from the interlocking of the evacuation of the sub display device 530 and the display of the pending display 605. Note that the display device 41 provides a time lag that does not change the display mode of the hold display 605 or the hold exhaustion display 606 for a predetermined time even after the position of the sub display device 530 is at the retracted position (FIG. 106 (2. )). That is, in the gaming machine 10, the production lamp 540 changes the display mode, the board production devices 550 and 551 change the operation mode, and the sub-display device 530 changes the position. The display mode of the display 606 is maintained.

Although the gaming machine 10 accepts the operation of the push button 25 and changes the position of the sub display device 530 from the advanced position to the retracted position, the push button 2 is waited at the advanced position.
An image according to the operation of 5 may be displayed. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can perform various display effects by using the sub display device 530 that stands by at the advance position and the display device 41.

Next, the gaming machine 10 changes the operation mode of the board effect devices 550 and 551 to the initial state (FIG. 107(1)). For example, the gaming machine 10 moves the movable member 551a that has been moved directly below the effect lamp 540 to a position (initial state) hidden behind the board effect device 551.

Further, the gaming machine 10 displays the hold display 605 or the hold exhaustion display 60 from the effect lamp 540.
6 is displayed in the effect area 560 of the display device 41 (FIG. 107(1)).
). Correspondence display 562 is a display for notifying the correspondence relationship between effect lamp 540 and hold display 605 or hold exhaustion display 606, and is, for example, a lightning effect similar to the light emitting mode of effect lamp 540, and a large symbol group 601. Among them, it is superimposed on the middle pattern 601C. More specifically, the gaming machine 10 changes the correspondence display 562 to a red effect when the effect lamp 540 is changed to red. Note that the correspondence display 562 may be capable of changing the shape, size, color, display time, and the like, regardless of the display mode of the effect lamp 540, in accordance with the reliability notified as the prefetch effect. The correspondence display 562 is supposed to be superimposed on the middle symbol 601C in the large symbol group 601, but may be superimposed on a symbol other than the middle symbol (for example, the left symbol 601L or the right symbol 601R), and which symbol is superimposed. Depending on the hold display 605 or hold hold display 6
The display mode of 06 may be different. For example, the correspondence display 562 may indicate which display mode of the hold display 605 and the hold exhaustion display 606 is switched depending on which pattern is superimposed, or the hold display depending on which pattern is superimposed. 6
05 or the display mode after the change of the reserved digest display 606 may be changed in color, shape, size, or the like.

Further, the gaming machine 10 changes the display mode of the hold display 605 or the hold exhaustion display 606 according to the reliability of notifying as the prefetch effect (FIG. 107(1)). For example, game machine 1
0 changes the hold display 605 or the hold exhaustion display 606 from white to red.

For example, it is not easy for the player to grasp the change timing and the change contents only by changing the display mode of the hold display 605 or the hold exhaustion display 606. However, the gaming machine 10 includes various effect devices (display device 41, sub-display device 530, push button 25, effect lamp 54).
0, the board production device 550, 551, etc.), the player's interest can be guided to the hold display 605 or the hold digestion display 606.

The gaming machine 10 prioritizes the display content of the effect area 560 over the display content of the large symbol group 601 when the effect area 560 for hold announcement is set in the display area of the display device 41 during execution of the hold notification effect. To do. At this time, the gaming machine 10 may hide the large symbol group 601 or may display it by reducing the transparency of the large symbol group 601.

Next, the gaming machine 10 returns the display mode of the effect lamp 540 to the normal display mode (for example, white lighting) (FIG. 107 (2)). Further, the gaming machine 10 cancels the setting of the effect area 560 for the notice of suspension in the display area of the display device 41 (FIG. 107(2)).

In this way, the gaming machine 10 includes the effect lamp 540, the board effect devices 550 and 551,
Correspondence display 562 and hold display 605 or hold exhaustion display 606 cooperate with each other to produce an effect mode (
Since the display mode and the operation mode) are changed, it is possible to easily inform the player of the notification target and the notification content.

In addition, the effect lamp 540 has a light source 543 (see FIG. 79) through a display plate 548 (see FIG. 79).
It is possible to switch the emission color by projecting the emission color of (see) on the projection lens 541 (see FIG. 79). In addition, the effect lamp 540 uses the light source 5 through the display plate 546 (see FIG. 79).
By projecting the light emitted from 43 onto the projection lens 541, a character such as a tiger can be displayed (FIG. 108(1)). At this time, the gaming machine 10 can display the correspondence display 562, the hold display 605, or the hold exhaustion display 606 in a striped pattern corresponding to the display mode of the effect lamp 540.

In addition, the effect lamp 540 can display a message such as “heat” by projecting the light emitted from the light source 543 to the projection lens 541 through the display plate 544 (see FIG. 79) (FIG. 108 (2). )). At this time, the gaming machine 10 can display the correspondence display 562, the hold display 605, or the hold exhaustion display 606 in a flame-like display mode corresponding to the display mode of the effect lamp 540. Although not shown, the effect lamp 540 switches the plurality of display plates 545, 547, and 549 to output light emitted from the light source 543 to the projection lens 541.
By projecting on, you can display an animation of petals dancing. At this time,
In the gaming machine 10, the correspondence display 562 and the hold display 60 are associated with the display mode of the effect lamp 540.
5 or the reserved digestion display 606 may be displayed in a display mode such as a petal pattern.

Next, the relationship between the display mode on the hold display 605 or the hold exhaustion display 606 and the degree of expectation will be described with reference to FIG. 109. FIG. 109 is a diagram showing an example of the relationship between the display mode and the degree of expectation in the pending notice effect of the sixth embodiment. Although the display mode of the hold display 605 will be described, the display mode of the hold exhaustion display 606 can be the same.

The display modes of the hold display 605 include patterns P10 to P19. The patterns P10 and P11 are default (standard) display modes, for example, circular and white display modes. The pattern P10 is a display mode (non-hidden) regarding the pending storage for which the pending announcement effect is not scheduled. The pattern P11 is a display mode (incubation A) related to the pending storage for which the pending announcement effect is scheduled.

The pattern P12 is a non-default (non-standard) display mode, for example, a circular and white blinking display mode. The pattern P12 is a display mode (incubation B) related to the pending storage in which the pending announcement effect is scheduled.

Both the pattern P11 and the pattern P12 relate to the pending storage in which the pending notice effect is scheduled, but the pattern P11 does not clarify that the pending notice effect is scheduled, and the pattern P12 is the pending notice effect. It is different in clarifying that.

The pattern P13 is a non-default display mode, for example, a circular and blue display mode. The pattern P14 is a non-default display mode, for example, a circular and green display mode. The pattern P15 is a non-default display mode, for example, a circular and red display mode. The pattern P16 is a non-default display mode, for example, a circular and petal (cherry) pattern display mode. The pattern P17 is a non-default display mode, for example, a circular and iridescent display mode.

In the patterns P13 to P17, the degree of expectation (for example, the degree of expectation) corresponding to the result mode of the variable display game is set. It should be noted that the degree of expectation is not limited to the one that corresponds to the possibility of deriving the hit, and may be one that corresponds to the development stage of the variable display effect, such as reach or super reach. It should be noted that the general winning a prize notice display effect may notify the degree of expectation independently of the hold notice effect of another stage, or may notify the degree of expectation in combination with the hold notice effect of another stage. May be

The pattern P18 is a non-default display mode, for example, a circular and tiger pattern display mode. The pattern P18 is a temporary display mode, and changes from the pattern P15 to one of the patterns P17 at a delayed timing such as during a holding shift. That is, the pattern P
18 is a display mode showing a feeling of expectation that the pattern P15 will develop into any one of the patterns P17.

The pattern P19 is a non-default display mode, for example, a flame-like display mode. The pattern P19 is a temporary display mode, and changes to either the pattern P16 or the pattern P17 at a delayed timing such as during a holding shift. That is, the pattern P19
Is a display mode showing an expectation that the pattern P16 or P17 is developed.

The gaming machine 10 sets the lowest expected degree to the pattern P13, sets the highest expected degree to the pattern P17, and sets the expected degree to be gradually increased from the pattern P13 to the pattern P17. Note that the gaming machine 10 sets the pattern P to a specific degree of expectation of 0% to 100%, for example.
13 to the pattern P17, for example, "low", "medium", "
A high degree of expectation may be set, such as “high”.

The patterns P18 and 19 may be non-temporary display modes. In that case, the gaming machine 10 can set a predetermined degree of expectation in the patterns P18 and 19 in the same manner as the patterns P13 to P17.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 can perform the pending notice effect as a series from the starting point of the effect game on the sub display device 530 to the change of the display mode of the hold display 605 or the hold exhaustion display 606. In such a gaming machine 10, the player's attention is given to the player's action during the progress of the game (for example, the position switching of the sub display device 530 and the board effect devices 550 and 551).
It is possible to increase the player's interest in the pending notice effect while attracting the player. Further, the game machine 10 can make the pending notice effect more understandable to the player by interposing the accessory operation.

Next, a modified example of the pending notice effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 110 is a diagram showing an example of a pending notice effect accompanied by a change in the display mode of the pending display or the pending display of the modification of the sixth embodiment.

In the board effect devices 550 and 551 shown in FIG. 107(1), the correspondence display 562 has an effect lamp 5.
The movable member 551 does not have to wait from 40 to the hold display 605 or the hold exhaustion display 606.
Although a has been moved to a position hidden behind the board production device 551, the movable member 55 is waited until the corresponding display 562 moves from the production lamp 540 to the hold display 605 or the hold exhaustion display 606.
1a may be moved to a position where it is hidden behind the board effect device 551 (FIG. 110).
(1)).

At this time, the correspondence display 562 can have the same display mode regardless of the position of the movable member 551a. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can reduce the processing load of the effect control device 300, and can perform the corresponding display without a sense of discomfort even in an unexpected situation where the movable member 551a does not operate.

In addition, the board production devices 550 and 551 may include a light emitting unit (for example, a full-color LED) including the movable member 551a, and the light emitting unit included in the movable member 551a corresponds to the production lamp 540 in a light emitting mode (for example, synchronous). Display) (FIG. 110(1)). Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can increase the player's interest in the effect lamp 540 by the movable member 551a. Further, in the gaming machine 10, the light emitting modes of the other light emitting units included in the board effect devices 550 and 551 may be different from the light emitting modes included in the movable member 551a. As a result, the gaming machine 10 moves from the center case 40 to the movable member 551a and the effect lamp 540.
The player's interest in the effect lamp 540 can be further enhanced by highlighting and.

In the board effect devices 550 and 551 shown in FIGS. 106(1) and (2), the movable member 551a is moved to the position directly below the effect lamp 540 from the back surface of the board effect device 551.
The movable member 550a may be moved to the position directly below the effect lamp 540 from the back surface (FIG. 110(2)). In the gaming machine 10, the board effect devices 550 and 551 are movable members 550a,
It may be possible to select which of the 551a is to be moved in relation to the reliability of notifying by the pending notice effect. For example, the gaming machine 10 notifies the movable member 550 by reporting different reliability levels when the movable member 551a moves and when the movable member 550a moves.
It is possible to give a new interest to the player regarding the movement of a and 551a.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 determines whether to move any of the movable members 550a and 551a.
The operation content of the push button 25 may be different. For example, the movable member 551a
Movement of the push button 25 corresponds to one pressing operation of the push button 25, and movement of the movable member 550a
This corresponds to a plurality of pressing operations (continuous hitting operation) of the push button 25. At this time, the movable member 5
50a may be moved in association with the number of times the push button 25 is pressed (
FIG. 110(2)). For example, the movable member 550a moves little by little each time the push button 25 is pressed, and when the number of pressing operations reaches 10, the movable member 550a moves directly below the effect lamp 540.

Further, the gaming machine 10 can display an operation guide display 561 in the effect area 560 of the display device 41 to guide the continuous hitting operation of the push button 25. For example, the gaming machine 10 can display a continuous hit operation image of the push button 25 as the operation guide display 561.
Further, the gaming machine 10 may display a message “continuous hit!” or the like on the sub display device 530 in addition to the operation guidance display 561 or instead of the operation guidance display 561.

Next, the execution timing of the pending notice effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 111 is a diagram showing an example of a timing chart of the pending notice effect of the sixth embodiment. First, the start winning at the timing t0 can be the starting point of the pending announcement effect. Performance control device 300
Detects a start winning that can be a starting point of the pending notice effect by receiving a prefetching system command from the game control device 100 at timing t0.

Further, the start winning at the timing t0 is incremented by "1" to increase the number of reserved memories to "m+1" when the number of reserved memories before starting winning is "m (for example, any of integers from 0 to 7)". To update.

In addition, the production control device 300 can set a pending notice production standby state in which the execution of the pending notice production is waited for. Thereby, the effect control device 300 can adjust the start timing and the execution time of the effect game on the sub display device 530. For example, the performance control device 300
Starts the production game by making it possible to cancel the suspension notice production standby state after timing t1 that exceeds the suspension shift timing and detecting the suspension notice production execution timing at timing t2. It should be noted that the hold shift timing is a timing at which the variable display count is incremented by "1" to update the variable display count to "n+1" when the variable display count is "n (for example, any integer of 1 or more)". Further, the pending notice effect execution trigger can be a timer trigger or an event trigger after the timing at which the pending notice effect standby state can be released. More specifically, the effect control device 300 may start the effect game by canceling the hold announcement effect standby state with a timing 3000 ms after the hold shift timing as a timer trigger. Alternatively, the effect control device 300 may release the pending notice effect standby state by using the flow-down detection (see FIG. 76) of the effect flow path 354 of the game sphere after the hold shift timing as an event trigger to start the effect game. Moreover, the effect control device 300 does not necessarily need to be able to release the hold advance notice effect standby state beyond the hold shift timing. In addition, the performance control device 300
May set the reception of the prefetching type command as the start timing of the effect game without setting the hold announcement effect standby state.

When the effect control device 300 starts the effect game at the timing t2, the effect control device 300 continues the effect game for a predetermined time, and derives (displays) the result of the effect game at the timing t3. When the overall image of the push button 25 is derived on the sub-display device 530 as a result of the effect game, the effect control device 300 displays the operation guidance of the push button 25 for a predetermined time from timing t3. In addition, when the operation of the push button 25 is detected at the timing t4, the effect control device 300 does not wait for the predetermined time to elapse, and the corresponding guidance (for example, the correspondence display 56) is displayed.
2) is displayed. Rendering control device 300 changes the display mode (hold mode) of hold display 605 or hold exhaustion display 606 in response to the corresponding guidance at timing t5.

In this way, in the gaming machine 10, since a plurality of effect devices cooperate with each other from the start winning to the change of the holding mode, it is possible to easily inform the player of the notification target and the notification content while maintaining a high interest. it can. Further, the gaming machine 10 has a movable effect device (for example, the sub display device 53).
0 or the board effect devices 550, 551, etc. operate, it is possible to prevent the player's attention from moving away from the hold notification effect because it cooperates with the hold notification effect. In addition, the gaming machine 10 has an effect point (for example, the sub display device 530, the board effect devices 550 and 551, the effect lamp 540, the hold display 6).
05 and the display position of the hold exhaustion display 606) are arranged in a dispersed manner, it is possible to prevent the player's attention from moving away from the hold announcement production because the production areas cooperate with each other.

Note that the gaming machine 10 may be capable of executing an effect (for example, the effect game of the fifth embodiment) other than the pending announcement effect in the pending announcement effect standby state. In addition, the gaming machine 10 may wait for execution of effects including effects (for example, the effect game of the fifth embodiment) other than the pending notification effects in the pending notification effect standby state. In this case, the gaming machine 10
May notify the duration of the pending notice production standby state. For example, the duration of the pending notice production standby state or the special figure game in the pending notice production standby state may be displayed by the sub display device 530 or another display device. You may make it display a variable display frequency etc. Further, the gaming machine 10 is, in the hold notice production standby state, the duration of the hold notice production standby state and the special drawing game in the hold notice production standby state by BGM and sound effects (including sound) output from the speakers 19a and 19b. You may make it notify about the frequency|count of fluctuation display etc. Thereby, the gaming machine 10
Can improve the player's expectation for canceling the hold announcement effect standby state. In addition, the gaming machine 10 can maintain the player's attention to the release of the pending notice effect standby state and prevent the player from overlooking the pending notice effect after releasing the pending notice effect standby state.

The gaming machine 10 has a backup memory (for example, EEPR) in the effect control device 300.
OM, etc.) may be provided, and in the power-off state, information about the hold announcement production standby state may be stored and retained in the backup memory so that the power can be restored to the hold announcement production standby state after the power is restored. For example, the information on the standby notice production standby state includes the presence or absence of the suspension notice production standby state and the production parts (for example, the sub-display device 530, the board production devices 550 and 551, the production lamp 540, the suspension display 605, and the suspension display 606. The current display mode and the final display mode for each display position) are included. At this time, the gaming machine 10 sets the performance area to the default mode after the power is restored, and is triggered by the reception of a predetermined command (for example, a fluctuation start command, a hold number command, a prefetch command, etc.) from the game control device 100. Then, the information regarding the standby notice production standby state is read out from the backup memory to return to the suspension notice production standby state. When the gaming machine 10 returns to the pending notice production standby state after the power is restored, the gaming machine 10 may wait for the pending notice production execution trigger to perform the pending notice production, or whether the pending notice production execution trigger is established. Regardless, it may be considered that it has been established and the hold notice production may be performed.
Further, when the gaming machine 10 returns to the pending notice effect standby state after the power is restored, the gaming machine 10 may display the final mode without passing through the intermediate process of the pending notice effect. Further, in the case where the effect control device 300 does not include a backup memory, the gaming machine 10 may not execute any pending notice effect regarding the pending notice effect standby state after the power is restored.

Next, as a modified example of the sixth embodiment, detailed expectation notification made by the effect lamp 540 and the board effect devices 550 and 551 will be described with reference to FIG. 112. FIG. 112 is a diagram showing an example of the expectation notification of the modified example of the sixth embodiment.

The gaming machine 10 of the sixth embodiment accepts an operation (for example, a pressing operation) of the push button 25 and changes the display mode of the effect lamp 540 in accordance with the reliability of notifying as the prefetch effect (FIG. 106(1)). ). In the gaming machine 10 of the modified example of the sixth embodiment, in addition to the effect lamp 540, the degree of expectation is informed by the five light emitting modes of the light emitting units included in the board effect devices 550 and 551 and the light emitting units included in the movable members 550a and 551a. To perform.

The effect lamp 540 notifies about the degree of expectation, and the board effect devices 550 and 551 (the movable member 5).
(Including 50a and 551a) gives a detailed expectation. For example, the effect lamp 540 is
The approximate degree of expectation is notified in the display mode as shown in FIG. More specifically, the effect lamp 540 has a higher expectation than green when the emission mode is red, and a lower expectation than the petal (cherry) pattern. However, the degree of expectation notified by the gaming machine 10 may be close to a green or a petal (cherry) pattern even when the effect lamp 540 emits red light.

The board production device 5 sends an expectation notification that cannot be represented only by the light emission mode of the production lamp 540.
50,551 assist. In addition, the board production device 550,551, the movable member 550a,551
"a" will be described as "flower", "snow", "moon", and "buki" by the letters that each structure has.

“Flower”, “snow”, “month”, and “buki” inform that the detailed degree of expectation is “1” when the display mode of each is “light off”. This indicates that the effect lamp 540 has the lowest degree of expectation among the red light emission modes. Also, the display mode of "flower" is "lit" and "snow"
When the display mode of "month" and "buki" is "extinguished", the detailed degree of expectation is "2". This indicates that the light emission mode of the effect lamp 540 has a low degree of expectation even among red colors. Further, when the display manners of "flower" and "snow" are "lighting" and the display manners of "month" and "blow" are "extinguishing", it is notified that the detailed expectation is "3". .. This indicates that the effect lamp 540 has a medium degree of expectation among the red light emission modes. Also,
When the display mode of "flower", "snow", and "blow" is "lighting", and the display mode of "month" is "off", the detailed degree of expectation is "4". This indicates that the effect lamp 540 has a high degree of expectation among the red light emission modes. Further, when the display mode of “flower”, “snow”, and “month” is “lighting” and the display mode of “blow” is “off”, the detailed expectation level is “5”.
Is notified. This indicates that the effect lamp 540 has the highest degree of expectation among the red light emission modes.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 produces an expectation level that cannot be represented by one effect lamp 540 alone.
It can be represented by the assistance of the board production devices 550 and 551 (including the movable members 550a and 551a). In addition, the game machine 10 uses the effect lamp 540 and the board effect devices 550 and 551 (including the movable members 550a and 551a) that are linked from the start winning to the change of the hold mode, so that the mutual relationship is played. It is possible to inform the player and make the player more understandable while making the game more entertaining, and to give detailed information about the degree of expectation.

It should be noted that the assistance of the board effect devices 550 and 551 (including the movable members 550a and 551a) is assisted by the display mode of the display unit included in each of the board effect devices 550 and 551 (including the movable members 550a and 551a) and movable. Assistance according to the operating mode of the members 550a, 551a.

Next, the pending change mode determination process will be described with reference to FIG. 113. FIG. 113 is a view showing a flowchart of the pending change mode determination process in the production control device of the sixth embodiment. The pending change mode determination process is a process of setting a series of pending announcement effects. The hold change mode determination process is a process performed by the control unit (CPU 311) of the effect control device 300 each time a start winning occurs. The pending change mode determination process is performed in step D23 (FIG. 44) of the main process.
Refer to) and the processing executed by the control unit.

[Step D171] The control unit determines whether the hold display 605 or the hold exhaustion display 606 is in the hold changeable state. For example, the control unit can change the hold status when there is a predetermined number of hold storages, when a prefetching advance notice command is received, when a performance time of a predetermined time can be secured, and when a condition combining these is satisfied. It can be determined that The control unit proceeds to step D172 when the hold display 605 or the hold exhaustion display 606 is in the hold changeable state, and ends the hold change mode determination processing when not in the hold changeable state.

[Step D172] The control unit executes effect game setting processing. The effect game setting process is a process of setting an effect game performed on the sub display device 530. The effect game setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 114.

[Step D173] The control unit executes operation guidance setting processing. The operation guidance setting process is
This is processing for setting operation guidance for the push button 25. The operation guidance setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 115.

[Step D174] The control unit executes the corresponding guidance setting process. Correspondence guidance setting process,
Effect lamp 540, board effect devices 550 and 551, correspondence display 562, and hold display 605.
Alternatively, it is a process of setting the presentation mode of the hold digestion display 606. The correspondence guidance setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. The control unit ends the pending change mode determination process after executing the corresponding guidance setting process.

Next, the effect game setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 114. FIG. 114 is a view showing a flowchart of the effect game setting processing in the effect control device of the sixth embodiment. The effect game setting process is a process performed by the control unit (CPU 311) of the effect control device 300 in step D172 of the pending change mode determination process.

[Step D181] The control unit determines the final hold mode of the target hold storage. The final hold mode is a final display mode in the hold display 605 or the hold exhaustion display 606, and is, for example, one of the patterns P10 to P17 (which may include the pattern P18 and the pattern P19) shown in FIG. 109. The control unit can determine the final hold mode based on the prefetching advance notice command or the like.

[Step D182] The control unit sets the pending announcement effect standby state.
[Step D183] The control unit determines whether or not the pending notice effect execution trigger is established, the process proceeds to step D185 if the pending notice effect execution trigger is established, and proceeds to step D184 if the pending notice effect execution trigger is not established.

[Step D184] The control unit determines whether or not the pending notice production standby state has ended. If the pending notice production standby state has not finished, the process proceeds to step D183 and waits for establishment of the pending notice production execution timing. On the other hand, the control unit ends the effect game setting process when the hold announcement effect standby state has ended. Note that the control unit ends the pending announcement effect standby state by a predetermined timer trigger or event trigger.

[Step D185] The control unit sets the effect game according to the establishment of the pending notice effect execution trigger. The effect game settings include effect time, effect mode, and result mode. After setting the effect game, the control unit ends the pending notice effect standby state.

Next, the operation guidance setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 115 is a view showing a flowchart of operation guidance setting processing in the production control device of the sixth embodiment. The operation guidance setting process is a process performed by the control unit (CPU 311) of the effect control device 300 in step D173 of the pending change mode determination process.

[Step D191] The control unit determines whether or not a specific result mode (for example, the entire image of the push button 25) has been derived in the effect game. The control unit proceeds to step D192 when a specific result mode is derived in the effect game, and ends the operation guidance setting process when a specific result mode is not derived.

[Step D192] The control unit determines the operation guidance mode. For example, the operation guidance modes include a single-stroke guide that guides one push-down operation of the push button 25 and a continuous-stroke guide that guides a plurality of push-button 25 push-down operations. The control unit can determine the operation guidance mode according to the final hold mode determined in step D181 of the effect game setting process.

[Step D193] The control unit sets the operation reception time according to the operation guidance mode determined in step D192. For example, the control unit sets an operation reception time of 3 seconds when performing single-stroke guidance, and sets an operation reception time of 5 seconds when performing continuous-stroke guidance.

[Step D194] The control unit sets the operation guidance display. For example, the control unit sets the display content of the display device 41 and the display content of the sub display device 530 in correspondence with the single-stroke guide and the continuous-stroke guide. The control unit ends the operation guidance setting process after setting the operation guidance display.

Next, the correspondence guidance setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 116 is a view showing a flowchart of correspondence guidance setting processing in the production control device of the sixth embodiment. The correspondence guidance setting process is a process performed by the control unit (CPU 311) of the effect control device 300 in step D174 of the pending change mode determination process.

[Step D201] The control unit determines whether or not the pressing operation of the push button 25 is detected within the operation reception time. The control unit proceeds to step D202 when the push operation of the push button 25 is detected within the operation reception time, and ends the corresponding guidance setting process when the push operation of the push button 25 is not detected.

Note that the control unit may not perform all of the hold announcement effects by not detecting the pressing operation of the push button 25, or the timing at which the corresponding hold standby display is switched to the hold exhaustion display, or the timing thereafter. It may be possible to switch to the final holding mode at the time of occurrence of the reach, development of the effect during the reach, or the like.

[Step D202] The control unit acquires the final hold mode determined in step D181 of the effect game setting process.
[Step D203] The control unit determines the corresponding guidance mode according to the final holding mode. The correspondence guidance mode here includes a display mode of the effect lamp 540, an operation mode of the board effect devices 550 and 551, and a display mode of the correspondence display 562.

[Step D204] The control unit sets the determined correspondence guidance mode as correspondence guidance.
[Step D205] The control unit sets the display mode (holding display mode) of the corresponding pending display 605 or pending consumption display 606 according to the final pending mode. The control unit ends the correspondence guidance setting process after setting the hold display mode.

Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can set a series of pending announcement effects.
Next, regarding the configuration of the display screen in the display device 41 of the modified example 1 of the sixth embodiment, FIG.
A description will be given using 17. FIG. 117 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen in the display device of Modification 1 of the sixth embodiment. Note that the same components as those of the display device 41 of the sixth embodiment described with reference to FIG.

The gaming machine 10 of the modified example 1 of the sixth embodiment also allows the position of the sub display device 530 to be changed and retracts to the lower end of the center case 40 (retracted position) and the front of the display device 41. It is possible to switch between the position to move (advance position).

First, FIG. 117(1) shows the display screens of the center case 40 and the display device 41 when the sub display device 530 is in the retracted position while the symbols are changing in the variable display game. The display device 41 includes two sets of decorative patterns, a special figure 1 reserved number display 603, a special figure 2 reserved number display 604, a reserved display 605a, and a reserved consumption display 606 in the display content.

Depending on the display mode, the hold display 605a can clearly indicate the number of hold storages of the special figure variation display game, and can also notify the expectation level for the game result for each hold storage. Hold display 605a
The number of reserved memories displayed by means the sum of the number of reserved memories displayed by the special figure 1 number of reserved displays 603 and the number of reserved memories displayed by the special figure 2 number of reserved displays 604. The hold display 605a is the sub display device 5
It is displayed in a display area that is not within the movement range of 30, for example, in the left side of the display area for each pending storage in a vertical column. The display device 41 has a hold display 6 on the left side across the large symbol group 601.
05a is arranged, and the special figure 1 reserved number display 603 and the special figure 2 reserved number display 604 are arranged on the right side, so that even if the player's line of sight greatly moves within the display area, the reserved memory is well stored. The number can be confirmed.

Next, FIG. 117(2) shows the display screens of the center case 40 and the display device 41 when the sub display device 530 is in the advanced position while the symbols are changing in the variable display game. The display device 41 includes a small symbol group 602, a special figure 1 hold number display 603, a special figure 2 hold number display 604, a hold display 605a, and a hold exhaustion display 606 in the display content.

Although the sub display device 530 is in the advanced position and hides a part of the display area of the display device 41, the hold display 605a is well visible because it is not within the movement range of the sub display device 530.

Next, the execution timing of the pending notice effect of the second modification of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 118. FIG. 118 is a diagram showing an example of a timing chart of the pending notice effect in the second modification of the sixth embodiment. In the sixth embodiment, the effect from the effect game to the change in the hold mode is performed in one variable display in the hold announcement effect, but in the second modification of the sixth embodiment, the effect game is changed to the hold mode in the hold announcement effect. The change is performed over two or more variable displays.

First, the start winning at the timing t10 can be the starting point of the pending notice effect. The effect control device 300 receives the prefetching command from the game control device 100 at the timing t10 to detect the start winning that can be the starting point of the pending notice effect.

In addition, the production control device 300 can set a pending notice production standby state in which the execution of the pending notice production is waited for. Thereby, the effect control device 300 can adjust the start timing and the execution time of the effect game on the sub display device 530. For example, the performance control device 300
Starts the production game by making it possible to cancel the suspension notice production standby state after timing t11 that exceeds the suspension shift timing, and detecting the suspension notice production execution timing at timing t12.

When the effect control device 300 starts the effect game at the timing t12, the effect control device 300 continues the effect game for a predetermined time and derives (displays) the result of the effect game at the timing t13. The duration of the effect game (from start of the effect game to derivation of the result of the effect game) may be a period within the range of one variable display being executed in parallel, or may be changed twice or more. It may be a period spanning the display.

When the overall image of the push button 25 is derived on the sub display device 530 as a result of the effect game, the effect control device 300 changes the display mode of the effect lamp 540 from timing t13 and displays the operation guidance of the push button 25. .. The change of the display mode of the effect lamp 540 functions as a prior notice for the change of the hold mode.

The effect control device 300 continues changing the display mode of the effect lamp 540 and displaying the operation guidance of the push button 25 for a predetermined time. It should be noted that the predetermined time referred to here may be a period within the range of one variable display being executed in parallel, or a period spanning two or more variable displays.

Rendering control device 300, when detecting the operation of push button 25 at timing t14, displays the correspondence guidance (for example, correspondence display 562) without waiting for the elapse of a predetermined time. Rendering control device 300 changes the display mode (hold mode) of hold display 605 or hold exhaustion display 606 in response to the corresponding guidance at timing t15.

That is, the gaming machine 10 can start the effect game when the variable display count is “n+1” and display the correspondence guidance at the timing of the variable display count “n+k (where k≧2)”. For example, the gaming machine 10 displays the display mode (for example, red) as the advance notice on the effect lamp 540 over a plurality of variable display games, and displays the display mode corresponding to the display mode of the effect lamp 540 by the corresponding display. It is succeeded to the hold display 605a and the hold exhaustion display 606. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can make the player feel a more specific expectation until the operation of the push button 25 is received. In addition, the gaming machine 10 can secure a sufficient holding effect time for performing various effects. The effect unit that changes the display mode as the advance notice is not limited to the effect lamp 540, and may be another effect location such as the board effect devices 550 and 551. In addition, the hold display 605a and the hold exhaustion display 606 that inherit the display mode of the production unit that changes the display mode as the advance notice do not necessarily have to be the same display mode, and are display modes including development and demotion. Good.

Note that the gaming machine 10 may be capable of executing an effect (for example, the effect game of the fifth embodiment) other than the pending notice effect in the sufficiently secured effect time. In this case, the gaming machine 10 may notify the duration of the sufficiently secured effect time, for example, the duration of the effect time or the duration of the effect time sufficiently secured by the sub display device 530 or another display device. You may make it display the variation|display frequency|count etc. of the inside special figure game. Further, in the game machine 10, during the sufficiently ensured effect time, the duration of the effect time sufficiently secured by the BGM or the sound effect (including the sound) output from the speakers 19a and 19b and the special figure game during the effect time are provided. You may make it notify about the frequency|count of fluctuation display etc. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can improve the player's expectation for canceling the pending notice production standby state. In addition, the gaming machine 10 can maintain the attention of the player during the sufficiently secured effect time and prevent the player from overlooking the pending notice effect.

The gaming machine 10 may delay the derivation of the result of the effect game. For example, the gaming machine 10 maintains the variation state of the effect game when the derivation of the result of the effect game is restricted by the progress of the special figure variation display game. To maintain the variation state of the effect game, there is an extension of a predetermined time with respect to the variation time, an extension until a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the restriction is released), or the like. For example, the gaming machine 10 maintains the variation state of the effect game when a predetermined effect is generated, when the special drawing game is derived from a hit, when a predetermined error is detected, and the like. Further, the gaming machine 10 may not accept the operation of the push button 25 during the delay of the derivation of the result of the effect game, or even if the operation of the push button 25 is detected, the provisional display mode ( For example, a default display mode, a display mode set in advance, a previous outlier mode, etc.) may be temporarily displayed. Further, the gaming machine 10 may forcibly stop the progress of the effect game. For example, the gaming machine 10 forcibly stops the fluctuation of the effect game when the progress of the effect game is limited by the progress of the special figure fluctuation display game. Forcibly stopping the fluctuation of the effect game includes shortening the fluctuation time partially or entirely. For example, the gaming machine 10 forcibly stops the variation of the effect game when a predetermined effect occurs, when the special drawing game derives a hit, when a predetermined error is detected, and the like. Further, the gaming machine 10 may display a display mode that is planned when the variation of the effect game is forcibly stopped, or may be a tentative display mode (for example,
A default display mode, a display mode set in advance, a previous loss mode, etc.) may be displayed. In addition, when the variation of the effect game is forcibly stopped, the gaming machine 10 may be forcibly terminated (cancelled) including the pending notice effect in which the effect game is to be played.

Further, the gaming machine 10 may have two or more effect parts for changing the display mode as the advance notice, and for example, the effect lamp 540 and the board effect devices 550 and 551 may give advance notice of the hold advance effect. Good. Here, with reference to FIG. 119, the prior notice of the pending notice effect performed by the effect lamp 540 and the board effect devices 550 and 551 will be described. FIG. 119 is a diagram showing an example of an effect aspect in the advance notice of the hold notice effect of the second modification of the sixth embodiment.

The gaming machine 10 first switches the display mode of the effect lamp 540 in the advance notice of the pending notice effect, and subsequently switches the light emission modes of the light emitting units of the board effect devices 550 and 551. At this time, the gaming machine 10 can switch the light emission mode of the light emitting units of the board production devices 550 and 551 in a plurality of stages during a sufficiently secured production time.

In the switching example shown in FIG. 119(1), the display mode of the effect lamp 540 is switched to red by the change trigger tr1, and the off-state board effect devices 550 and 551 switch the light emitting modes in synchronization after the change trigger tr1. Show. Note that the board effect device 550 is referred to as “flower” and the board effect device 551 is referred to as “snow” in the description. Further, the change trigger can be a predetermined event trigger or timer trigger such as a hold shift, a lapse of a predetermined time, or an operation detection of the push button 25. “Flower” and “snow” are switched to blue in synchronization with the change trigger tr2, and the change trigger t
It switches to green in synchronization with r3, and switches to red in synchronization with a change trigger tr4.

In the switching example shown in FIG. 119(2), the display state of the effect lamp 540 is switched to red by the change trigger tr1, and the "flower" and "snow" that are off are switched asynchronously after the change trigger tr1. Show. The “flower” is switched to blue by the change trigger tr2, switched to green by the change trigger tr3, and switched to red by the change trigger tr4. On the other hand, "snow" is switched to blue by the change trigger tr3, switched to green by the change trigger tr4, and is changed by the change trigger tr5.
Switch to red with.

In this way, the "flower" and the "snow" (board effect devices 550 and 551) are switched to the effect mode of the effect lamp 540 in a stepwise manner by switching the light emission modes in synchronization or asynchronously. In addition, the light emission modes of “flower” and “snow” are changed so that the degree of expectation increases in sequence, corresponding to the display mode as shown in FIG. It should be noted that the gaming machine 10 may or may not have the light-emission modes of “flower” and “snow” that correspond to the display mode of the effect lamp 540 depending on the number of change triggers. There may be a case where the light emission mode corresponding to the display mode is exceeded. The gaming machine 10 may notify the more detailed reliability by complementing the display mode of the effect lamp 540 with the light emission modes of “flower” and “snow”. For example, when the light emitting mode of the effect lamp 540 is red and the light emitting modes of “flower” and “snow” are red respectively, the reliability of the advance notice by the effect lamp 540 is improved, and “flower” and “snow” are displayed. If each of the light emitting modes does not reach red (for example, blue), the reliability of the advance notice by the production lamp 540 decreases, and if the light emitting modes of “flower” and “snow” each exceed red (for example, petal (cherry) pattern). ) The reliability of the advance notice by the effect lamp 540 is reduced. In addition, the final light emission modes of "flower" and "snow" may be different,
In that case, in comparison with the case where the final light emission modes of “flower” and “snow” are the same, the gaming machine 10 displays “flower”.
The light emission mode of "Snow" and the display mode of the effect lamp 540 can complement the display mode of more detailed reliability.

Next, the pending notice effect of the modified example 3 of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 120.
120: is a figure which shows an example of the pending notice production accompanied with the change of the display mode of the pending display or pending consumption display of the modification 3 of 6th Embodiment. In the sixth embodiment, the corresponding display 562 in the pending notice effect is superimposed and displayed on the large symbol group 601, but in the modified example 3 of the sixth embodiment, the corresponding display in the pending notice effect is a large symbol. It is displayed while avoiding overlapping with the group 601.

The gaming machine 10 displays a corresponding display 563 from the effect lamp 540 to the hold display 605 or the hold exhaustion display 606 in the effect area 560 of the display device 41 (FIG. 120(1)). Correspondence display 563 is a display for notifying the correspondence relationship between effect lamp 540 and hold display 605 or hold exhaustion display 606, and is, for example, a lightning effect similar to the light emitting mode of effect lamp 540. More specifically, the gaming machine 10 sets the correspondence display 563 to a red effect when the effect lamp 540 is changed to red. The correspondence display 563 may be capable of changing the shape, the size, the color, the display time, and the like according to the reliability notified as the prefetching effect, regardless of the display mode of the effect lamp 540. The correspondence display 563 is a large symbol group 601.
It goes around the left side of the large symbol group 601 so as not to be overlapped with and goes to the hold display 605 or the hold exhaustion display 606. Further, the correspondence display 563 is one that wraps around the right side of the large symbol group 601, and passes between the left symbol 601L and the middle symbol 601C, and the middle symbol 601C and the right symbol 601R so as not to overlap with the large symbol. May be. Further, the correspondence display 563 is the effect lamp 540.
It is not always necessary to go to the hold display 605 or the hold exhaustion display 606 by one road,
As shown in FIG. 120(2), the road may be branched from the effect lamp 540 into a plurality of paths, and one or more of them may be directed to the hold display 605 or the hold exhaustion display 606. In addition, the correspondence display 563 is the holding display 605 or the holding consumption display 606 from the effect lamp 540.
It may be suggested which of the hold display 605 and the hold exhaustion display 606 is to be switched depending on which route is taken, or if the color, shape, size, etc. of the changed display mode are different. You may allow it.

Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can secure the visibility of the large symbol group 601 while displaying the correspondence display 563. Further, the gaming machine 10 can increase the player's interest in the correspondence display 563.

Next, the execution timing of the pending notice effect of the modification 4 of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 121 and 122. FIG. 121 is a diagram (No. 1) showing an example of the pending notice effect accompanied by the change of the display mode of the hold display or the hold exhaustion display of the modified example 4 of the sixth embodiment. Figure 1
FIG. 22 is a diagram (No. 2) showing an example of the pending notice effect accompanied by the change of the display mode of the hold display or the hold exhaustion display of the modified example 4 of the sixth embodiment. In the sixth embodiment, the corresponding display 562 in the pending notice effect is from the effect lamp 540 to the hold display 605 or the hold exhaustion display 606.
However, in the modified example 4 of the sixth embodiment, the corresponding display in the pending notice effect goes from the effect lamp 540 to the hold display 605 or the hold exhaustion display 606 via the relay point.

The gaming machine 10 switches the display mode of the effect lamp 540 (for example, from white to green).
At the same time, the character 564 is displayed in the effect area 560 of the display device 41 (Fig. 121 (1
)). The gaming machine 10 displays a corresponding display 565 from the effect lamp 540 toward the character 564 in the effect area 560 of the display device 41 (FIG. 121(2)). The gaming machine 10 integrally displays the character 564 and the correspondence display 566 (FIG. 122(1)). Note that FIG.
In the description above, the gaming machine 10 displays the display mode as the advance notice on the effect lamp 540 over a plurality of variable display games. However, the gaming machine 10 of the modified example 4 of the sixth embodiment uses the character 564. A display mode (for example, green) as a prior notice can be displayed on the corresponding display 566 that is integrally displayed with. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can maintain the player's interest in the pending notice effect while waiting for the pending notice effect to proceed. The correspondence display 565 does not need to be distinguishable from the character 564 itself. For example,
By changing the display mode of the character 564, the character 564 can be displayed in the corresponding display 565.
It may have a function as. For example, the correspondence display 565 is the character 5
The effect may be on the back of 64, or the appearance of the character 564 may be changed (color change, form change, etc.). The gaming machine 10 displays a corresponding display 567 from the character 564 to the hold display 605 or the hold exhaustion display 606 in the effect area 560 of the display device 41, and switches the display mode of the hold display 605 or the hold exhaustion display 606 ((FIG. 122 ( 2)
).

In this way, the gaming machine 10 displays the correspondence indicator 565, the character 5 from the effect lamp 540.
The display mode of the hold display 605 or the hold exhaustion display 606 can be switched through 64 and the correspondence display 566, the correspondence display 567, and a plurality of steps. Accordingly, the gaming machine 10 can maintain the player's interest in the pending notice effect even if the pending notice effect progresses for a long period of time.

The correspondence displays 565, 566, 567 are displays for notifying the correspondence relationship between the effect lamp 540, the character 564, and the hold display 605 or the hold exhaustion display 606. Also,
The character 564 has a function as a relay display that relays the effect lamp 540 and the hold display 605 or the hold exhaustion display 606, and also serves as a first notice hold when giving a first notice over a plurality of variable display games. Have a function.

Further, the gaming machine 10 clarified the correspondence between the effect lamp 540 and the hold display 605 or the hold exhaustion display 606 by the correspondence displays 565, 566, 567, but separately, the correspondence display 562 (see FIG. 110(1)). ) Or a correspondence display 563 (see FIGS. 120(1) and 120(2)). For example, the correspondence displays 565, 566, 5
The representation of the correspondence between the effect lamp 540 and the hold display 605 or the hold exhaustion display 606 by 67 is made the first correspondence relation, and the effect lamp 540 and the hold display 605 or the hold exhaustion display 606 by the correspondence display 562 or the correspondence display 563. The correspondence relationship between and may be designated as the second correspondence relation, and the gaming machine 10 may perform the second correspondence relation later than the first correspondence relation. In that case, the gaming machine 10 expects the display mode of the hold display 605 or the hold exhaustion display 606 by the first explicit relationship from the display mode of the hold display 605 or the hold exhaustive display 606 by the second clear relationship. By setting the display mode to have a low feeling, 2
It is possible to produce a high level of expectation for the explicit correspondence of stages.

Next, the pending notice effect of the modified example 5 of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 123.
FIG. 123 is a diagram showing an example of a pending notice effect accompanied by a change of the display mode of the hold display or the hold exhaustion display in the modified example 5 of the sixth embodiment. In the sixth embodiment, the corresponding display 562 is linearly directed from the effect lamp 540 to the hold display 605 or the hold exhaustion display 606 in the pending notice effect, but in the modified example 5 of the sixth embodiment, the pending notice effect is performed. In, the corresponding display goes linearly from the effect lamp 540 to the hold display 605a or the hold exhaustion display 606.

The correspondence display 568 shown in FIG. 123(1) is directed from the effect lamp 540 to the middle symbol 601C, and then to the hold display 605a or the hold digestion display 606 after being paused on the middle symbol 601C. Further, the gaming machine 10 is not limited to one of the hold display 605a or the hold exhaustion display 606 and can branch the correspondence display 568 to change two or more display modes.
Fork 68. For example, the gaming machine 10 branches the correspondence display 568 into two on the middle symbol 601C, and goes to the first and second holding displays 605a. After that, the gaming machine 10 switches the first and second display modes of the hold display 605a. Thus, the gaming machine 10 can make the end point of the correspondence display 568 starting from the effect lamp 540 difficult to predict by displaying the correspondence display 568 in a polygonal line. In addition, the gaming machine 10 allows the player to expect that at least two of the hold display 605a and the hold exhaustion display 606 change the display mode at the same time by allowing the correspondence display 568 to branch at an intermediate point (bending point). Can be given.

It should be noted that the gaming machine 10 is not limited to one midpoint of the correspondence display 568 and may be set to two or more.
Further, the gaming machine 10 does not limit the middle point of the correspondence display 568 to the middle symbol 601C, but the left symbol 60
It may be set on 1L or the right pattern 601R. At this time, the gaming machine 10 has a left design 601L,
The degree of expectation may be different depending on which of the middle symbol 601C and the right symbol 601R the intermediate point is set to. Further, the gaming machine 10 may change the display mode of the symbol for which the midpoint of the corresponding display is set. For example, the correspondence display 56 shown in FIG. 123(2).
9, the middle point is set on the right symbol 601R, and the right symbol 601R is changed to the enlarged display mode. In addition, the change of the display mode of the symbol in which the intermediate point of the corresponding display is set is not limited to the expansion and contraction of the symbol, the change of the color, the change of the symbol type (from the symbol symbol to the symbol symbol or the symbol consisting of the number and the symbol) Character change, etc.) or the like.

Next, the pending notice effect of the modified example 6 of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 124 is a diagram showing an example of the relationship between the effect lamp, the correspondence display, and the hold display in the modified example 6 of the sixth embodiment. The correspondence display 562 of the sixth embodiment is basically a display correspondence corresponding to the display mode of the effect lamp 540 and the display mode of the hold display 605 (including the hold display 605a and the hold exhaustion display 606). The corresponding display of the modified example 6 of the embodiment is the effect lamp 54.
The correspondence relationship between the display mode of 0 and the display mode of the hold display 605 is not limited to 1:1.

The relationship between the effect lamp 540 and the corresponding display shown in FIG. 124(1) is a one-to-one relationship because the display mode of the corresponding display is white when the display mode of the effect lamp 540 is white. On the other hand, since the correspondence display of the white display mode can correspond to the hold display 605 of the white, blue, green, or red display mode, the correspondence display and the hold display 605 have a one-to-many correspondence Is. The correspondence display in which the display mode is white has a correspondence relationship with the display mode in which the degree of expectation set to the white or higher is set. That is, even when the effect lamp 540 and the corresponding display are white, the gaming machine 10 can make the player feel an expectation that the hold display 605 may be white, blue, green, or red.

The relationship between the effect lamp 540 and the corresponding display shown in FIG. 124(2) is a one-to-one correspondence because the display mode of the corresponding display is the tiger pattern when the display mode of the effect lamp 540 is the tiger pattern. On the other hand, since the correspondence display with the tiger pattern as the display mode can correspond to the hold display 605 with the white, blue, green, or tiger pattern as the display mode, the correspondence display and the hold display 605 have a one-to-many relationship. It is a correspondence. The correspondence display in which the display mode is the tiger pattern has a correspondence relationship with the display mode in which the degree of expectation set to the tiger pattern or less is set. That is, game machine 10
Does not guarantee that the hold display 605 will be the tiger pattern even if the effect lamp 540 and the corresponding display are the tiger pattern, but it is possible to increase the opportunity for the player to come into contact with the tiger pattern.

The relationship between the effect lamp and the corresponding display is not necessarily one to one. As shown in FIG. 124(3), the relationship between the effect lamp and the corresponding display may be a one-to-many corresponding relationship, and the relationship between the corresponding display and the hold display 605 may be one-to-one. The relationship between the effect lamp 540 and the corresponding display shown in FIG. 124(1) is such that when the effect lamp 540 has a white display mode, the corresponding display has a higher expectation level. When the pattern is a tiger pattern, the correspondence display may have a lower expectation. In this way, the gaming machine 10 produces the effect lamp 54.
The correspondence may be changed depending on the display mode of 0. Similarly, the gaming machine 10 may change the correspondence depending on the display mode of the correspondence display.

Next, the pending notice effect of the modified example 7 of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 125.
FIG. 125 is a diagram showing an example of the relationship between the effect lamp, the correspondence display, and the hold display in the modified example 7 of the sixth embodiment. The correspondence display 562 of the sixth embodiment is basically a display correspondence corresponding to the display mode of the effect lamp 540 and the display mode of the hold display 605 (including the hold display 605a and the hold exhaustion display 606). The corresponding display of the modified example 7 of the embodiment is the effect lamp 54.
The correspondence relationship between the display mode of 0 and the correspondence display is related to the correspondence relationship between the correspondence display and the display manner of the hold display 605. That is, in the correspondence display of the modified example 7 of the sixth embodiment, which display mode of the hold display 605 is not determined only by the display mode of the correspondence display, and the display mode of the effect lamp 540 and the display mode of the correspondence display. The display mode of the hold display 605 can be determined in combination with. In other words, in the correspondence display of the modified example 7 of the sixth embodiment, the player cannot predict which of the display modes of the hold display 605 will be the display mode of the correspondence display, and the display mode of the effect lamp 540. The player can predict the display mode of the hold display 605 in combination with the display mode of the correspondence display. In addition, the display mode of the effect lamp 540, the display mode of the corresponding display, and the display mode of the hold display 605 may be determined each time, or may be determined in advance as a combination.

First, the relationship example shown in FIG. 125(1) will be described. When the display mode of the effect lamp 540 is red, the effect control device 300 sets the hold display 60 when the corresponding display mode is red.
The display mode of 5 has a cherry blossom (petal) pattern with probability p11, is red with probability p12, and is white with probability p13. Moreover, when the display mode of the effect lamp 540 is red and the display mode of the corresponding display is white, the effect control device 300 sets the display mode of the hold display 605 to a cherry blossom (petal) pattern with a probability p21 and red with a probability p22. , With probability p23 to white. At this time, the gaming machine 10 is p11.
By setting <p21, it is possible to produce a feeling of expectation to obtain a higher expectation degree on the hold display 605 even if the expectation degree indicated by the effect lamp 540 is demoted by the corresponding display. It should be noted that the gaming machine 10 may further clarify the sense of expectation that the player can supervise by setting p11=0.
Further, the gaming machine 10 has p12≠p13 (for example, p12>p13) and p22≠p23(
For example, by setting p22<p23), it is possible to create an interest that makes the player predict the display mode of the hold display 605 by combining the display mode of the effect lamp 540 and the display mode of the corresponding display.

Next, the relationship example shown in FIG. 125(2) will be described. Here, some display modes are omitted for simplification of description, but as described using FIG. 109, the effect control device 300 displays the hold display 605 (including the hold display 605a and the hold exhaustion display 606). Red in the display mode>
Set the expectations so that green>blue>white. Even if the display mode of the effect lamp 540 is red and the display mode of the hold display 605 is red, the effect control device 300 can differentiate the degree of expectation by the display mode of the corresponding display. For example, the performance control device 300 is
The route r1 in which the display mode of the correspondence display is red, the route r2 in green, and the route r in blue
3 and white route r4, the degree of expectation is set for each route so that r4>r3>r2>r1.

The same can be applied to the case where the display mode of the effect lamp 540 that is the starting point of the route is different, as in the relation example shown in FIG. 125(3). For example, the effect control device 300 has a route r11 in which the display mode of the effect lamp 540 and the display mode of the corresponding display are red, a route r12 in green, a route r13 in blue, and a route r14 in white. When r1
The degree of expectation for each route is set so that 4>r13>r12>r11.

Note that the hold display 605 and the hold exhaustion display 606 shown in FIG. 102 and the like, and the hold display 605a and the hold exhaustion display 606 shown in FIG. 117 are displayed in addition to or on the display device 41. Instead, it may be displayed on a display device different from the display device 41. For example, the gaming machine 10 may include a dedicated display device that exclusively displays the pending displays 605, 605a and the pending digest display 606. More specifically, the gaming machine 10 is provided with a full-color LED as a dedicated display device for each of the hold display 605, 605a and the hold exhaustion display 606, and causes the full-color LED to emit light in the emission color corresponding to the display mode shown in FIG. .. Note that the gaming machine 10 can realize the distinction of the light emission modes corresponding to the display modes shown in FIG. 109 by the lighting color of the full-color LED, the blinking cycle, the brightness, or a combination thereof. For example, the gaming machine 10 turns on a full-color LED with a corresponding emission color for display modes such as “white”, “blue”, “green”, “red”, and “sakura”, and displays a “rainbow” display mode. Can be realized by sequentially switching 7 colors to turn on, displaying the "tiger" in blinking yellow, and displaying the "intense heat" by sequentially switching the brightness in red. In addition, the gaming machine 10 may include a single-color LED instead of the full-color LED.
The single color LED is caused to emit light in a light emitting mode corresponding to the display mode shown in FIG. In addition, the gaming machine 10
The distinction of the light emission modes corresponding to the display modes shown in FIG.
Alternatively, it can be realized by a combination thereof. For example, the gaming machine 10 can display the degree of expectation corresponding to the display mode by delaying the blinking cycle as the degree of expectation is lower and making the blinking cycle earlier as the degree of expectation is higher. Further, the gaming machine 10 may include a second liquid crystal display device as a sub liquid crystal display device in addition to the display device 41, and the hold displays 605, 605a and the hold exhaustion display 606 in the same display mode as the display device 41. You may make it display on a 2nd liquid crystal display device.

The effect lamp 540 and the board effect devices 550 and 551 may be configured as the same unit or may be configured separately. Further, the effect lamp 540 and the board effect devices 550 and 551 may be one effect device having both functions.

In the gaming machine 10, in addition to the game control device 100 monitoring required errors, the effect control device 300 monitors operation errors of the board effect devices 550 and 551. The operation error of the board production devices 550, 551 is abnormal such as a state in which the board production devices 550, 551 have not returned to the initial positions in the initial state, or a state in which the positional movement of the board production devices 550, 551 cannot be confirmed in the operating state. Is an error to be notified as. The operation error of the board effect devices 550 and 551 may be notified by a display on the display device 41 or the like, or the speaker 19a.
, 19b or the like may be used for notification by sound (including voice).
, 551 may be used to provide notification according to the light emission mode. Board production device 55
For the 0,551 operation errors, the notification may be ended by removing the cause of the error, or the notification may be ended when a predetermined condition is satisfied regardless of the removal of the cause of the error. For example, the effect control device 300 may end the notification by detecting the push operation of the push button 25, elapse of a predetermined time from the occurrence of an error, or re-turning on after power-off, or a combination of these (for example, power-on again). The error notification may be performed later, and the notification may be ended after the elapse of 30 seconds). In addition, the production control device 300 may cancel the power saving and notify the error when an operation error of the board production device 550, 551 is detected during the power saving (waiting for the customer), or the result of the game immediately. Therefore, the error notification may be performed after the condition for canceling the power saving is satisfied (for example, the game starts). In addition, when the production control device 300 detects an operation error of the panel production devices 550 and 551 when the power is turned on, the production control device 300 issues an error notification after the initialization processing is completed (for example, in the normal processing state). Good. At this time, the effect control device 300 may change the notification mode depending on whether or not the game state is a predetermined game state. For example, the effect control device 300 notifies the operation error by voice and a lamp/LED when the game state is changing the special drawing game, and outputs the operation error by voice when the game state is not changing the special drawing game. You may make it notify by a display in addition to a lamp and LED. Further, the effect control device 300 may notify the operation error of the board effect devices 550 and 551 without waiting for the command reception from the game control device 100 after the power is turned on, or may receive a predetermined command from the game control device 100. Waiting for the board production device 550,5
The operation error 51 may be reported. The predetermined command here may be, for example, an initialization command (power-on command, power failure recovery command, model designation command, etc.) that can confirm the start-up of the game control device 100, or a game that can confirm the start of the game by the player. It may be a progressive command (for example, a hold number command, a symbol variation command, a symbol stop command, etc.).

The gaming machine 10 of the above-described sixth embodiment (including modifications) has the following features in one aspect.
(1) The gaming machine 10 stores a starting memory as an execution right of the first game (special figure 1 variable display game, special figure 2 variable display game: large symbol group 601, small symbol group 602), and in the starting memory A pending display (eg, pending display 605) in response to the starting memory associated with the corresponding first game result.
It is possible to change the display mode (for example, FIG. 109) of the display and hold decommissioning display 606) to execute the pending notice effect, and to display the large symbol group 601 and the small symbol group 602 on the first display unit (for example, the display device 41). Display area) and a second display portion (for example, a hold display 605 on the display device 41).
Or a display area of the pending consumption display 606), a third display section (for example, a display area of the effect game on the sub display device 530), a fourth display section (for example, an effect lamp 540), and a movable section (for example, a board). Rendering devices 550, 551) and operation unit (for example, push button 25)
And a control unit (game control device 100, effect control device 300). The first display section can display the first game. The second display unit can display a hold display. The third display is
It is possible to display a second game (effect game) that is executed in parallel with the first game. The fourth display unit can display a predetermined display. The movable portion can operate in a predetermined operation mode. The operation unit can accept an operation. The control unit guides the operation of the operation unit when the third display unit displays a specific result mode in the second game (for example, FIG. 103(4)) (
For example, the operation guide display 561) is displayed on the first display section, and when the operation section receives an operation, the movable section is moved from the first state (for example, FIG. 80(1)) to the second state (for example, FIG. 8).
0(2)) and the predetermined display is displayed on the fourth display section (FIG. 106), and the correspondence between the display mode of the predetermined display on the fourth display section and the display mode of the hold display on the second display section is changed. A corresponding relationship notification display (for example, the correspondence display 562) to be notified is displayed on the first display unit, and the second
It is possible to execute a hold announcement effect that changes the display mode of the hold display on the display unit (FIG. 107(1)).

(2) In the hold announcement effect, the control unit according to (2), in combination with at least one of the display mode of the predetermined display and the operation mode of the movable unit on the fourth display unit, and the display mode of the hold display, The degree of expectation regarding the result of the first game is notified (FIG. 112).

(3) The gaming machine 10 stores the starting memory as the execution right of the game (special figure 1 variable display game, special figure 2 variable display game: large symbol group 601, small symbol group 602), and corresponds to the starting memory. It is possible to change the display mode (for example, FIG. 109) of the hold display (for example, the hold display 605 or the hold exhaustion display 606) according to the starting memory in relation to the result of the game, and execute the hold advance notice effect. 1 display unit (for example, large symbol group 601 and small symbol group 602 in the display device 41)
Display area), a second display section (for example, effect lamp 540), and a control section (game control device 100, effect control device 300). The first display unit can display a game and a hold display. The second display unit can display a predetermined display. The control unit waits the predetermined display on the second display unit over a plurality of games, and notifies the correspondence relationship between the predetermined display waited on the second display unit and the display mode of the hold display on the first display unit. The related notification display is displayed on the first display unit at the timing of changing the display mode of the hold display (see FIGS. 118, 121, 122, etc.).
..

(4) The gaming machine 10 stores a start memory as an execution right of the game (special figure 1 variable display game, special figure 2 variable display game: large symbol group 601, small symbol group 602) based on the satisfaction of a predetermined condition. A game that stores and variably displays a plurality of identification information corresponding to the starting memory is executed, and a hold display corresponding to the starting memory is associated with the result of the game (for example, hold display 605 or hold exhaustion display 606). It is possible to change the display mode (for example, FIG. 109) to execute the pending announcement effect, and the first display unit (for example, the large symbol group 601 or the small symbol group 602 on the display device 41).
Display area), a second display section (for example, a display area of the hold display 605 or the hold exhaustion display 606 on the display device 41), a third display section (for example, an effect lamp 540), and a control section (
The game control device 100 and the effect control device 300) are included. The first display unit can display a game. The second display unit can display a hold display. The third display unit and the predetermined display can be displayed. The control unit variably displays the correspondence relationship notification display that notifies the correspondence relationship between the display mode of the predetermined display on the third display unit and the display mode of the hold display on the second display unit at the timing of changing the display mode of the hold display. It is displayed on the first display unit so as to straddle the identification information therein (Fig. 1
18, FIG. 120 et al.).

(5) The gaming machine 10 stores a starting memory as an execution right of the game (special figure 1 variable display game, special figure 2 variable display game: large symbol group 601, small symbol group 602), and corresponds to the starting memory. It is possible to change the display mode (for example, FIG. 109) of the hold display (for example, the hold display 605 or the hold exhaustion display 606) according to the starting memory in relation to the result of the game, and execute the hold advance notice effect. 1 display unit (for example, large symbol group 601 and small symbol group 602 in the display device 41)
Of the display area, the display area of the hold display 605 and the hold exhaustion display 606 in the display device 41), the second display unit (for example, the effect lamp 540), and the control unit (game control device 100, effect control device 300), including. The first display unit can display a game and a hold display. Second
The display unit can display a predetermined display. The control unit displays, on the first display unit, a correspondence notification display for notifying the correspondence between the display mode of the predetermined display on the second display unit and the display mode of the hold display on the first display unit, and the correspondence notification display. It is possible to execute a pending notice effect that acts on the display mode of the pending display via a specific display (for example, the character 564) that can be displayed on the first display unit (see FIG. 118, FIG. 121, FIG. 122 and others).

(6) The gaming machine 10 stores the starting memory as an execution right of the game (special figure 1 variable display game, special figure 2 variable display game: large symbol group 601, small symbol group 602), and corresponds to the starting memory. It is possible to change the display mode (for example, FIG. 109) of the hold display (for example, the hold display 605 or the hold exhaustion display 606) according to the starting memory in relation to the result of the game, and execute the hold advance notice effect. 1 display unit (for example, large symbol group 601 and small symbol group 602 in the display device 41)
Display area), and the second display unit (the hold display 605 and the hold exhaustion display 60 on the display device 41).
6 display areas) and a control unit (game control device 100, effect control device 300). The first display unit can display a game. The second display unit can display a hold display. The control unit can display, on the first display unit, a plurality of types of action displays (for example, correspondence display 563) capable of executing the hold announcement effect that acts on the hold display on the first display unit. One of the action displays is displayed, and the display mode of the hold display is changed to a display mode corresponding to the one action display (see FIG. 120 and the like).

The above processing functions can be realized by a computer. In that case, a program describing the processing contents of the functions that the gaming machine of the embodiment should have is provided. By executing the program on a computer, the above processing functions are realized on the computer. The program describing the processing content can be recorded in a computer-readable recording medium. A computer-readable recording medium includes a magnetic storage device,
There are optical disks, magneto-optical recording media, semiconductor memories, and the like. The magnetic storage device includes a hard disk device (HDD), a flexible disk (FD), a magnetic tape, and the like. The optical disc includes a DVD (Digital Versatile Disk), a DVD-RAM, a CD (Compact Disk)-RO.
There are M/RW (ReWritable) and the like. Magneto-optical recording media include MO (Magneto-Optical disk)
Etc.

When distributing the program, for example, a DVD or C on which the program is recorded
Portable recording media such as D-ROMs are sold. It is also possible to store the program in the storage device of the server computer and transfer the program from the server computer to another computer via a network.

The computer that executes the program stores, for example, the program recorded in the portable recording medium or the program transferred from the server computer in its own storage device. Then, the computer reads the program from its own storage device and executes processing according to the program. The computer can also read the program directly from the portable recording medium and execute processing according to the program. Further, the computer can also sequentially execute processing according to the received program every time the program is transferred from a server computer connected via a network.

In addition, at least a part of the above processing functions is executed by a DSP (Digital Signal Processor), A
SIC (Application Specific Integrated Circuit), PLD (Programmable Logic De)
It can also be realized by an electronic circuit such as vice).

Note that the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine as shown in the disclosed embodiment as a gaming machine, and for example, other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, sparrow ball gaming machines, etc. The present invention can be applied to all gaming machines that use the game balls and slot machines that are gaming machines that use medals.

In addition, the disclosed embodiments are to be considered as illustrative in all points and not restrictive. Moreover, you may apply combining each structure of the above-mentioned embodiment and a modification. The scope of the invention is indicated by the claims rather than the above description,
It is intended that all modifications within the meaning and range of equivalency of the claims be embraced.

10 Gaming Machine 41 Display Device 100 Game Control Device 300 Performance Control Device

Claims (2)

A starting memory is stored as an execution right of the first game, and the display mode of the holding display corresponding to the starting memory is changed in association with the result of the first game corresponding to the starting memory, and the pending notice effect can be executed. A gaming machine,
A first display unit capable of displaying the first game;
A second display unit capable of displaying the hold display;
A third display unit capable of displaying a second game executed in parallel with the first game;
A fourth display unit capable of displaying a predetermined display,
A movable part operable in a predetermined operation mode,
An operation unit that can accept operations,
When a guide display for guiding the operation of the operation unit is displayed on the first display unit when the third display unit displays a specific result mode in the second game, and when the operation unit receives the operation The movable portion is changed from the first state to the second state, the predetermined display is displayed on the fourth display portion, and the display mode of the predetermined display on the fourth display portion and the hold display on the second display portion are displayed. The correspondence notification display for notifying the correspondence with the display mode of
A control unit capable of executing the pending notice effect which is displayed on the display unit and changes the display mode of the pending display on the second display unit;
A gaming machine including. The control unit is
In the suspension notice effect, the result of the first game is obtained by combining at least one of the display mode of the predetermined display and the operation mode of the movable section on the fourth display unit with the display mode of the suspension display. The degree of expectations regarding
The gaming machine according to claim 1.

Images